Home

Profile Family User Guide

Contents

1. Changing LTC Input and Output Names Changing LTC Input and Output Names The LTC longitudinal timecode inputs and outputs dialog box allows you to rename the LTC inputs and outputs To change an LTC name 1 Click or double click LTC Input amp Output in the configuration tree and LTC Input amp Output dialog box appears 2 Select an LTC input or output name 3 Position the edit cursor within the appropriate edit box 4 Enter the new name or portion of a name 5 The new name appears in the name list 6 Click Undo to return the name or names as they were at the time the dialog box appeared 7 Click Close to accept the new LTC name or names LTC Input amp Output Name Change Window Input TC Name Qutout LTC Name LTC n1 J16 LTC 0 utl J16 LTC In J1b LTC Oute J1b LTC In3 J1b LTC Outa J1b LTC In4 J1b LTC Out4 J16 Close Niele Figure 10 LTC Inputs amp Outputs dialog box 3 March 2000 Profile Family 45 46 Y Chapter2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager Using DVCPRO Codecs The Profile DVCPRO 50 codecs are actually pairs of DVCPRO codecs operating together If you wish to use a DVCPRO 50 codec you must use Configuration Manager to assign a pair of DVCPRO 25 codecs for use as a DVCPRO 50 codec The DVCPRO 50 codec can then be used in all of your applications such as VdrPanel Once the DVCPRO 50 codec is assigned the corresponding DVCPRO 25 codecs are not available for DVCPRO 25 oper
2. cccccccccsseeeceeeeeeseseesseeseeseeeesseeseeeaaeessseseeeees 278 Saving a TimeDelay Project ccccccececseeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeees 279 Opening an Existing PrO eCt scissile eset A a es aad 279 Launching a Project at Start Up ccccccccessseeeeeceeeseeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeeeeeseeseeseeeeesseageseees 279 Copying Project Files Between Machines cccccccceesseeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeaeseseeeesaeaneesees 279 Connecting to a Remote Profile Unit cc cccccceececesneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseseeeesaeaneeeees 280 Changing the Remote Connection siscesesisc ccvsecscneiansdcavedinstues dcetesselesiecd are siaveertend 281 Adding Names to the Network Host List ccccsssseeecseeseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeseeessaaeees 281 Removing Names from the Network Host LiSt cc eeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeaae ee eeeeeeeaaaees 282 Avoiding a Connection Change xfs secre tecccsercesence nts deters one oaatac oates himaceence eewaxttecenees 282 Configuring Channels with Resource Manager ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeees 283 Adding a lay back GaN eC seis Set cence E 283 Deleting a Playback Channel cccccssccccccssseeeeeseeeeeeseeseeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeeessaeseeseseneeeees 283 Changing a Panels NAM Cc scseit cee cca ele ncn octet a 52 aimed tee din race oedsaneceen 285 Modifying a Channel s Configuration cccccccccesseeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeseeeaeseeeeeeaeseeeeee
3. 60 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Analog Composite Video Output Use the Line Course or Fine boxes to set the timing adjustment amounts When the timing adjustments are done with a waveform monitor you can visually move the signal so that it matches the reference Click Default to reset the values to 0 which is the point where the output signal timing is aligned with the reference genlock signal 6 Under Procamp Adjustment you can modify the output signal to compensate for any irregularities in the signal path All changes take place immediately Enable Procamp must be checked before anything in this group can be adjusted This enables you to setup the Procamp and then disable it without losing the setup Luminance enabled specifies only the luminance portion of the signal is output The signal is black and white Gaussian Chroma Filter determines the type of filter used on the chrominance portion of the signal If the Gaussian Chroma Filter is selected the filter has a long slow roll off to prevent ringing If it is not selected then a brickwall filter is used Although this may introduce ringing into the signal it maintains the integrity of the signal for multiple processing Use the Gaussian Filter as a last step before transmission and if ringing suppression is required Do not use this filter if you are doing multiple processes passes on the signal or if the material 1s in component form The Procamp controls are adjusted w
4. 8 Click the Advanced button and make your codec selection for JPEG see Figure 152 or DVCPRO see Figure 153 You can choose only one video codec at a time Resource Manager 6010278 8 Channel A 8 Channel E Name Type Add Channel Channel B Player Recorder E Remove Channel ae Channel B 5 Timecode Aiak ae fH Track 1 Delete Track Configuration tor Wideo Track 1 JPEG Codec C None l n Eq JPEG 2 JPEG 3 LJJPEG 4 Cancel Apply Help Figure 152 JPEG codec check boxes 3 March 2000 Profile Family 265 da Chapter 10 Using the Resource Manager Santee ae OSAKA 1 BAY video Eh Audio SEEN Timecode fA Track 1 lt None gt LJ DVCPRO25 4 Figure 153 DVCPRO codec check boxes 266 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Configuring Video Resources Field and Frame Setup NOTE You can select field dominance only for JPEG DVCPRO 25 and DVCPRO 50 set by default to Field I dominance To set field dominance and still play mode 1 Select the Video icon in the configuration tree the field dominance and still play mode controls appear at the bottom of the Resource Manager dialog box see Figure 154 2 Field dominance determines which field is the mark in or mark out point for the frame The default is Field 1 To set it to Field 2 click the button 3 Still play mode determines whether your still frames are interlaced or line
5. Vid I Cmpst Analog composite Video Input 2 video In the next example a system that uses all four available clock references might be configured with two serial digital component boards In this specific example shown in Table 5 the panel in the tab shows System Video Input 1 Video Input 2 Video Input 3 and Video Input 4 80 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Input Clocking Table 5 Configuration example four video input clocking sources Board Tag Board Type ee Input Clock Reference Vid I O SDI Serial digital com Video Input 1 VA ponent Video Input 2 Vid I O SDI Serial digital com Video Input 3 VA ponent Video Input 4 Audio Signal Processing Board 1 JE Input Mapping Input Clocking Output Mapping Monitor Channels Audio Clack Reference Source h D B El a f ea eE e Djaja jala EN Lani EES ESN fii Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch 5 y mm G CEEA C CE C CE C af Jf J J J oI oo a a a a ee ae ee E a E h 16 Figure 38 Audio Configuration dialog box Input Clocking tab To change the input clocking ee 1 Choose Option Audio Configuration Board 1 or 2 or click an ASPB Configuration E button The Audio Configuration dialog box appears Click the Input Clocking tab 1f it isn t already displayed 2 Click the button in the Audio Clock Reference Source column for the desired channels and select one of up to five choices System default or Video Input The number of
6. cceeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeees 107 MPEG Custom Video Quality Settings dialog DOX ou eecccccceeccccessseeeeeseeeeeeeeeneees 108 Transcode Utility dialog box Convert tab ccccccescccceceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeesenseeeeeaes 109 Profile Family 9 da Contents 57 The Transcode Description dialog DOX cceccecessseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeessesseeeesanees 110 58 Transcode Utility dialog box Preview tab ccccssceceeceeseeeceeeeeeeeeseeeseessenseeeeeagees 111 59 Import Cartridge dialog DOX cc eeccceccessseeeeeceeeaaeeeeeseeeeesaeeeeeeseeeaseeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeaeaas 115 60 Export Cartridge dialog DOX srsiens deck ceeteccepiecen ct cedcesoccesaatetossecausupactecnaseshis sebecednebcekecededt 116 61 Confirm Update dialog DOX ccccccccccceecseeseeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeesuseeseseeeesaaageseeeees 117 62 Confirm Inventory dialog bOX nnnnnennnnnssnnnnnneeesrnnnenernrrrnrnssnnnrrnrresrnnrnsnnnnrnreresn 118 63 Confirm Inventory dialog DOX nnonennnnnsnnnnnnneesennnnenrnnrrnrnssnnnrnnrresrnnrnsnnnnrnrrres n 119 64 Format Cartridge dialog BOX sccccccecwccctecceesatt lane ce fea centicedee sence veewngoccesaaceneceaceun eens ade 120 65 Format Cartridge dialog DOX ccccccccccccessseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeesueaeeeseeeesaaaeseeeees 121 66 Properties dialog box for the library ccccceeseeceeseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaeseeeeeaeeeeeneas 122 67 Properties dia
7. copymovie PROFILE1 INT default movie1 INT default movie7 204 Profile Family 3 March 2000 The PDR Network Configuration Service The PDR Network Configuration Service The PDR Network Configuration service fences collects information about other PDRs on the network via multicast and maintains a local table of the information It also will update the c winnt system32 drivers etc hosts file if the feconfig hta option is set to on and only if it is set to on This service has the following standard command line options fcncs install installs the service on the system The service starts automatically when installed fcncs remove removes the service from the system fcncs start starts the service fcncs stop stops the service 3 March 2000 Profile Family 205 F Chapter 7 Fibre Channel Video Networking 206 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Chapter 8 Using the Tool Box Editor Storing media on a Profile system rather than on tape opens the door to almost instant access to video and audio material Media is available to all of Profile s channels at once so you can play a video on more than one channel at the same time Since each of the channels up to four is independent playback can start at a different time and place in a clip One of the best features of the Profile system is that you can start playing material while it s still being recorded The basic element of digitally stored video and audio is
8. 4 To add a clip to the current list loaded in step 1 select a clip in the Clips box and then click Add It is added to the Clip List box with a long clip name 5 To remove a clip from the current list select a clip from the Clip List box and click Remove to remove the clip from the list This does not delete the clip from disk it simply removes a reference from the clip list 6 To edit a different group click Add Group to bring up the Load Group of Clips dialog box 7 Click OK when complete 3 March 2000 Profile Family 163 Chapter4 Using VdrPanel Setting In and Out Marks in Clips You can set a temporary beginning and ending to a clip by marking an in point an out point or both The video and audio data is not lost however it simply is not used when the clip is played For example 1f you set a mark in point five seconds into a clip it plays at the five second mark instead of at the beginning but if you remove a mark in it returns the beginning of the clip to the actual clip start NOTE Setting in and out marks applies to Panel Control only It is not recommended for other protocols Setting Marks To set a new in mark and out mark in a clip 1 Click a panel to select it 2 Create a clip load a clip or load a clip list and then select a clip from the list The Clip Position Bar is all the way to the left and the Timecode is 00 00 00 00 3 Use the transport controls drag the Clip Position Bar or
9. 9 If there is media in the list that you have decided not to convert select it in the media pane then click Remove 10 If you want to delete the original clip or master automatically after it is converted click Delete source after conversion This will save disk space NOTE A deleted clip or master cannot be restored 11 Click Start The Transcode Description dialog box appears Enter a descriptive message to be stored as part of the transcode history and when done click OK to continue the conversion 3 March 2000 Profile Family 109 da Chapter 3 Using Media Manager Transcode Description EJ Enter Descriptions Figure 57 The Transcode Description dialog box The conversion starts with the first clip or master in the list and continues to the last If the media are not deleted see step 10 the source clips and masters are moved to a backup bin For example 1f the source media is in the default bin the original source is moved to a bin called default_bak bin basename plus _bak You can stop the conversion process at any time by clicking Stop Start the process again by clicking Restart NOTE An error occurs listed in the Status column when a clip is the wrong video standard is already present in the _bak bin or cannot be opened among other faults 12 Click Close or choose File Exit 110 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Using the Transcode Utility Transcode Utility CDX_03 SOl Oubs 14 1 SD1
10. After choosing a log set click the Next button to advance to the size selection screen Figure 106 Choose one of these three sizes e 1 4 MB file size Select this file size if you are using floppy diskettes to send the information to Grass Valley Group e Single file e Custom file size enter a number in the field to specify the number of 100 000 byte blocks minimum 2 The single file and custom file size selections allow you to choose the file size that is most convenient for you to ftp or e mail to Grass Valley Group Clicking the Back button returns to the log set selection screen if you want to change your log set selection Untitled Profile Log Capture Tool Figure 106 Size selection screen 176 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Log Capture Tool The Next button completes the log capture and file sizing process and advances you to the Log Tool Complete screen The Log Tool Complete screen displays the location of the ZIP files that were created from the log set that you selected Carefully note the location of the files created then click OK to exit the program NOTE Clicking OK does not send any files to Grass Valley Group it merely ends the program To send the files you must copy them to floppy disk or transmit them using ftp or e mail Untitled Profile Log Capture Tool C profileslogs archiveX LOG 50 07 OO0XPLO 0 1 zip C profileslogs varchive5SLUGS0 0 000SPLOFO FZ zip C profileslogs
11. Create Mark In Create Mark Out Shuttle Rate oe User Mark Shuttle Slider Previous Frame Next Frame Previous Event Next Event User Mark or Edit Figure 126 Create and User Mark buttons plus event and frame controls 3 March 2000 Creating a Subclip To create a subclip 1 Select the clip in the current bin from which you want to create a subclip 2 Choose Load from the Media menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click You can also click the Load button on the current bin display toolbar The clip is loaded onto the capture timeline 3 Enter a name for the subclip in the Clip Name text box This is optional as a default name is automatically generated Move the current position cursor to the desired starting location 4 5 Click on the Create Mark in button 6 Move the current position cursor to the desired ending location 7 Click on the Create Mark out button The subclip is added to the current bin User Marks You can insert a user mark into a clip so that you can easily jump to that mark later in the editing process You insert the mark by placing the current position cursor and then clicking on the User Mark button A user mark is inserted at the current time cursor position You can jump to user marks by clicking on the Previous Event and Next Event buttons To remove the current user mark 1 With the clip loaded on the capture timeline locate the exact frame where the user mark
12. Whenever you start the Media Manager a Hardware Communication Monitor is also started 1f it is not already running This program makes calls to the disk recorder and keeps track of the Profile host file profile hst which lists Profile systems on the network The Hardware Communication Monitor is normally invisible in its operation but is essential to the operation of Media Manager It appears in the Processes tab of the Windows NT Task Manager as VMHWCOM EXE ending this process will stop Media Manager as well Profile Family 3 March 2000 Starting Other Applications from the Tools Menu Starting Other Applications from the Tools Menu You can start other tools and applications from Media Manager s Tools menu Choose Tools Transfer Monitor to start the Transfer Monitor tool See Viewing the Transfer Monitor on page 127 Choose Tools Media Manager to start another instance of the Media Manager Choose Tools Tool Box Editor to start the optional Tool Box Editor if available See Chapter 8 Using the Tool Box Editor Choose Tools List Manager to start the optional List Manager if available See Chapter 9 Using the List Manager Choose Tools Transcode to start the Transcode Utility which allows you to convert JPEG clips to MPEG or DVCPRO clips and covert MPEG or DVCPRO clips to JPEG clips See Using the Transcode Utility on page 105 When an application is started from the Media Manager it i
13. 3 March 2000 Setting Compression Presets Setting Compression Presets NOTE Compression presets are not applicable for DVCPRO which uses fixed data rates The Profile Options dialog box lets you select a video compression preset and edit the preset values 1 Click the desired compression preset The options range from highest quality which uses the most disk space and records less material to the lowest quality which uses much less disk space and records more material A custom setting is also available 2 Edit the preset values Refer to Table 8 for the JPEG factory set preset values To change the values click Edit Presets to open the Edit Compression Presets dialog box shown in Figure 80 You can change the values of the presets if desired Select the preset in the Preset Name box change the values under JPEG and then click OK 3 For JPEG settings Min Lum Q sets the minimum compression that can be applied to luminance in a field to meet the target data rate typically 0 75 which is also the lowest rate Max Chroma Q sets the maximum compression that can be applied to chrominance in a video field to meet the target data rate typically 100 Fixed Q sets a fixed picture quality and ignores variation in field size Use this mode for critical multigeneration work When Fixed Q is selected the other fields become fixed as Lum Q fixed luminance compression and Chroma Q fixed chrominance Q Useful starting val
14. 4 0 To set unity the audio meter must be selected and the input or output gain adjustment button must be selected e Input gain adjustment mode This button activates the input level arrow left side for fader adjustments e Output gain adjustment mode This button activates the output level arrow right side for fader adjustments e Scale adjustment increase decrease These buttons zoom in or zoom out on the audio display scale in the range of 6 to 6 dB 3 March 2000 Profile Family 227 228 Chapter amp Using the Tool Box Editor Tool Box Editor Keyboard Shortcuts The Tool Box Editor automatically programs a number of keyboard shortcuts Profile Family Table 13 Tool Box Editor Keyboard Shortcuts Shortcut Key Activate Channel 1 oe fe eene Pe Aativate Chanel ee Seletvideo Pa o eeo E e ooo i pees ooo pea Oooo i eooo E ooo peeo omma period 3 March 2000 Tool Box Editor Keyboard Shortcuts Table 13 Tool Box Editor Keyboard Shortcuts Ea Give focus to Bin Display Save Project File 3 March 2000 Profile Family 229 F Chapter amp Using the Tool Box Editor 230 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Chapter 9 Using the List Manager Profile List Manager lets you automate your use of the Profile video disk recorder You ll probably want to use List Manager to schedule playback of JPEG or DVCPRO clips or masters created in the Tool Box Editor on designated outputs L
15. Capture J Edit Current Capture Duration Eto E Loop Buffered Position Timeline Timecode Button Recording Button Timecode Spin Spin Spin Spin Button Button Button Button Markin Modify Markin c p Stale Mark Out Modify Mark Out Timecode Mark In Adjuster Cursor Adjuster Mark Out Timecode Button Button Figure 119 Capture timeline When recording a clip on the capture timeline you see the clip name and its record status With normal recording you see a Recording label With loop recording you see a Buffer Recording label If a clip is being recorded on another channel simultaneously the Mark in and Mark out buttons are disabled and the Read Only label is displayed The Tool Box Editor displays four timecode indicators current position duration mark in and mark out The timecode indicators display hours minutes seconds and frames in the form 00 00 00 00 The duration displays the minimum number of digits Drop frame timecode is indicated by a semicolon before the frame number Each part of the timecode frames seconds etc can be selected by a click of the left mouse button and then changed separately To the right of each indicator are the spin buttons with an arrow pointing up or down Click on the up arrow and the time is increased or decrease it by clicking the down arrow When a clip is loaded onto the capture timeline the current position timecode indicator shows the frame accurate cursor position in t
16. Clamp speed sets the reaction to changing DC levels of the input signal Speed can be either slow or fast The fast clamp speed is more reactive to small DC variations The slow speed ignores short term DC level changes but gradually changes the clamping level to track the input For clamp speed on earlier cards click Adaptive Slow Medium or Fast under the Clamp Speed group Fast and Slow settings are the same for both the earlier and current cards while Medium is a compromise between Fast and Slow Adaptive uses the best clamp for the current video input Clamp Speed also helps with white noise reduction Adaptive is the best choice for white noise reduction Do not use Adaptive for impulse noise use Slow and the Impulse Noise Detection option from the Noise Reduction group NOTE If you set AGC audio gain control to automatic on the main screen clamp speed cannot be selected 4 For current analog composite cards the Vertical Interval controls set how vertical interval signals are handled Move the Group Definition slider to set how many lines are in Groups and 2 In Group 1 Notch and Pass are available while Blank and Pass are available in Group 2 3 March 2000 Profile Family 51 da Chapter2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager Notch applies notch filtering to the vertical interval video line This means that chrominance information and any luminance around the chroma subcarrier are removed Pass indicates t
17. ET buffers at cS38H0QH8 size 524288 ET buffers at c7S86H0H0 size 524288 memory at chchcHWA size 7815168 memory at c2achcHHA size 7815168 memory at c4chcHHA size 7815168 memory at chchchh size 7815168 4 video codec channels disk recorder slave board in slot 13 hu Feb 13 18 35 06 1997 ef genlock videoStandard is the same no change 47 Figure 104 WinTail window 3 March 2000 Profile Family 173 da Chapter6 Using Profile Utilities You can view three sets of logs 1 The PDR Access Control service records messages from the real time processor into profile log As installed the WinTail application reads this log file by default 2 VdrPanel logs all RS 422 protocol messages for supported third party protocols Logging occurs to files VdrPanel ABCD 000 and VdrPanel ABCD 00 1 in the directory where VdrPanel is run Logging has a timing resolution of 10 msec Use a dedicated RS 422 logger for better resolution and accuracy Logging for each panel may be turned off by setting the value MsgLogger to 0 in these registry keys with the Windows NT registry editor regedit HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Services VtrService Chan ABCD NOTE Logger does not log duplicate replies for BVW BVW insert edit and Odetics for 61 0c CurrentTimeSense for Timerl LTC and VITC and 61 0c StatusSense nor for Louth for 30 05 PortStatusRequest and 30 10 SystemStatus Request 3 VdrPort logs record all message
18. Profile Configuration Manager 29 33 Profile Disk Utility 30 167 Profile Family Installation Manual 16 Profile Log Capture Tool 175 Profile logs 32 173 capturing 175 Profile Protocol 25 32 129 Profile Protocol Resources 178 Profile System Software Release Notes 16 profile log 173 ProLink configuration 173 178 Properties 122 214 properties media 101 Protecting clips 158 Protocol 305 3 March 2000 PRS 200 23 PRS 250 RAID Storage Instruction Manual 16 R RAID 87 Read only memory 305 Real time 305 Record 148 154 243 Record Buffer 305 Record Capacity 152 Record Event 242 243 Recycle Bin 215 Reference Genlock 43 Reference signals 21 Regedit registry editor 174 Regenerate timecode 143 Relocating a bad block 171 Remote Profile machine 90 Remove In Mark 149 Remove Out Mark 149 Removing a Profile machine 90 Renaming an archived clip 114 Renaming clips 157 Renaming media in Media Manager 99 Resource Manager 257 add channel 259 configuring audio resources 268 configuring timecode resources 271 remove channel 259 Resources 305 assigning 257 configuring 259 freeing 234 Resources PRC 100 178 Restoring an archived bin or clip 113 Reverse 218 Rewind 148 218 RGB 305 Right click 17 ROM 305 Router video 307 RS 232 C 305 RS 422 21 306 RS 422 protocol 174 RS 422 configuration 178 Profile Family 315 316 Index S S N Ratio 306 Satellite feed 207 Save Group of Clips 161 Saving a l
19. The Profile Configuration Manager is a graphical user interface for configuring reference genlock system timing video and audio inputs and outputs For more information refer to Chapter 2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager w Profile Configuration Manager Ei ile Yi gja ntscis25 gt eal ew Option Window Help NOTE You must configure system resources with Configuration Manager before using your Profile disk recorder R O Genlochk VA VA J Ji J5 tt J3 Ji Ji J10 J3 Js J J J5 J4 J3 J2 J 5 422 Ref Yid YO SDVid VO SDI Not Not Dvcpro Master Fibre Slave Not Not Aud Not Not VGA CPU Known Known Codec DiskRec Network DiskRec Known Known Digital Known Known Ip press F1 Z 3 March 2000 Profile Family 29 Chapter 1 Introducing the Profile Family BA Untitled Media Manager File Edit View Tools Help Media Manager The Media Manager allows you to manage clips and aee oleate xe Ka Contents of CDX_O3 INT1 defautt Profile Network Li Format Modified CDX_03 Local pim 00 00 05 20 MPEG 03 02 98 07 47 AM e e it nasi wes eww masters on disk transfer media between systems and Ez Clip 00 00 33 25 JPEG 03 03 98 04 55 PM 2 ProfileToolboxTemp i Clip 00 00 04 25 JPEG 03 03 98 04 21 PM h d b R f Recycled A ci ww res oswa archive and restore clips on a library system Keter to Ez Clip3 00 00 06 13 JP
20. The connection status message box appears to show the progress of new connections To remove a Profile machine from the network host list 1 Choose Add Remove Machine from the File menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click on a machine volume or network icon in the tree pane You can also click the Add Remove Machine button on the toolbar The Add Remove Machine dialog box appears 2 Select the name of the machine you want to remove in Network Host List box 3 Click Remove 4 Click OK 3 March 2000 Profile Family 91 Y Chapter 3 Using Media Manager Viewing the Media Hierarchy The Media Manager window is divided into two main sections the tree and contents panes Clips and masters appear in the contents pane Items are listed alphabetically In the tree pane you can expand or collapse the tree hierarchy by clicking on the plus or minus control buttons as shown in Figure 45 If you click on a button the tree hierarchy is expanded or opened so you can see the branch For example under a volume you see bins Clicking on the button collapses or closes the associated branch of the tree hiding the bins under the volume To explore the contents of an item select the icon representing it and then choose Explore from the shortcut menu which is displayed with a right click If present clips and masters are displayed in the contents pane In this pane you see information about the media e The name
21. The video format either NTSC or PAL NTSC clips are recorded with either drop frame or non drop frame timecode The compression format either JPEG or MPEG The length of the clip or master The length is shown in timecode format 00 00 00 00 Hours Minutes Seconds Frames The size of the media in megabytes MBytes 3 March 2000 Viewing Properties The date and time that the media was created and the date and time it was last changed The date and time the media was created or last changed is shown in the format 12 2 94 9 40 PM Month Day Year Hours Minutes AM PM 4 Click the Locked box to lock or unlock the media under Media Manager Clips and masters with the locked attribute cannot be renamed deleted or modified in any way If the Read Only Media box is checked it means that the media is protected under VdrPanel and cannot be deleted or rerecorded but you can change marks See Setting Clip Protection on page 158 5 Click the Transcode tab to view the transcode history shown in Figure 51 for the master or clip Each entry on the history page contains the date and time of the conversion user description target format and when applicable data rate chrominance value and GOP structure Figure 51 The transcode history page 3 March 2000 Profile Family 103 da Chapter 3 Using Media Manager Finding Clips and Masters You can locate clips and masters anywhere on the Profile network If you s
22. To trim a clip 1 Select a clip with either in or out marks or both in the Clip Name box 2 Click the Trim to Mark button to remove the portion of the current clip preceding the in mark 3 Click the Trim from Out Mark button to remove the portion of the current clip following the out mark Setting Field Dominance for Marks You can set field dominance so that a clip s mark in and mark out points occur at field or field 2 of a given frame By default the field dominance is set so that either field 1 or field 2 can be a mark in or mark out point To change field dominance 1 Choose Options Field Dominance The Field Dominance dialog box appears Figure 98 Panel 4 Field Dominance x C Field 1 Field 2 Cancel Figure 98 Field Dominance dialog box 2 Click Field 1 or Field 2 3 Click OK The change takes effect immediately NOTE Field dominance applies to JPEG clips only and the latest field dominance setting applies to all open panels 3 March 2000 Profile Family 165 F Chapter4 Using VdrPanel 166 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Chapter 5 Using the Profile Disk Utility The Profile Disk Utility allows you to create new file systems on a Profile disk set volume format disks set a new disk label load the latest microcode from the disk manufacturer or browse through the SCSI log A Profile volume may consist of the internal disks in a Profile disk recorder or video file server or it may be the
23. You can also press t The Shuttle Bar sets the shuttle rate Use the mouse to drag the pointer to the desired shuttle rate displayed in the Shuttle Rate box When you click on the shuttle bar the disk recorder enters shuttle mode You can also press h Profile Family 149 F Chapter4 Using VdrPanel 27 The Shuttle Rate box displays the current shuttle rate This number ranges from 16 00 to 16 00 with the positive numbers indicating forward motion negative numbers reverse and 0 00 still This number can be set by clicking on the Shuttle Rate box to open the Shuttle Rate dialog box entering a shuttle rate and clicking OK You can also drag the Shuttle Bar to a desired position If the shuttle rate is set faster than the maximum rate for the controller the maximum rate is displayed Shuttle Rate Enter rate IAIILIII OK Cancel 28 The Clip Name box lists the names of the clips in the current clip list The functions on the Panel dialog box can be accessed directly by clicking on the appropriate button with the mouse or by using the shortcut keys shown in Table 9 For example pressing Shift R starts recording in the active panel Table 9 VdrPanel shortcut keys F freer Sy tm ees Ain arema S ee assim stitse rim sa racor ew nreno ine area fae 150 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Opening a Panel Opening a Panel If none of the panels are visible here are the steps to open a p
24. is located using the event and frame controls 2 Choose Timeline Remove Current User Mark To remove all user marks 1 Load the clip onto the capture timeline 2 Choose Timeline Remove All User Marks 3 March 2000 Profile Family 221 Chapter amp Using the Tool Box Editor Event and Frame Controls The event and frame controls let you navigate the active timeline in forward or reverse direction see Figure 126 The Previous Frame and Next Frame buttons display the last or next frame The Previous Event and Next Event buttons move the current position to the next user mark mark in or mark out points Shuttle Controls The shuttle rate slider sets the play speed in the range 16 to 16 The play speed increases as you move the slider to the right and decreases you as you move the slider to the left You can also adjust the play speed with the shuttle rate input box Simply type in the rate in the range 16 to 16 and press Enter The selected clip begins playing automatically whenever you adjust the shuttle rate Creating Subclips on the Fly To create a subclip on the fly either while recording a new clip or by playing an existing clip 1 To start recording choose Record from the Media menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click You can also click the Record button A new clip appears in the current bin display whose duration grows longer with each new frame recorded 2 To play an existing clip
25. regardless of what quality it was recorded in 3 Click Enabled under Scrubbing to turn audio scrubbing on and click Disabled to turn it off Disabled is the default 4 Click Undo to return the settings in the dialog box 5 Click Close when finished 3 March 2000 Profile Family 83 F Chapter2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager Setting Up Fibre Channel Networking If you have a Fibre Channel board in your Profile unit and you are part of a Fibre Channel Profile network you must configure the board with an IP Internet Protocol address and other optional settings Configuration Manager allows you to do this with the Fibre Channel Networking command To configure your Fibre Channel board Ea 1 Choose Option Fibre Channel Networking or click the Fibre Channel Networking button on the toolbar The Fibre Channel dialog box appears see Figure 41 Fibre Channel Network Configuration Oy x IF Address Ask your network administrator to assign an IF address for your Fibre Channel Interface and enter it below This Fibre Channel IP address should be different from the Ethernet IP address assigned to this machine Auto hosts file administration for TCP IP name lookup l Use TCP Checksume T Enable Multicast T Enable Switch Hostname varlab3 fen IP Address 128 181 59 3 eer Netmask Gateway Hardware Address 1 120 0 autal 3 OF Cancel Figure 41 Fibre Channel Network Configurati
26. such as INT If not specified the utility will list all valid datasets volumes e rremote_machine lists media of a remote machine such as PROFILE1 If not specified the utility searches local machine only This example lists all the valid datasets volumes on the remote machine PROFILE1 listnames r PROFILE1 This one lists all groups clip lists in INT on PROFILE1 listnames r PROFILE1 I INT or just The final examples lists all movies in INT default on Profile1 listnames r PROFILE1 I INT default The copymovie utility copies media between two Profiles using the Fibre Channel network The parameters to this utility are case sensitive The command is issued in the form copymovie srcMachine srcName destMachine destName There are four arguments e srcMachine for the Profile machine where the source media 1s located use an asterisk to specify the local machine e srcName for the source name of the media e destMachine for the Profile machine where you want copy to go use an asterisk to specify the local machine e destName is the name of the destination media This example copies media called INT default movie1 from PROFILE1 to PROFILE2 where it will be named INT default movie2 copymovie Profile3 INT default movie1 Profile4 INT default movie2 This example copies media called INT default movie1 from PROFILE1 to the local Profile where the command was run where it is named INT default movie 7
27. you might not want to see the Source column at all You can change fonts text color and highlight color in a list display To change a font 1 Choose View Font and the Font dialog box appears Figure 141 Romar Script Small Fonts F Symbol System Effects T Strikeout DT Underline Color C white Script Westem Sample Figure 141 Font dialog box 2 Enter your changes You can change the font font style font size and color You can also underline and strike out the text 3 Click OK NOTE Absolute events are always shown in bold face and Follow events are displayed in regular face 3 March 2000 Profile Family 253 254 da Chapter9 Using the List Manager You can change the text color another way besides the Font dialog box as well as the text highlight background color The Color dialog box allows you a much broader range of colors than the Font dialog box The change the text s color or highlight color 1 Choose View Color Text or View Color Highlight and the Color dialog box appears Figure 142 Color Basic colors Custom colors EE E Cancel Define Custam olor gt gt Colors olid Lum 240 Blue 255 Hue 125 Red 255 Sat has Green 255 Figure 142 Color dialog box with custom color controls shown 2 To select a preset color click one of the basic 48 colors and then OK 3 To create a custom
28. 1 if col 1 is not between 0 amp 9 optional parameters with white space seperators J DVCPRO Codec format T Loer Video Resources index 1 DComponentVideolInA DComponentVideoloOutA 02 Oe L5 g1 DComponentVideolOutA OL 00 00 00 02 CD 03y CD Record Us U2 CS Play index 2 J Next lane is for a DVCPRO Codec index 3 DVCPRO 1 Jj Default E to 7 Use 15 01 for DVCPRO 2 it is a comment start in where YY is the of the Decoder etc connect DComponentVideolInA to E indexl to index2 Default connect DComponentVideolInA to DVCPRO 1 Schedule Audio Resources 00 00 00 01 g 00 03 10 00 Lee LO 02 O Profile Family cf i c i index index index index index index index index CoO NS DD U A connect DVCPRO 1 to DComponentVideolOutA 10 L1 Audio Audio Audio Audio Audio Audio Chan Chan Chan Chan Chan Chan 1 2 3 4 l 2 Audio Chan 3 Audio Chan 4 Input Input Input Input Output Output OUTPUT Output 3 March 2000 Timecode Resources 04 0 05 5 07 00 05 0078 08 00 09 00 Josy RZ A se Tesero pC TG6 13 C5 415 3CD Oe el ae ns LA Io Ce 3 March 2000 E7 kd EI FA Ai index index index index index index le LS 14 dle 16 Vi Sample Configuration File
29. 11 Using TimeDelay Working with the Record Buffer The record buffer is a quantity of storage space allocated for recording The size of the buffer determines how much video can be stored before recording returns to the beginning of the buffer and limits the length of delay that you can set You can select a different drive to be the record buffer s location and you can save the contents of the buffer as a clip Setting the Record Buffer Size To set the record buffer size enter the buffer duration in the Record Panel s Buffer Size edit box The record buffer must be at least 5 seconds longer than your longest playout delay The minimum buffer size is 10 seconds the maximum buffer size is the recording capacity of the current record buffer volume By default the maximum buffer size is shown when TimeDelay is started If you enter a buffer size that is greater than the amount of available storage TimeDelay automatically reduces the value to reflect the largest possible duration If you enter a buffer size that is smaller than the longest playout delay TimeDelay automatically increases the value to reflect the smallest buffer size that can encompass the longest playout delay Changing the Record Buffer s Location By default the TimeDelay Record buffer is created on the first internal disk volume To change the record buffer s location to a different drive 1 Choose File Set Buffer Drive to open the dialog box shown her
30. 2000 Click the panel to make it active If any clips are loaded in the panel choose VideoClip Eject All Clips You cannot configure a panel with a controller if any clips are present in it Choose Controller Configure to open the Profile Options dialog box for the selected panel Figure 76 illustrates the standard Profile options with an example configuration selected Figure 78 illustrates the Profile Options dialog box for BV W insert edit also with appropriate selections shown Click on the appropriate video audio and timecode resources for your selected controller Use the scroll bars if necessary to see more resources NOTE Recording format depends on the selected video resource JPEG or DVCPRO Profile Family 133 Chapter 4 Using VdrPanel 5 Click OK Profile Options E Igiest gual least recoring unre GES compromise OT GU ai amd tme S Most recording tine maest giality E Custom setting ut pr Figure 77 Profile Options dialog box with DVCPRO selected 134 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Configuring a Controller Figure 78 Profile Options dialog box BVW insert edit only 3 March 2000 Profile Family 135 136 Chapter 4 Using VdrPanel IGS G0alihy least recording Unie GEST compromise OT Wai and tire MGS recondimg Hime lowest guat Sion settimg Ot pr Figure 79 Profile Options dialog box BVW insert edit only with DVCPRO selected Profile Family
31. 270 Timecode Input and Output check DOXES cc ceeeececeeseeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeesaeaeeseeeeesaaees 271 Add Track dialog box for timecode ccccecceseeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaueeeeeseseeeseeaes 272 Timecode Codec echeck DOXES niori a LE 273 Hmecodegeneratoncon tol Serera a e Vues see es 274 Tool Tip showing an external user ccccesccessseeceeseeeeeeeesseeseeeeeeessneseeeeeeeesneseeeees 275 Fool Tip Showing antennal Usei ieres a eaeeaeeee deceads 275 Tause Tool TP MCS SAG C adets ew scsnee incest veld iiad acme danse E 275 LENO KOO MOFIME SSAC C sicersvstgeusaasi vrecn daa tunacantense cated a a 276 TimeDelay WIN O Wastes tasiecan Sotcsicnst tems emeccuatran te osdatoaseanceeganecseag sets nia soteGatusaniens 278 The Remote Connection dialog DOX ccccccsseeeeececeeaeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeesueeaeeeeeesanaees 280 The Add Network Host dialog DOX ccccccceeccesseecesaeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaueeeeeseeseeeeeeaes 281 The Resource Manager dialog DOX cccccccssseeceseeeseeeceeceeeeeseeeeeessueeeeeseasseseesaes 284 Warming dialog DOX ost Siac tecc a scnctesed antes aaa a toons eaten ee i aai aa 285 Profile Family 11 da Contents 171 The Auto Start dialog DOXsriicncrnisrind an e 287 172 TimeDelay Buffer Location dialog DOX cecccecseeeecesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeseeessaeseeees 288 173 The Select Timecode Source dialog bOX cc ceccccceeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeee
32. Analog Composite Input card the Serial Digital inputs will be numbered 00 through 03 and the Composite input will be numbered 04 regardless of where the Composite card is placed e Column 6 optional separator or space This is mandatory if column 7 is meaningful optional otherwise e Column 7 optional parameters For inputs this must be an S for Shareable In addition certain resources may specify additional parameters starting in column 7 These parameters are read and assigned in the order given below There are no optional parameters for DVCPRO codecs For JPEG codecs goalsize bytes field minimum luminance Q maximum luminance Q minimum chrominance Q and maximum chrominance Q 3 March 2000 Profile Family 183 Chapter6 Using Profile Utilities For audio codecs input level output level window size If you don t specify parameters the default values are used You can override the defaults in the cfg file or by using the API calls Acceptable values for these parameters are shown in Table 11 Table 11 Audio Parameters From 0 0 full attenuation to 1 0 no attenuation woo o From 0 0 full attenuation to 1 0 no attenuation E window size Number of audio fields to play during video still frame operations For timecode generators timecode format timecode mode time to seed user bits to seed If you don t specify parameters the default values are used You can override the
33. BVW insert edit protocols Before using VdrPanel to capture clips you must complete a few steps 1 You must decide whether you want to use the Windows NT interface called Panel Control to capture and play clips or if you want to use an external device to control your Profile system To select a controller see Selecting a Controller on page 131 2 You need to configure the playback and record video channels audio channels and the VITC timecodes for your selected controller To configure the controller see Configuring a Controller on page 133 3 You must set video crosspoints or connections This means that you can select video inputs codecs and outputs You can also choose to bypass codecs See Selecting Video Crosspoints on page 141 4 You can select timecode panel display which timecode generators to use select drop frame timecode and also set timecode crosspoints inputs generators and outputs See Setting Timecode on page 142 3 March 2000 Profile Family 129 Chapter4 Using VdrPanel For information on how to start and close VdrPanel see Starting and Closing Profile Applications on page 28 The VdrPanel window is shown in Figure 72 By default the VdrPanel window appears automatically at power up unless you log in manually You display all available panels in the VdrPanel window up to six with DVCPRO 25 Each panel is dedicated to one video channel VdrPanel Panel A
34. Choose Properties either from the File menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click You can also click the Properties button on the toolbar The library properties dialog box appears Figure 66 Properties dialog box for the library 3 Click OK when you are done viewing the library properties 122 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Viewing Library Cartridge and Archived Clip Properties To view the properties for a cartridge 1 Select a cartridge icon in the tree pane E 2 Choose Properties from the File menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click You can also click the Properties button on the toolbar The cartridge properties dialog box appears Because the size in megabytes is constant the available time is an approximation based on the settings in the Anticipated Video and Audio Quality boxes The higher the quality the less time is available for storage 3 Click OK when you are done viewing the cartridge properties 00001600 Figure 67 Properties dialog box for a cartridge 3 March 2000 Profile Family 123 F Chapter 3 Using Media Manager To view the properties for a archived clip on a cartridge 1 Select a clip icon in the contents pane 2 Choose Properties from the File menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click You can also click the Properties button on the toolbar The clip properties dialog box appears Figure 68 Properties dialog box for an archived clip 3 Click Read only
35. Es EEE EEEE EERE SE EEA EEEE EEE RETRASE 291 eS TCO ON e E 291 Setting AUCIOLOVEIS ic sssdeconcscictamocdsccacepumedennaddesaneed GoniedeenedesEdcaaiedcieedpinouctacectenteteansdiers 292 Jemo the Imerge eene ne ene eae et eer ne eee E ee eee mere eae ee eee 293 The Record Panel perreini A Ar EAEE AE RA 293 The Playback Panel senesine ae secede ites eetedPnoiedeses 294 PNG VIS oaeen E E EEE such ewasiquismeceiratara as 295 FINS asec accesses carseat edness ed A sates ce tees ese gaa seed eo ees eee 295 N ee cee E ere en Ome rede ee eee ee eee 295 CONO emer ete E noe aren reer mn nent ne neater eee eet een Teer oee 296 OS SAN ccc cece ces a 297 BN cD r E E rete clone paises A E E P N E E E N 309 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Figures 3 March 2000 OONDOOAaFRWDND gt The PDR200 300 400 block diagram cccccceseeeceseeeeeeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeaaeseeeseeneeesseagees 24 PDR Application shortcuts on the Windows NT 4 0 desktop cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 28 Profile Configuration Manager Window cccecececeesseeeeeeeecesaeeeeeeeeseeuaeaeeeeeseaaaeees 33 Save As dialog box for Saving a configuration file eee eceseeeeceeeeeeeeesaeeeeeseeeeeeeeeens 35 Open dialog box for loading a Configuration fil cccccsseeeeceeeeeeeesaeeeeeseeeeeeeenens 36 Master Timecode dialog box genlOck settings ccccceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeseeneeeaas 37 System Timing dialog box Zero timed amp scasieeee
36. Expansion Chassis e PDX208 Profile Disk Expansion Chassis Video and audio clips can also be stored on digital tape cartridges in the PLS 20 and PLS 200 Profile Library Systems With Media Manager you view media in a tree structure On disk media may consist of video and audio clips and masters Clips and masters are organized into bins that are kept on a volume A bin is a container for clips and masters similar to a directory on a computer A clip refers to segments or portions of a media file or a media file in its entirety A master is an edited sequence of clips On a cartridge in a library system media also consists of clips and masters Cartridges are divided into one or more partitions 3 March 2000 Profile Family 87 88 Chapter 3 Using Media Manager Starting and Exiting the Media Manager To start the Media Manager application with Windows NT e Double click the Media Manager shortcut icon Or e Choose Start PDR Applications Media Manager The Media Manger window appears see Figure 42 The tree pane is on the left and the contents pane is on the right What appears in the contents pane depends on what you select in the tree pane For example if you select the volume icon INT in the tree pane the Recycled and default bins appear in the contents pane If you select a bin the masters and clips in that bin appear in the contents pane Masters and clips will only appear in the contents pane w Untitled
37. Outal14 NEE CSDI OutA 15 JS01 OutbJ15 INT 1 defaultpegd 00 00 10 245 Eror jai INT1 defaulkt mpegE 00 00 10 295 Stopped ac INT 1 defaulttor 00 00 18 25 Figure 58 Transcode Utility dialog box Preview tab 3 March 2000 Profile Family 111 Chapter 3 Using Media Manager Using a Library System Media Manager supports both the PLS 20 and the PLS 200 library systems The PLS 20 Profile Library System is a stand alone drive for reading and writing to individual magnetic tape cartridges The PLS 200 Profile Library System is a robotic library that stores up to 80 magnetic tape cartridges The PLS 200 is a cost effective mechanism for spot or news storage and management plus a solution and method for the long term archival of material Total storage capacity is determined by the number of tape cartridges available and the video compression method used DVCPRO JPEG or MPEG Archiving a Bin or Clip To archive a clip means to copy it from disk to a cartridge in the library system Clips are always copied into the library when archived they are never moved To archive a bin means to copy all the clips and masters in the bin to the library system without having to individually select each clip or master NOTE The archiving operation copies the data to the tape cartridge but does not update the cartridge directory Updates can occur when you export the tape or when you specifically perform an update See Exporting a Ca
38. Panel Control Of x File VideoClip Controller Options Window Help he Panel 4 Panel Control Iofs t Panel B Panel Control Of x timecode azize type Le f gt Rec rew stop play ffwd rea COO P i Tre 1 timecode size type Le a gt Rec rew stop play ffwd oo e ae WA lt t Panel C Panel Control Mie x timecode s Zz lt t Panel D Panel Control O x timecode SIZE type ej af gt Rec rew stop play ffwd l O a A Tre i HE H t Panel E Panel Control IOl x t Panel F Panel Control Mie x timecode size type pe CIN EA Rec rew stop play ffwd timecode size Rec rew stop play ffwd d F i id rm d d a ia an d HA he Panel G Panel Control IOl x he Panel H Panel Control Mie x ae h timecode size type pei CNEA Rec rew stop play ffwd Dad F I i Tan d Ready INTI 79 timecode size type el at li rew stop play ffwd Figure 72 VdrPanel window 130 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Selecting a Controller Selecting a Controller Before you can use a video channel you must first configure it to use a controller The default controller is Panel Control Panel Control specifies control from the Windows NT user interface and no communication port selection or additional configuration is necessary Other controller choices allow you to select serial control protocols and require an extern
39. See Setting a Playout Delay on page 290 3 On the Record Panel click the Record button To stop the TimeDelay process click the All Stop button on the Record Panel 286 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Automatically Starting the TimeDelay Process Automatically Starting the TimeDelay Process When you select an external VITC or LTC signal as TimeDelay s timecode source you can start the TimeDelay process automatically when a specific timecode value is reached This feature allows you to synchronize multiple Profiles that are using the same external timecode source To automatically begin recording at a set timecode 1 Choose Config Timecode Source 2 Select an external timecode source 3 In the Record Panel click the Auto Start button or choose Config AutoStart The Auto Start dialog box appears see Figure 171 4 Click the Auto Start check box 5 Enter the desired start time in the Start Time field This time should be at least 10 seconds ahead of the current time 6 Click the Close button When you activate auto start a countdown is shown on the record panel When the countdown gets to 00 00 00 00 recording begins Auto Start Enable Auto Start to automatically begin recording when the current timecode source reaches the appropriate start time Curent Time 00 15 44 19 Start Time 00 15 40 2726 Figure 171 The Auto Start dialog box 3 March 2000 Profile Family 287 Y Chapter
40. Setting Compression Presets on page 137 Panel A Record Capacity Figure 87 Message box showing record capacity 3 Click Close Viewing an Audio Monitor for a Panel The Audio Monitor allows you to monitor the level of an audio signal for a panel To view a panel s audio monitor 1 Click a panel to make it active 2 Choose Window Audio Monitor The Audio dialog box appears as shown in Figure 88 There are only two channels in this example but up to 32 channels are possible if the necessary boards are installed Panel A Audio x Close Button PeakHold Levels Record _e 80 0 0 Peak Indicators Channel Indicators Play Level Controls Figure 88 Audio Monitor dialog box 3 To turn peak hold on or off choose PeakHold On or PeakHold Off By default peak hold is on The peak indicators the white bars in record level controls indicates the audio peak you are currently recording 152 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Viewing an Audio Monitor for a Panel 4 To show the record level controls choose Levels Show Record Level Controls To show play level controls choose Levels Show Play Level Controls To hide the level controls choose Levels Hide Level Controls 5 To work the record and play level controls independently choose Levels Independent Controls To gang the controls choose Levels Ganged Controls 6 Click Close J 3 March 2000 Profile Family 153 Chapter4 U
41. T Chapter ll Using TimeDelay The Playback Panel Though TimeDelay may have multiple playback panels each has its own set of the following controls Panel Name Displays the playback channel name Default playback channel names are Player 1 Player 2 etc You may change the channel name using the Resource Manager The playback panel may shorten long channel names so they fit in the display Playout Delay This edit box shows the amount of time the playback panel waits before playing The minimum playout delay is 5 seconds The maximum delay is 5 seconds less than the current record buffer size The default playout delay is 5 seconds Timecode Display Shows the current timecode source value relative to the position of the playback channel Timecode sources include external VITC and LTC signals internal timecode generators the VITC in the house reference or simply the offset in the record buffer Play Button Starts the playback channel immediately overriding the current playout delay and updating the playout delay control Stop Button Stops the playback channel when playback stops the output channel shows black Press the stop button to modify the playout delay after the TimeDelay process has started Pause Button Pauses the playback output The playout delay increases as long as the playback channel is paused Press pause again or press play to resume playback Video Audio Status LightsThe number of status lights ind
42. This chapter shows you how to read Profile logs with WinTail capture Profile logs with the capture tool assign Profile Protocol resources for RS 422 ports controlled by Profile Protocol and managed by ProLink access a Profile system from a remote PC with PortServer and how to manually stop and start the PDR Access Control service Viewing Profile Logs You can view Profile system logs with the graphical log viewer WinTail This log viewer allows you to see the end of a log file To view any of the Profile system log files 1 Double click on the Profile Log shortcut icon on the Windows NT desktop or choose Start PDR Applications Profile Log By default the WinTail application views profile log WinTail automatically checks log files for updates every two seconds 2 To view other logs choose File Open NOTE Because it is a binary file you cannot view scsi log with WinTail See The Detail Log on page 172 for instructions on how to view scsi log HA wint ail profile log File Edit View Window Help x 2 gt a 06 00 SEAGATE ST1i5156W 6681 in slot i4 digital video board in slot 3 digital video board in slot 7 DinitBoard component serial digital video board at DinitBoard component serial digital video board at board in slot 4 board in slot 5 board in slot board in slot ystem reincarnation 18 ound file system IMT ET buffers at ci386060 size 524288 ET buffers at c33800H0 size 524288
43. To set the audio window size 1 Select the Audio icon in the configuration tree 2 From the Audio Window Size box that appears select a size from the three available choices 5 fields 10 fields default and 20 fields Resource H anager B01 0278 SEEN Timecode fA Track 1 Figure 157 Audio Window Size list box 270 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Configuring Timecode Resources Configuring Timecode Resources To configure timecode resources 1 Click on a Track icon under the Timecode icon in the configuration tree and with the 3 March 2000 Crosspoints button clicked the Timecode Input and Output check boxes appear at the bottom of the Resource Manager dialog box see Figure 158 Resource Manager 6010278 3 Channel A 5 Channel E Name Type Add Channel Channel A Flayer A ecorder ad Channel 4 Timecode i A Track 1 Configuration for Timecode Track 1 Timecode Codec Ary Timecode Input Timecode OQutput s None Internal Generator TC Generator x SOIVITC InB14 SOIVITC In4J15 SOIVITC nB15 Crosspoints Cancel Apply Help Figure 158 Timecode Input and Output check boxes Profile Family 271 Y Chapter 10 Using the Resource Manager 2 To add a timecode track click the Add Track button In the Add Track dialog box that appears see Figure 159 click Timecode then click Add The new timecode track icon will appear in th
44. acetate eecicdiacdee tadache E 40 System Timing dialog Dox E to E NMC oeiveecescceseietcect eects aa 41 Reference Genlock dialog OO x sae siianaces ee ess erected leer alte ilu ietnare eae 44 LTC Inputs amp Outputs dialog DOX ci ceececcccessseeeeeeeseeeaeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeesueeeeeseeeesaaaaeeseeees 45 DVCPRO codec Configuration selection cccccseeceecseeeeeceeeeeeseeeaeeeeeauaeeeeseeaeeeeeeas 46 Analog Composite Video Input dialog box Main tab A ccccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeee aeons 47 Analog Composite Video Input dialog box Main tab B ccccccseeeeeceeeeeeeeeee ees 48 Analog Composite Video Input dialog box Advanced Control tab A 008 50 Analog Composite Video Input dialog box Advanced Control tab B 006 50 Analog Composite Video Input dialog box Time Base Correction tab 0068 53 Analog Composite Video Input dialog box Vertical Interval tab cccceeeeeeeeees 54 Component Analog Video Input dialog box CAV ccccssseeeeceeeseeeeesneeeeeseeeeeeeesens 55 Serial Digital Component Video Input dialog DOX eee ccceeeeccceeeseeeeeseeeseeseeeeeeeeeens 57 Serial Digital Component Video Input Advanced ccccceececeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeseeeeeeeseens 59 Analog Composite Video Output dialog DOX n n n0nnnnnnnnnnnsonnnnannnnnsnnnnennnnnnnnnnrrennnni 60 Analog Composite Video Input Vertical Interval tab a00nnnnaaannnno
45. and masters and properties for a library system see Viewing Library Cartridge and Archived Clip Properties on page 122 To view volume properties 1 Select a volume in the tree pane E 2 Choose Properties from the File menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click You can also click the Properties button on the toolbar The Properties dialog box for volumes appears see Figure 49 Figure 49 Properties dialog box for volumes 3 March 2000 Profile Family 101 Y Chapter 3 Using Media Manager To view media properties 1 Select a clip or master in the contents bin 2 Choose Properties from the File menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click You can also click the Properties button on the toolbar The Properties dialog box for clips or masters appears see Figure 50 Clip4 Ea General Transcode Format Compression Length Size Created Last Modified Attributes Clip4 Video Tracks 1 Audio Tracks 2 NTSC Non DropFrame DYCPRO25 00 00 12 07 45 MBytes 02713799 03 46 AM 02713799 03 46 AM Locked Read Onl Media Figure 50 Properties dialog box for clips or masters 3 Click the General tab to view these properties 102 Profile Family The name of the clip or master A preview frame of the clip or master to help identify it Preview frames are not available for MPEG masters How many tracks the clip or master uses for both audio and video
46. archivesSLOG S070 OOOSPLO O 3 2ip C profileslogs archivesSLOG S070 OOOSPLO OF 4 zip C profilelogs archive4SLOG S070 OOOSPLO 075 zip C profileslogs varchive SLOG S070 OOOSPLO 076 zip Figure 107 Log tool complete screen 3 March 2000 Profile Family 177 Chapter6 Using Profile Utilities Profile Protocol Resources The Profile Protocol Resources utility lets you assign Profile resources such as inputs outputs and codecs for use with ports controlled by Profile Protocol over an RS 422 connection and managed by ProLink The PRC 100 is one example of a device that uses these ports Profile Protocol implements Named Configuration Space NCS as a mechanism to ease Profile configuration Using NCS an application can send one command Open Port 10 01 with a parameter specifying a configuration file to use and the Profile unit handles all the resource allocation and crosspoints specified in the configuration file This frees the application from the task of allocating resources manually The Profile Protocol Resources utility provides a simple graphical way of creating configuration files It replaces previous Profile Protocol configuration tools such as the PRC 100 Configuration Utility prccfg exe and configures all Profile resources DVCPRO 25 and DVCPRO 50 codecs The following sections explain how to use the Profile Protocol Resources utility You ll also find an explanation of the contents of a configu
47. box 2 Click in the box of the output channel whose name you want to change A channel name can have up to 30 characters 3 After you have changed the channel name or names click Close 76 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Audio Configuration Audio Configuration The Audio Configuration dialog box shown in Figure 36 allows you to configure input and output channels input clocking audio quality and monitor channels Input and Output Mapping The Input Mapping tab is used for mapping input sources to Profile channels while the Output Mapping tab is used for mapping Profile channels to output destinations For example you can map Profile Audio Chassis PAC input sources and serial digital audio input sources Figure 36 and Figure 37 illustrate a sample configuration a Profile unit with an audio signal processing board a PAC 208 chassis with A D and D A convertors and connectors for eight channels and two serial digital cards providing eight analog audio channels eight digital audio channels and four video channels with 16 embedded audio channels each 3 March 2000 Audio Signal Processing Board 1 JE Input Mapping Input Clocking Output Mapping Monitor Channels nA 16 In J InA J5 InB J5 h 0 E E E E L C E a a Fill a a a Caol SEE Figure 36 Audio Configuration dialog box Input Mapping tab Profile Family T7 Y Chapter2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager Audio Signal Processing Boa
48. can occur when another application is running on the same Profile unit as TimeDelay TimeDelay channels might conflict with each other if the same output is used on more than one channel When there is a resource conflict and all TimeDelay resources cannot be allocated the warning dialog box shown in Figure 170 will appear TimeDelay Ba Could not allocate all requested resources Edit again Figure 170 Warning dialog box Click the Yes button to return to the Resource Manager dialog and resolve conflicts If you click No and do not resolve the resource conflicts TimeDelay cannot function correctly 3 March 2000 Profile Family 285 Chapter 11 Using TimeDelay Starting the TimeDelay Process The basic time delay process involves recording program material and playing it back after a specified time has elapsed You accomplish this using the Record and Playback panels in the TimeDelay window In each of the procedures that follow it is assumed that you have already connected if necessary to a Profile unit if you are operating remotely and that you have allocated the necessary resources with Resource Manager Manually Starting the TimeDelay Process To start a recording with delayed playback 1 In the Buffer Size edit box enter a record buffer size or accept the default See Setting the Record Buffer Size on page 288 2 In the Playout Delay edit box enter a playout delay Repeat this action for each Playback Panel
49. click on the Timecode display to enter a timecode to locate the frame where you want to set the in mark 4 Click Set In Mark The Timecode display remains the same but the Clip Position Bar jumps to the far left indicating the mark in point on the clip 5 Use the transport controls drag the Clip Position Bar or click on the Timecode display to enter a timecode to locate the frame where you want to set the out mark 6 Click Set Out Mark The Timecode display remains the same but the Clip Position Bar play jumps to the far right indicating the mark out point of the clip 7 Drag the Clip Position Bar to the beginning of the clip 8 Click Play The clip starts at the in mark and stops at the out mark Removing Marks To remove in and out marks from a clip 1 Select a clip containing marks in the Clip Name box 2 Click the Remove In Mark button to remove a mark in point and reset the clip beginning to the actual start of the clip 4 3 Click the Remove Out Mark button to remove the mark out point and reset the clip ending to the actual end of the clip 164 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Trimming Clips Trimming Clips You can trim a clip from the beginning of the clip to the in mark or from the out mark to the end of the clip This action affects all copies of the clip on all panels The trimmed material is not retrievable A warning message and verification prompt are displayed before the function completes
50. color move the cursor in the rainbow window until you find the color you want then click Add to Custom Colors The color is added to the array of custom color boxes 4 To select a custom color click on one of the custom color boxes that contains a custom color then click OK Profile Family 3 March 2000 Customizing Your List Display You can change which columns to display the size of the columns and order of the columns in the list display You display up to 10 columns in a list By default the Name Start Time Duration and Comment columns are displayed You can add columns for Action Event Number Parent Event Type and Date You can also make a column as wide or as narrow as you want or make it disappear completely You can move one or several columns to the left or right to arrange them in an order that you find more convenient To add a column to a list display 1 Choose View Columns and Columns dialog box Figure 143 Available Columns Displayed Columns Mame C Start Time o Cancel Duration Comment Reset Hose Wp Mowe Win Figure 143 Columns dialog box 2 Click on a column label in the Available Columns box 3 Click Add The column label moves to the Displayed Columns box 4 To change the order of the columns click a column label in the Displayed Columns box then click Move Up or Move Down 5 To return the columns to their original settings click Reset 6 Click OK when don
51. current bin 2 Choose Properties from the Media menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click You can also double click the clip or master in the current bin The Properties dialog box appears see Figure 118 Sra aol Figure 118 Properties dialog box 214 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Deleting Media In this dialog box you can view A preview frame of the clip or master to help identify it Preview frames are not available for DVCPRO clips or masters The name of the clip or master How many tracks the clip or master uses for both audio and video The media format either NTSC or PAL NTSC clips are recorded with either drop frame or non drop frame timecode The length of the clip or master The length is shown in timecode format 00 00 00 00 Hours Minutes Seconds Frames The date and time that the media was created and the date and time it was last changed The date and time the media was created or last changed is shown in the form 12 2 94 9 40 PM The read only attribute which you can change by clicking the Read Only box Clips and masters with the read only attribute cannot be renamed deleted or modified in any way Deleting Media When the amount of remaining disk storage begins to get low the time remaining 1s displayed below the edit timeline you can free space by deleting unused media 1 Select media from the current bin display You can select either clips or masters you can also select
52. defaults in the cfg file or by using the API calls Acceptable values for these parameters are shown in Table 12 Table 12 Timecode Parameters Acceptable Values timecode format 0 Drop frame 1 1 Non drop frame timecode mode 0 TcModeFreeze 2 1 TcModeFreeRun 2 TcModeFieldLocked 3 TcModeRegenHold 4 TcModeRegenFlywheel time to seed frame second minute hour second frame second minute hour hour user bits to seed 32 bits in reverse byte order last third second first Each resource allocation line is assigned an index number in sequential order independent of comment lines or crosspoint lines Thus the first resource line found in an NCS file is assigned index number 1 the second is assigned index number 2 etc These index numbers may be used by the crosspoint lines which are described in the following section 184 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Manually Editing a Configuration File Crosspoint lines Crosspoint lines assign default and scheduled crosspoints between resources A basic explanation of these events is included below The following is the column by column layout of crosspoint lines Column 1 2 source index number Column 3 separator Column 4 5 destination index number Column 6 separator Column 7 crosspoint indicator C or c Column 8 D or S for default or schedule crosspoints Scheduled crosspoint connections take precedenc
53. e N oO N A NN Click in a panel to select it If the clip is already loaded select it from the Clips box and go to step 7 If the clip is not loaded choose VideoClip Load Clip to open the Load Clip dialog box If the clip you want to load is on a different drive select a different disk drive in the Drive box Select the clip to load Richter in this example see Figure 90 Click OK Click the Play button in the selected Panel dialog box to begin playing the clip The Normal Loop and Bounce modes determine how play back occurs Normal mode plays the selected clip or clip list to the end freezing on the last field of the clip or of the last clip in the list Loop plays the selected clip or clip list continuously looping back to the beginning of the clip when the clip ends or in the case of a clip list looping back to the first clip in the list when the last clip ends Bounce mode plays the selected clip or clip list continuously until at the end of the clip it plays the clip in reverse or in the case of a clip list it plays to the end of the clip list then reverses the sequence playing all the clips in reverse order Load Clip Drive INTiydefaultp O O H Clips Tidal Yawe wolcano Figure 90 Load Clip dialog box Profile Family 3 March 2000 Renaming a Clip Renaming a Clip To rename a clip 1 Choose VideoClip Rename Clip The Rename Video Clip dialog
54. frames but becomes unreliable at frame rates faster than normal play speed such as fast shuttle operations Video router The video path through a system The crosspoint circuitry that routes the video within the Profile video disk recorder is a router Volume A volume is a logical set of disks such as the disks in a PDR 200 or a PDR400 which are used as a grouping of disks for the storage of audio and video information Volumes may also consist of a PDX 103 or PDX 208 Disk Expansion unit or a PRS 200 or PRS 250 Profile RAID System Profile Family 307 Y Glossary 308 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Index Numerics ADD A A to D 297 Absolute event type 239 248 Access Control 191 Access Time 297 Actions in List Manager 239 Adding a Profile machine 90 Adjusting column width 255 Advanced 50 59 AES EBU 23 67 297 Air time in Monitor view 240 Analog Audio Input 68 Analog audio interfaces 21 Analog Audio Output 73 Analog Component 55 Analog Composite Video Input Advanced Control 50 Vertical Interval 54 Analog Composite Video Output 60 Analog video 297 API 25 Application programming interface 25 Archive event 247 Archive library 297 Archived clip properties 122 Archiving a bin or clip 112 ASPB 297 Assemble record mode 297 Assigning Profile Channels 259 Audio 67 channels 226 configuration 77 controls 226 gain levels 226 T O 297 Input Clocking 79 input mapping 77 meters 226 monitor in VdrPanel 152 ou
55. have the record buffer start recording at that timecode Profile Family 297 Y Glossary Bit rate The rate at which video streams in megabits per second Mb sec The bit rate is a reflection of quality the higher the bit rate the higher the quality of video However video data stored at a high bit rate consumes more disk storage space than data stored at a lower rate Bit rates can be as low as 6 Mb sec and as high as 54 Mb sec The default video quality bit rate is 24 Mb sec which is broadcast quality BNC Connector used in professional A V components The BNC connection provides optimum shielding between the video input signal lines to provide the best possible performance BNC was recently adopted as an alternate AES signal connector B Picture A B picture is a bidirectionally predictive picture used in MPEG video compression MPEG uses motion prediction to increase efficiency that is it reduces data by not duplicating pixels that do not change from frame to frame A B picture relies on data from both forward and backward motion vectors to determine how a future frame will be composed See GOP I frame P Picture Button on the display A small display box that has a raised appearance and contains text Generally clicking on a button activates a function or performs some action See Clicking Button on the mouse The two or three buttons on the top of the mouse Capture Generally the act of storing digita
56. if you want to prevent modifying renaming or deleting the clip 4 Click OK when you are done viewing the clip properties 124 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Viewing Tape Transport Status Viewing Tape Transport Status To view the status of the tape transports in the library 1 Choose Tape Transport Status from the File menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click The Tape Transport Status dialog box appears Tape Transport Status Figure 69 Tape Transport Status dialog box The labels in the dialog box are explained here 3 March 2000 Transport Icon Transport Number Robot Position Cartridge Name Disable A transport icon is shown for each active transport in the library The order of transports in this dialog does not necessarily reflect the order they appear in the library system This is the logical identifier for the transport It is a number from 0 255 This is the physical transport identifier It is a num ber from 0 3 A cartridge name is shown if one is currently loaded into the transport Removes a transport from service Click Add to re enable the transport Profile Family 125 Y Chapter 3 Using Media Manager Clean Loads a cleaning cartridge and cleans the transport Cleaning Message The message Needs Cleaning appears when the transport is due for cleaning Add Adds a transport to the list of available transports Close Close the Tape Transport Status dialog Help O
57. out Zooms out the track scale You can insert clips at the edit closest to the current time position by choosing Insert from the Media menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click or by clicking Insert Media on the current bin toolbar 3 March 2000 Profile Family 223 224 da Chapter Using the Tool Box Editor After you have inserted material onto the edit timeline you can trim source material You can trim clips directly with trim handles To make the trim handles appear select the clip while it is on the edit timeline see Figure 128 You can drag the trim handles to the left or right to make the clips shorter or longer to the limit of the beginning and ending of the source material Trim handles Figure 128 Trim handles on the edit timeline As you trim a clip the current channel output plays source material from the trim position rather than the current time position Timecode for the trim position is shown at the bottom of the timeline with the amount of time added or removed from the clip below that A few keyboard shortcuts are available for trimming e Select trim handle head Ctrl h e Select trim handle tail Ctrl t e Trim left 10 frames Shift z e Trim left 1 frame z e Trim right frame x e Trim right 10 frames Shift x Creating a New Master A master is a sequence of clips To create a new master 1 Click on the New Master button on the current bin toolbar The New Master dialog box
58. save your current overall configuration in a file and then load it later Configuration files have a cfg extension To save your current configuration in a file 1 Choose File Save Current Configuration The Save As dialog box appears Figure 4 Save As Save tt J profile File name new ctg save as type Contig Files chg Cancel Figure 4 Save As dialog box for saving a configuration file 2 Enter a file name in the File Name box new cfg in this example 3 Press Enter or click Save The current configuration is saved 3 March 2000 Profile Family 35 Y Chapter2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager Loading a Configuration File To load a configuration file that has been saved previously 1 Choose File Load Configuration File The Open dialog box appears Figure 5 Open Look ir E profile Es File name new ctg Files of type Contig Files chg Cancel Figure 5 Open dialog box for loading a configuration file 2 A message box warns you that if you load a configuration file all open windows are closed Click Yes to continue 3 Double click a file name in the tree or type the name of the file in the File Name box new cfg in this example 4 Press Enter or click Open The file is loaded as the current configuration 36 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Setting Master Timecode Setting Master Timecode From the Master VITC Setting dialog box yo
59. select a clip in the current bin display choose Load from the Media menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click You can also click the Load button on the current bin toolbar Then click the Play button 3 Enter a new subclip name in the clip name field or accept the default name 4 To create a clip on the fly click Create Mark in This starts the new clip A new clip name appears in the current bin display with a duration of only one frame 5 Click Create Mark out The new clip s duration is updated 6 Repeat steps 2 4 7 Click the Stop button when done 222 Profile Family 3 March 2000 The Edit Timeline The Edit Timeline weet The edit timeline lets you edit masters and their tracks of video and audio up to sixteen tracks of audio The current frame is indicated by the placement of the current position time cursor The horizontal scroll bar allows you to scroll through time and the vertical scroll bar allows you to scroll through tracks Select the Edit button beneath the audio controls to activate the edit timeline without changing the current time position e Edit Master Name Selected Clip Current Position Time Cursor Linear Timecode Readout Master ne b Trim Handles r l i rac Zoom In Track Labels Readouts Scroll Bars Zoom Out 1 Audio 2 Video Figure 127 Edit timeline Beneath the edit timeline is a toolbar displaying these buttons e Zoom in Zooms in the track scale e Zoom
60. set a corresponding delay on the playback The E to E Timed Output option sets a 16 line delay on all the system outputs allowing a zero timed input to be exactly timed with a play to air signal To set all your Profile unit outputs for E to E operations 1 Choose Option System Timing or click the System Timing button on the toolbar The System Timing dialog box appears 2 Click E to E Timed Output 3 Click Close NOTE You must restart all other Profile applications to allow the new system timing setting to take effect Ext Ret Line 11 10 95 6 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1293 45 6 7 6 9 1011 1213 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Internal Ref Genlock Input J14 J14 SD OutA J14 SD OutB J14 Timing Mode C Zero Timed Output e Figure 8 System Timing dialog box E to E timed 3 March 2000 Profile Family 41 da Chapter2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager Auto Timing Auto timing mode automatically times the video input signal to the internal reference system timing provided the video input is synchronous and timed within the auto timing window If auto timing is enabled and the signal is able to be timed into the system the Auto Timed indicator at the top of the video input dialog box is turned on If you want to use the disk recorder as a switcher and or have the output video correctly timed when in E to E mode the input video must be locked to the reference and properly timed to the disk rec
61. the Advanced Control tab There are different vertical interval line numbers in the dialog boxes depending on your video standard NTSC 525 or PAL 625 To change vertical interval settings 1 Click or double click on the Vertical Interval tab see Figure 17 Analog Composite Video Input J5 Compozite ln J5 Main Field 1 WideoLine 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 16 19 20 21 22 23 24 Normal O a C T T C a T a S a Motch Fass on Belate C ee eee eS ee eee Field z VideoLine 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 16 19 20 21 e2 23 24 Normal Motch Pass onr Melee ee ae ee ee eee ee eae ee ce Defaut Close Oraa Hep Figure 17 Analog Composite Video Input dialog box Vertical Interval tab 2 Move the sliders for each individual line to select Normal Notch Pass on Y or Delete Normal indicates the vertical interval video line is passed through Notch applies notch filtering to the vertical interval video line chrominance information and any luminance around the chroma subcarrier are removed Pass On Y passes luminance information straight through This is useful for VITC and closed caption or data filtering Delete removes the vertical interval video line and replaces it with black 3 Click Undo to return the values in the dialog box to their original settings 4 Click Default to return all values to their default values 5 Click Close to accept all inputs 54 Profile Family 3 March 2000 An
62. the Time Delay clip that the record buffer loop records on Resource A resource is a Profile input codec or output You allocate resources for exclusive use by any application such as Tool Box Editor List Manager and VDRPanel You should free up deallocate unneeded Profile resources whenever possible to that they can be used by other applications RGB An additive method of combining percentages of red green and blue primary colors to form other colors ROM See Read Only Memory RS 232 C A standard serial communications interface for data communications commonly used for communications between a computer and modem or to control automated devices which don t have a conventional computer operating system 3 March 2000 Profile Family 305 Y Glossary RS 422 A standard serial communications interface for data communications similar to RS 232 C but good for longer distance cabling It is typically used for communications in a broadcast or post production environment between devices such as VTRs mixers and controllers SCSI Channel Small Computer System Interface The interface between the Profile processor and the disk array or library system It is fast and wide and provides for speeds up to 20 Mbytes second on a 16 bit bus SDI An acronym for Serial Digital Interface a standard for transmitting CCIR 601 digital video over a pair of conductors coaxial cable SECAM France and Russia use the S
63. them NOTE To communicate across the network all Fibre Channel machines should have Profile system software version 2 4 installed You must first configure your network whether your Profile unit came from the factory with a Fibre Channel card installed or whether you have installed Fibre Channel as a field installation kit Configuring your system for the Fibre Channel also requires that you first configure your Ethernet LAN See the PDR200 Installation Manual or the Profile Family Local Area Network Installation Manual for more information NOTE Even an isolated Profile unit with a Fibre Channel card that is not connected to a network must be given an IP address Follow the instructions for entering an IP address under Fibre Channel IP Address Set Up on page 199 3 March 2000 Profile Family 197 Chapter 7 Fibre Channel Video Networking Setting Up Hardware for Fibre Channel First you set up the Ethernet LAN The LAN card uses a twisted pair network scheme and so must be connected via a standard 10BaseT Ethernet hub You cannot plug one LAN card directly into another You can put Profile disk recorders onto your site s computer network if you want just as long as you are aware that it uses TCP IP Next you set up the Fibre Channel network Unlike the Ethernet LAN the Fibre Channel network will permit two machines to be plugged directly into each other More than two machines however require a Fibre Channel hub o
64. to play in the current bin 2 Choose Load from the Media menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click You can also click on the Load button on the current bin toolbar The master is loaded onto the edit timeline and the timeline is made active 3 Click on the Play button You can also drag and drop a master onto the empty edit timeline To drag and drop a master 1 Select a master by pressing the left mouse button while the mouse pointer is over the desired clip and hold the button down 2 Drag the master to the edit timeline and release the left mouse button NOTE Masters cannot be loaded onto the capture timeline 3 March 2000 Profile Family 225 Y Chapter amp Using the Tool Box Editor Using the Audio Controls Profile Family The Tool Box Editor lets you gain access to up to 32 channels of audio Each audio channel consists of an audio channel record selector button and an audio metering section The audio metering section contains an input indicator an overload indicator and from left to right tick marks to indicate decibel levels an input gain level indicator an audio level bar meter and an output gain level indicator Audio Channel Record Selectors i a a Input eo Indicator _ Overload Decibel Level Indicator Audio Meters Output Gain Level Audio Fader Input Gain Level 7 8 AIA m Scale Increase Decrease Output Gain Adjustment Input Gain Adjustment Unity
65. to start 8 Click Stop to stop recording 154 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Defining a New Clip Hew Clip Enter clip name MA Drive Int fdetault r Clips Figure 89 New Clip dialog box Record Clips First To define a clip by recording and then naming the clip l PA 3 March 2000 Click a panel to select it If any clips are listed in the Clips box choose VideoClip Eject All Clips to clear the clip list Click the Record button in the selected Panel dialog box to begin recording A clip named 1 or other number for a unique clip name appears in the clip list for the panel If you are in Loop or Bounce mode the clip is limited in size to either 1 000 fields or to the last clip length specified in the Loop Bounce Length dialog box Click Stop to stop recording If you repeat these steps to record additional clips they are named sequentially one higher than the previous clip For example 2 3 and so forth Choose VideoClip Rename Clip to open the Rename Video Clip dialog box see Renaming a Clip on page 157 Click on the clip to be renamed such as 1 Enter the new name in the To field Spaces and uppercase characters are acceptable however uppercase and lowercase characters will not distiguish clip names Click OK Profile Family 155 156 Y Chapter4 Using VdrPanel Loading and Playing a Clip To load and play a clip l gt
66. to use a live feed but you now want to run a commercial List Manager lets you immediately use any event in your list 1 Schedule your list normally 2 Monitor the list by clicking the Monitor tab Make sure you can see the channel that will execute the event you wish to take 3 Highlight the event that you want to use immediately 4 Click the Take button The event begins five seconds later 5 The list will continue running all the events which would normally be performed after the Take event It will not return to the event that was interrupted unless you highlight that event and use the Take button again NOTE An Approx event type is not a scheduled event You must take an event of type Approx to run it Stopping an Event List Manager provides a way to stop a event at any time You can use the Stop button to interrupt the event on the current channel To stop an event 1 Locate the event which is currently being executed highlighted in green and select the event 2 Click the Stop button to stop the event 3 After a few seconds the event will stop and the video output will display black 252 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Customizing Your List Display Customizing Your List Display You may find that the default list display does not meet your needs For example you may have long input names that are not visible because the Name column is not wide enough If you never use List Manager to schedule Record events
67. tree and then click or double click a digital component input from the list such as SDI InA J13 The Serial Digital Component Video Input dialog box appears Figure 19 Digital Component ideo Input J5 4 SDI in J5 OQ OQ Video VITC Auto Present Present Timed Overwvritable video Standard Name 5DHnA J5 VITE DE eE f 525 Video Standard e VITC Pea Setting 625 Video Standard M Automatic WITE detect Enable Auto Timing T Enable Dither 10 to bit video Close Oraa Hep Ce Figure 19 Serial Digital Component Video Input dialog box 2 If you prefer enter the new signal name in the Name box For example if SDI InA J13 is a dedicated satellite feed you could rename it to Satellite_1 The VITC name window title bar name and the configuration tree name automatically change as you enter the new name Names can be up to 30 characters and can include spaces To return a renamed signal to the default delete all the characters in the text field and press Enter 3 Under Overwritable Video Standard click either 525 Video Standard or 625 Video Standard If you change this standard you must restart all tools that use this channel The video input board can serve both standards but the input can only accept one at a time 4 Select a VITC reader setting If you to use Automatic VITC Detect the disk recorder uses the range set in the From and To lines to look for the VITC signals If Automat
68. 0 29 Windows NT desktop 28 WinTail 32 172 173 X XLR 216 Digital Interface chassis 23 67 Z Zooming the edit timeline 223 Profile Family 317 318 Profile Family 3 March 2000
69. 0annaaannnnnannnnannnnnnnnnennnnni 78 Audio Configuration dialog box Input Clocking tab aannnnseennnnnnnnnnessnnnnnnnnenne nenne 81 Audio Configuration dialog box Monitor Channels tab cccccccccsseeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeens 82 System Audio Configuration dialog bOX cccccccceccccecseeececeeeececeeseeeeeesaueeeeseeeeeeeeeeas 83 Fibre Channel Network Configuration dialog DOX ccccccesseesceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeees 84 Media Manager WINGOW cynic a A cas a a 88 Add Remove Machine dialog DOX seision a ee ee 90 Add Network HOStdialog DO ssictsees dere sec e E a E aces 90 The Media Manager tree pane ccccccceececceeseeeeesuaeeceeseceeeseeeeeeeeesueseeeseneeesseaeess 92 TheRaste Special dialog Ox ncra e Keer Meare eet 96 Confirm Copy dialog bOX a2 ites an state onest cent edecenc ois Seenetadeesin creer casuaeh bee eacetens 98 Recycle Bin properties dialog DOX cccccecccceeesceceeeeeeeececeeeeeeaeseesseeseeeaeeesseeeeeaes 100 Properties dialog box fOr volumes cccccseccceeesceceeeeceseeeeceeeeeeseaeesseseeeseeeeeeeeeeeaes 101 Properties dialog box for clips OF MASTEMS cccceeeeceeceeeeee ceases ceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaes 102 ihe WanSCOde MIStOhy DAGE eenaa aa he baie eens ace nae tani tea ects 103 PING CHAO G DOK gosse inte neti etesatcands oe ccatd sinc erence Sauna a inquests nse eE 104 Transcode WUE Y WIV OW cc s2 areas a r 105 JPEG Custom Video Quality Settings dialog DOX
70. 24 Video Disk Subsystem Profile Family In the video disk subsystem video data is compressed and written to up to eight 18 gigabyte disks and then read from these disks and decompressed This video data is read from and written to the video router in 8 bit parallel component digital video format The video disk subsystem has enhanced disk recorder boards PDR 200 and above with an Intel 1960 real time processor and a SCSI 2 interface to the disks The video disk subsystem uses master and slave disk recorder or enhanced disk recorder EDR boards with two SCSI 2 channels on each board The master disk recorder board comes standard with a two channel JPEG codec Bidirectional codec channels allow channels to be configured for recording or playback By adding a slave disk recorder board a Profile unit becomes a four channel JPEG system The master board has a Intel 1960 real time processor which controls compression and the data flows on SCSI 2 channels and JPEG codecs Master and slave EDR boards also control MPEG encoder and decoder boards or DVCPRO codecs which are connected to the master and slave via a PCI interconnect board 3 March 2000 Video Compression Video Compression The 1960 on the master board is used to control data flow and compression coefficient loading of the JPEG codecs and if present MPEG encoders and decoders or DVCPRO codecs The amount of JPEG video compression varies according to the setting of the compre
71. 3 236 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Adding Media for Playback List Manager PROFILE18 File Edit View Project Options Help P ae ei ee 2 JMonitor _J Channel A Channel B View Channel JPEG Name Start Time Duration Comment INT default jpeg1 14 45 15 25 00 00 10 15 INT default 6 10 00 00 10 16 INT Jc INT defaultipeq_2 ry a a 15 Figure 133 A basic playback list 3 March 2000 Profile Family 237 238 Y Chapter 9 Using the List Manager Changing Event Settings Status Profile Family List Manager establishes default settings for each event as you drop material into the window You can move from event to event in the list with the up and down arrow keys You can customize the event by editing the property settings in the list You can also edit property settings by double clicking on the left end of the row then changing settings in the edit boxes of the properties dialog box that appears The dialog box for play event properties is shown in Figure 134 Play Event Properties Clip Name LENER EEE Start Time 14 50 54 13 Duration 00 00 12 19 Type Absolute Start Date 12 16 1998 Comment ji Repeat Hour s Minutes None Every fo fo C Hourly fie Brdiiete Tine C Daily End Date C Weekly End Time Error i Error Cancel Figure 134 Play event properties dialog box By default the list displays five columns Status Name St
72. 6 lines You can scroll past this range by dragging the pointer on this line in either direction with the mouse 2 Click any button to the left of the internal reference genlock or video output signal name and the timing edit box appears in the bottom left of the System Timing dialog box see Figure 8 which shows the dialog box when the outputs are E to E timed 3 In the timing edit box you can adjust the number of fields genlock only or lines and also tune these settings with course or fine adjustments You can enter a number directly or click an arrow to adjust a setting The adjustments and ranges available vary depending on the type of output you have 4 Click Close to accept the settings Undo to return to the previous settings Default to return to the default settings You can also make system and output timing adjustments using the configuration dialog boxes for genlock and video outputs To access those dialog boxes select Genlock or Video Output from the configuration tree 3 March 2000 Profile Family 39 Y Chapter2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager System Timing Figure 7 System Timing dialog box zero timed 40 Profile Family 3 March 2000 E to E Timed Outputs E to E Timed Outputs In some applications you may want to precisely switch an output from a live video feed to playback of recorded material Since the live input will be delayed 16 lines as it passes through the Profile unit you must
73. 9 da Chapter9 Using the List Manager Closing a List To close a list Choose File Close List Exporting a List To export a list into an ASCII text file st 1 Click the Edit window tab 2 Choose File Export A dialog box appears 3 Enter the a name of the file you want to save in the File Name box 4 Click OK The st extension is added to the file name automatically List File ASCII Text Format The file format for an ASCII text list file follows these rules A line beginning with pound sign is treated as a comment Each event is saved on a single line in the text file Individual fields of an event are separated by a comma White spaces are allowed before and after field delimiters Fields are case insensitive The format for each event is Action Clip Name Start Time Duration Type Start Date Comment other required fields depending on the action There are several other rules for list files saved as text The first event in the list file has to be an absolute event otherwise it 1s an error A follow event will be on the line following the parent event in the list file Each event can have only one follow event Empty lines will be ignored while parsing An error occurs if all the fields for a particular type of event are not present If an error is detected in any event while parsing the list file the event list will not be created for that file The date field will be of the for
74. A Timecode Setup Display on panel ot init C TC Rec 1 C ITC input C Field counter C Generator Timecode generator settings C Free run C Freeze Lock to field Regenerate hr min SEC frm Figure 82 Timecode Setup dialog box Regenerate pertains to BVW controllers only When the timecode position is changed to a new portion of the clip and a record operation includes recorded timecode tracks which happens with assemble edits from BVE and other controllers the timecode generator is initialized to match the timecode read from the timecode track VITC or LTC before the record occurs The Reset To button resets the timecode to the value entered in the box The generator can be set to this value when Free Run Freeze or Lock to Field Number is selected Click Close Profile Family 143 T Chapter4 Using VdrPanel Setting Timecode Crosspoints The Timecode Crosspoint dialog box controls the connections of timecode signals within the Profile system e Timecode inputs top left corner represent either LTC input connectors on the back panel or VITC input signals Timecode inputs can be connected to timecode recorders for recording onto disk e Timecode generators below timecode inputs represent timecode generators used by the panels Timecode generators can be connected to timecode recorders for recording onto disk or to timecode outputs e Timecode outputs top right corner represent
75. B 01 02 CD Default connect video input gt video output 01 03 CD Default connect video input gt video codec O3 02 C5 Schedule connect video codec gt video output now do the audio connections 1 4 00 00 index 4 audio codecs 00 01 index 5 a dio codecs 00 02 index 6 audio codecs 00 03 index 7 audio codecs 10 00 index 8 audio outputs 1 4 10 01 index 9 10 02 index 10 10 03 index 11 Ji now do the LTC to recorder 1 04 00 S index 12 LTC input 07 00 index 13 LTC output 09 00 index 14 tcRecorder 12 13 C0 12 14 CD 1A 15 Co 186 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Sample Configuration Files Assigning a Second JPEG Codec This example is the same as the basic configuration but it adds another JPEG codec connected to the same video input This sample file is supplied as 2 pegSample cfg in the c Profile configs directory on the Profile system drive format is 2 digit base 10 numbers 7 LOrmMeatl AAI I tunel tune starting col I format if coll is not between 0 amp 9 its a comment format optional parameters with white space separators start in col 6 iy Orme the Lest 1s available index 1 video input 0 shared index 2 video output 0 index 3 JPEG codec 0 at 100KB Default connect indexl gt index2 vid in gt vid out Default connect video input gt video codec Schedule connect video codec gt video output now do the audio
76. BVW 133 Clip list 161 Clip marks 133 Clip Name Box 150 Clip position 299 Profile Family Clip Position Bar 149 Closing an application 29 Cluster 171 CODEC 21 22 139 141 299 Collapsing the media tree 92 Column width 255 COM 1 and COM2 132 Comb 51 Command Line 299 Comment column 239 Communications port 132 Component video 299 Composite video 299 Compression 21 137 299 Configuration file editing 181 Configuration files 35 Configuration Manager 29 33 Configuration tree 34 Configuration PRC 100 178 Configuration ProLink 173 178 Configuring Audio Resources 268 Setting the audio window size 270 Configuring Resources 259 Configuring resources RS 422 178 Configuring Timecode Resources 271 configuring TimeDelay resources 283 Configuring Video Resources 259 adding a video track 260 selecting video inputs and outputs 262 selecting video quality 260 Controller 131 133 Controls audio 226 Copying media in Media Manager 95 Copymovie 204 Create Mark In button 221 Create Mark Out button 221 Creating configuration files 180 Crosspoints timecode 144 video 141 Ctrl key 17 D D to A 300 Data cartridge 299 3 March 2000 Data set 168 Date 240 dB 226 299 Decibels 226 Decoders 22 Decoders MPEG 21 Default 300 Default Procamp 61 Defining clips 154 Delete Media 213 Delete vertical interval 54 Deleting an archived clip 114 Deleting clips 159 Deleting media in Media Manager 99 Desktop Windows NT 28 D
77. E E E E ee 79 DUP MApN G ee E EE E nee 79 Mout C lock NOs E E E AEAEE A AR EERE E 79 Audio Configuration Monitor Channels Tab ccccccsceseeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeseeseesaeeeseeees 82 System Audio Configuration saccceteeeeciene cacs eanes dace andugacanecndasaccte sdacdseneenceeaddacndeeciesenasdsencdecs 83 Setting Up Fibre Channel Networking cccccssesceececeeeeeeseeeeceeeueeeeeeeeceeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaseas 84 Using Media Manager Starting and Exiting the Media Manager cccecceceesseeeeeceseeaueeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaeegs 88 Starting Other Applications from the Tools M Nu ccccccesseeeeceeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeanens 89 Viewing and Hiding the Toolbar and Status Bal ccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeaaaeees 89 Viewing Help and Software Version Information ccccsssseceeeeeseeeceseeeeeeeseeseeeeeaneeeess 89 Connecting to a Remote Machine ccccceccceeceeeseeeeeceseeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeeeauaaaeeeeeseaaaaeees 90 Viewing the Media Hierarchy ccscccccceeeeceseeeeeeceeeeceeeeseeeeeesseceeeeeescseeeeseeeeeeeasaseeessanseeees 92 MOON cineca ce sc ce acne e Soda cneeeie he oe Meenieeseeameencees 94 Copying Medid ck sce cece cane ondeocereadeseenaseeriedcsheeecsscaqereeenecacsscecmaedasadapseceatancatanaeteeehecendeceuses 95 Using Pasie SSC eects satire eteces ses A EEEE S E 96 Moving Medid aissrenipesicnn i i ri e 97 Dupi cang Wii lt 0 r Rear eenen enter ter
78. EG 03 04 98 10 24 AM Ez Clip4 00 00 04 19 JPEG 03 03 98 05 07 PM 66 jA ja 99 ces ome ace dee a Chapter 3 Usin g Media Mana ger Si Clip6 00 00 04 13 JPEG 03 04 98 10 24 AM Si Clip 00 00 05 00 JPEG 03 03 98 04 32 PM Si Clip8 00 00 00 01 JPEG 03 04 98 12 19 PM Si Clip9 00 00 03 09 JPEG 03 04 98 10 27 AM Si Clip10 00 00 09 22 JPEG 03 04 98 12 19 PM Si d 00 00 02 27 JPEG 03 03 98 04 32 PM H ipeg4 00 00 10 25 MPEG 03 02 98 02 21 PM LTCSource 00 00 34 14 JPEG 03 02 98 05 54 PM i Masterl 00 00 07 12 JPEG 03 04 98 12 21 PM S Master2 00 00 11 16 JPEG 03 03 98 05 11 PM S Master3 00 00 03 04 JPEG 03 04 98 09 48 4M E Master4 00 00 10 28 JPEG 03 04 98 10 52 4M S Mastertom 00 00 15 10 JPEG 03 04 98 09 42 4M Ez mpeg6 00 00 10 29 MPEG 03 02 98 02 22 PM AA Source On 00 N4 27 IPFA Na N 98 4 54 PM Z tata Transcode Utility cS Preview eS eee eet 7 Ale The Transcode Utility which is started from Media rps Materia Manager converts motion JPEG media to MPEG or m EE a DVCPRO and converts from DVCPRO or MPEG to wwe JPEG You can also change the video quality of a clip Refer also to Chapter 3 Using Media Manager ee VdrPanel File VideoClip Controller Options Window Help lt 3 Panel A Panel Control Panel B Panel Control EEH I mm EEE I oe VdrPanel enables you to capture and trim video timecode size type size type e Kma ai Kont and audio clips and then play them back By eee default VdrPanel sta
79. Figure 129 Audio controls The overload indicator lights if the audio level is above the highest level of the meter The input gain level audio level and output gain level use the same metering scale The metering scale is a 4 0 dB meter scale 0 corresponds to 4 0 dB and ranges from 14 dB to 40 dB 18 dB to 56 dB full scale At the top of the four audio meters are the audio channel record selector buttons Valid audio channels for the current channel will have record selector buttons containing a channel number To enable a channel for recording place the mouse pointer over the record selector button and click on it with the left mouse button The audio fader lets you adjust the audio input and output levels of the currently selected channel If more than one audio channel is selected for gain adjustment the fader level reflects the highest gain level of the selected audio channels The decibel level window above the fader also displays the fader s current decibel level The input and output gain levels of each channel may be adjusted also To select an audio channel for gain adjustment place the mouse pointer over any part of the channel s meter section Click the left button to select the channel The meter section is highlighted 3 March 2000 Using the Audio Controls Below the audio gain displays is the audio control toolbar which has the following buttons e Unity Sets all audio levels to the unity level 0 dB
80. Figure 144 Ff evntsch log Notepad File Edit Search Help Log opened Mon Jul 22 68 39 63 1996 C6 Play Play Absolute 67 22 1996 68 41 23 11 66 66 67 66 68 41 36 11 profile C6 Play Absolute 67 22 1996 08 42 04 0 00 00 07 0080 68 42 11 66 profile Status Type Start Time End Time User Name Event Title Channel Event Type Date Scheduled Reserved List Name Duration Figure 144 An example of a log file The Scheduled Duration field shows the value entered in the On air List It does not show the actual duration of the event The times shown in the Start Time and End Time fields are actual times which can be used to calculate the event duration The List Name field shows the name of the original list containing that event which subsequently was Scheduled and became part of the On air List When the log file reaches about four megabytes in length the information in the file is moved to a new file called evntschI log and kept as an archive This ensures that evntsch log always contains current information but keeps its size manageable Subsequent archived information will be stored in evntsch2 log evntsch3 log and so on 256 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Chapter 1 0 Using the Resource Manager The Resource Manager lets you assign system video audio and timecode resources and configure operational settings for one or more Profile channels These resources are used by the Tool Box Editor List Manager
81. G MPEG Record MPEG Play MPEG Play Record and DVCPRO JPEG channels allow only JPEG clips MPEG channels allow only MPEG clips and DVCPRO channels only allow DVCPRO clips JPEG channels allow any type of events play record etc MPEG Play allow any type of events except record MPEG Record allow any type of events except play MPEG Play Record allow any type of events play record etc DVCPRO allow any type of events play record etc Adding Media for Playback Creating a playback list is the simplest of all List Manager operations To build a playback only list l Click the Monitor tab to view the On air List The first time you use List Manager this list should be empty Scroll through the Media Manager tree to locate the first clip or master that you wish to include in your list Drag the clip or master into the List Manager window and drop it at the desired location in the list You can add clips or masters between two existing events by dropping an event on the line separating the two events and selecting the top event The item is inserted below the selected event Change the event settings to meet your needs The settings are described in Changing Event Settings on page 238 Continue adding clips or masters by dragging them onto the list List Manager will perform the events at the scheduled time After adding a few events your list should look similar to the one shown in Figure 13
82. LE she A 238 Chnanne liy DOS ects cobs wie seas lt a 259 JPEG Video Quality SettingS c cc ccccceeeceecesseeeeeseeeeeseeeeeseeseeaseeeeeeesseeaseeeeeeeseas 261 Profile Family 13 da Contents 14 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Preface About this Manual The Profile Family User Manual supports Profile system software 3 0 for the PDR 200 PDR 300 and PDR 400 Profile Video File Servers and with a Master Enhanced Disk Recorder board upgrade the Profile PDR 100 Video Disk Recorder Profile disk recorders use digital technology to store and produce broadcast quality JPEG and MPEG or DVCPRO video and CD quality audio This manual documents the standard and optional software applications that run on the Profile platform 3 March 2000 The Profile Configuration Manager configures your hardware for input and output of video and audio genlock and system timing The Media Manager manages clips and masters on disk and in a cartridge library system With Fibre Channel you can use Media Manager to copy or move media between Profile units The Transcode Utility converts media between different video compression formats such as from JPEG to MPEG or JPEG to DVCPRO VdrPanel lets you capture and use JPEG and MPEG or DVCPRO video and audio clips The Profile Disk Utility lets you manage the Profile systems media disk drives The optional Tool Box Editor records media and performs simple cuts only edits It also allows you to crea
83. Media Manager File Edit View Tools Help les el Re Contents of COX _OS4INT1 default Flag Profile Network CDX_03 Local Modified mE 00 00 05 20 MPEG 03 02 98 07 47 AM ER 00 00 05 15 MPEG 03 02 98 05 15 PM S58 Clip 0000 33 25 JPEG 03 03 98 04 55 PM a ProfileTooboxT emp Si Clip 00000425 JPEG 03 03 98 04 21 PM gp Recycled Si Clip2 O0001315 JPEG 03 03 98 04 24 PM 4i Clip3 00 00 06 13 JPEG 03 04 98 10 24 AM Sf Clips 00000419 JPEG 03 03 98 05 07 PM Sg Clip 00 00 01 15 JPEG 03 04 98 09 48 AM Sf Clips 00000413 JPEG 03 04 98 10 24 AM i Clip 00 00 05 00 JPEG 03 03 98 04 32 PM 5 Clips 00 00 00 01 JPEG 03 04 98 12 19 PM Sf Clip Q0 00 03 09 JPEG 03 04 98 10 27 AM 5 Clip10 O00009 22 JPEG 03 04 98 12 19 PM Saf d 00000227 JPEG 03 03 98 04 32 PM A inead 00 00 10 25 MPEG 03 02 98 02 21 PM di LTCS ource 00 00 34 1714 JPEG 03 02 98 05 54 PM E Masteri 00 00 07 1232 JPEG 03 04 98 1221 PM Master 00 00 1116 JPEG 03 03 98 05 11 PM E Master 00 00 03 04 JPEG 03 04 98 09 48 AM Master4 00 00 10 28 JPEG 03 04 98 10 52 AM E Mastertomi 00 00 1510 JPEG 03 04 98 09 42 AM A mpegs 00 00 10 29 MPEG 03 02 98 02 22 PM AAi Snurre noia PFG Hanaga 4 5 Phd l Z Figure 42 Media Manager window To exit the Media Manager choose File Exit A message box is displayed asking you to confirm that you really want to exit the Media Manager application Click on the Yes button to confirm the exit or the No button to cancel the quit command
84. Profile machine Connect to Machine Machine name PROFILE a Local PROFILE SfLocall Cancel PROFILES __ Cancel PROFILE TO Figure 116 Remote Machine dialog box To connect a Profile machine from the network host list 1 Select the name of the machine in list box 2 Click Connect 3 The Connecting to Machine dialog box is displayed If the connection is unsuccessful you are given the opportunity to retry the connection or to cancel the operation NOTE To add a Profile machine to the network host list see Connecting to a Remote Machine on page 90 3 March 2000 Profile Family 211 a da Chapter amp Using the Tool Box Editor Selecting a Current Bin After you have acquired resources and chosen operational settings you are ready to start editing First let s discuss some basics With the Tool Box Editor you edit media such as clips and masters The capture timeline lets you capture video and audio clips while the edit timeline allows you to edit a sequence clips into a master A bin is simply a collection of masters and clips The current bin is the set of media displayed in the current bin display See Figure 117 By default the current bin 1s the first or top bin displayed in Media Manager The current bin display helps you focus on and work with a set of clips and masters Above the display the column headers are shown Click on the column header bar by pointing the mouse pointer at the head
85. Profile unit to a PAL or NTSC reference signal house black The genlock board also lets you have LTC inputs and outputs with four inputs and four outputs possible for each channel eeen eee TELT Audio I O External Chassis Networking RS 422 ports 8 Ethernet LAN 1 0 Applications Processor Subsystem e Intel Pentium Processor Digital Audio I O EISA Bus DVCPRO MPEG MPEG Fibre Enhanced Enhanced Video I O Mix Codec 4 2 2 4 2 2 Channel Slave Recorder Master Recorder Analog Composite Effects Decoder Encoder Arbitrated 2 PEG CODECs Intel i960 real time SDI w Embed Audio only Decoder Loop Ultra SCSI 2 processor Comp Analog In F i 2 JPEG CODECS Analog Comp mon Ultra SCSI 2 SCSI Devices PCI Bus 32 x 32 CCIR 601 Video Router and Clocks er 9955 1 1 Indicates optional board Figure 1 The PDR200 300 400 block diagram 24 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Profile Software Development Profile Software Development The Profile Software Development Kit SDK provides an application programming interface API for libraries of Profile functions We recommend that you call these functions via Microsoft Visual C 5 0 however it is possible to use other languages that permit calls to C declared functions contact your Grass Valley Group representative for more informati
86. Quality list box and the Custom Video Quality Settings dialog box appears Select either Custom1 or Custom2 in the Video Quality list box When selected you can change the name of a custom setting For JPEG see Figure 148 and Table 16 select a video quality with the slider 260 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Configuring Video Resources Custom Video Quality Settings Figure 148 Custom Video Quality Settings dialog box JPEG Table 16 JPEG Video Quality Settings Quality Settings Compression in Mbps High Custom or 2 6 54 in increments of 6 24 default 3 March 2000 Profile Family 261 Y Chapter 10 Using the Resource Manager 6 Click the Crosspoints button and then select a video input from the Video Input check boxes see Figure 150 for JPEG or Figure 151 for DVCPRO The names of video inputs are determined by the system configuration created with the Configuration Manager application see Chapter 2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager You can choose only one video input at a time per track 7 Click the Crosspoints button and then select video outputs from the Video Output s check boxes The names of video outputs are determined by the system configuration created with the Configuration Manager application see Chapter 2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager You can choose one or more video outputs at a time Each output corresponds to one of the video output connectors on the back o
87. Start PDR Applications Tool Box Editor NOTE The Tool Box Editor may be restarted at any time Multiple instances are allowed 3 Project PROFILE17 channel 1 Tool Box Editor File Edit View Config Media Timeline Help _lchannel M m 00 hrs 00 mns remaining PROFILE17 intdefault T View All Media Name Start Time End Time Length Tracks LastC a 4 a as Capture _ Edit Figure 114 Tool Box Editor window You can start the Tool Box Editor from a command line provided that c profile is in the path by typing tbxedit exe You can also specify a project file name when you start the Tool Box Editor from a command line tbxedit exe myproject tbx You can start Tool Box Editor while also connecting to a named Profile unit on the network tbxedit exe m profile7 NOTE You cannot specify both a project file and a remote Profile machine ina command line at the same time 208 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Configuring Resources Whenever you start the Tool Box Editor a Hardware Communication Monitor is also started if it is not already running This program keeps track of the Profile host file profile hst which lists Profile systems on the network as well as remoting activities Hardware Communication Monitor Commands Humber of Connections 1 Figure 115 Hardware Communication message box The Hardware Communication Monitor tries to connect to a machine in the project f
88. The two or three buttons on the top of the mouse Choosing menu items File Exit for example File Exit means choose the Exit menu item under the File menu Commands a setup for example are shown in bold Pressing and releasing the mouse button without moving the pointer Hold Ctrl down while pressing other keys in a sequence Pressing and releasing the left mouse button twice without moving the pointer Pressing and holding the mouse button while moving the pointer Changing the location of the pointer on the screen by moving the mouse An arrow or other graphic on the screen indicating the current cursor position for selecting or clicking Positioning the pointer on an object on the display by moving the mouse Pressing and holding the right mouse button Hold Shift down while pressing other keys in a sequence Profile Family 17 F Preface 18 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Chapter 1 Introducing the Profile Family The Profile PDR 100 Video Disk Recorder and the Profile PDR 200 PDR 300 and PDR 400 Video File Servers store broadcast quality motion JPEG MPEG PDR200 and PDR 300 only or DVCPRO 25 and DVCPRO 50 PDR 400 only video and CD quality audio on computer disk drives rather than on video tape allowing almost instant access to any timecode location of your video and audio material A Profile system is more than just a one for one replacement of a VTR it can have up to six record and eight playba
89. This can be another bin or anywhere in the contents pane when a bin is selected The selected location may even be in another Media Manager window If both the source and the destination locations reside on machines connected to the Fibre Channel network you may copy between machines 4 Choose Paste from the Edit menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click You can also click the Paste button on the toolbar Pasting media into the same bin has no effect To move a clip or master using Paste Special 1 In the contents pane select a clip or master To extend the selection press Shift Up Arrow or Shift Down Arrow Choose Edit Select All or Ctrl A to select all the media in the contents pane 2 Choose Cut from the Edit menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click You can also click the Cut button on the toolbar 3 Select the location where you want to paste the media To use Paste Special you must select a bin on a different volume a bin on a remote machine or a partition in a library system 4 Choose Paste Special from the Edit menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click When the Paste Special dialog box appears click the button for the paste option you prefer then click OK To move a clip or master using drag and drop 1 In the contents window select one or more clips or masters 2 Drag the selection and drop it at the appropriate location This can be a bin or anywhere in the contents pane when a bin
90. Time Remaining Figure 101 Format Disk s dialog box Profile Family 169 F Chapter 5 Using the Profile Disk Utility Loading Microcode To load microcode for your hard disks 1 In the lower pane select the drive or drives where you want to load microcode 2 Choose Disk Utilities Load Microcode or click the Load Microcode button to open this dialog box Microcode Filename to Load Look ar EJ bin a cudwO015 lod cudw6001 lod Files of type Microcode Files lod Cancel Figure 102 Microcode Filename to Load dialog box 3 Double click on a filename or enter the name of the microcode lod file in the Filename box and click Open to load the microcode see Table 10 NOTE Before loading microcode check what make of drive you have in the Vendor field of the lower pane in the Disk Utility window Table 10 Microcode update files cu4w6001 lod Seagate 4 gigabyte disk drives cu9w6004 lod Seagate 9 gigabyte drives c91p5724 lod Seagate low profile 9 gigabyte drives ibm9G_51 lod IBM 9 gigabyte drives 170 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Relocating and Testing Bad Blocks Relocating and Testing Bad Blocks The reason why bad block errors are reported is usually not because the physical block cluster is damaged Often the reason is because when the system attempts to read a media file and for any reason it cannot read a block it does not retry but simply repeats the last field and m
91. VITC Enable column for the line There is not a limit on the number of VITC lines Click Close to close the Vertical Interval Line Programming dialog box e For serial digital component From the Serial Digital Component Video Output dialog box set the lines where you want VITC in VITC Generator Linel and VITC Generator Line2 Verify VITC Generator Enable is checked If not click to toggle it 38 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Setting the System Timing Setting the System Timing A new factory default PDR 200 PDR300 or PDR400 is configured so that e All outputs are zero timed to the external reference house black e Each input can lock to and record any stable video input whether or not the source is genlocked to an external reference NOTE Serial digital inputs 525 lines on a PDR 100 must be timed manually To adjust system timing y 1 Choose Option System Timing or click the System Timing button on the toolbar The System Timing dialog box appears see Figure 7 which shows an example of how the dialog box looks when the outputs are zero timed by default The red line represents the external reference and the yellow line represents system timing genlock relative to the external reference A hashed box represents a timing window or in other words the range of lines within which the timing is adjusted The external reference represented at the top of the dialog box shows a range from 16 to 1
92. al device and additional setup such as selection of a serial communications port or specifying clip length for BV W type controllers The Comm Port dialog box appears automatically the first time you select a Louth Odetics or BVW controller see Selecting a Communications Port on page 132 NOTE The Controller Manage Archive menu command is available under special circumstances in Louth Automation Contact your Grass Valley Group representative for more information To select a controller 1 Click a panel to make it active 2 Choose Controller Select to open the Controller Setup dialog box Figure 73 3 Select the controller for the channel such as Louth Automation 4 Click OK Controller Setup Panel Control Louth Automation Odetics Broadcast BY YY BYW insert edit Cancel Figure 73 Controller Setup dialog box 3 March 2000 Profile Family 131 F Chapter4 Using VdrPanel Selecting a Communications Port To select a serial communications port for an external controller 1 Click a panel to make it active NOTE Other than for Panel Control the Comm Port dialog box appears automatically the first time you select a controller 2 Choose Controller Comm Port to open the Comm Port dialog box An example of this dialog box is shown in Figure 74 Panel 4 Comm Port EJ Cancel Figure 74 Comm Port dialog box NOTE Ports P1 through P8 are available on the RS 422 Connecto
93. alog Component Video Input Analog Component Video Input You can configure analog component video CAV input with the Analog Component Video Input dialog box The current status indicators shown at the top of the dialog box are Video Present VITC Present and Auto Timed The green light indicates that a particular status is on These indicators cannot be edited To configure analog component video input 1 Select Video Input from the configuration tree and then click or double click an analog component input from the list such as CAV InA J9 The Analog Component Video Input CAV dialog box Figure 18 Analog Component ideo Input J9 CA In4 J9 Overwvritable video Standard 525 Video Standard Video VITO Auto C 625 Video Standard Present Present Timed oo CAN InA J9 M Enable Auto Timing i Enable Dither 10 to 6 bitvideo ITC CAVA JVITC M Vertical blanking VITC Reader Setting select Video Input Format C GER C SMPTE EBL NIO C Betacam C Betacam w o Setup M Automatic ITE detect a Betacam w o Setup Non EBU C W E amp W Ewo Setup _ __ m0 Defaut Close Urda Hep Figure 18 Component Analog Video Input dialog box CAV 2 If you prefer enter the new name in the Name box For example if the signal is a Betacam input you could rename it to Betacam_ The VITC name window title bar name and the configuration tree name automatically c
94. and Time Delay 3 March 2000 Resource Manager 6010278 Be Channel 4 Name Type Add Channel Channel A Player Recorder Remove Channel Channel 4 Add Track Delete Track eI Configuration for Wideo Track 1 MPEG Encoder Decoder Video Quality Any Ary Medium 15 Mb s Video Input Video Output s None gt aL ORE Advanced C S015 C SDI Cutlw15 EET TI Monitor Cut amp J6 a Cancel Apply Help Figure 145 Resource Manager dialog box Profile Family 257 258 The channel resources that you can configure with Resource Manager include F Chapter 10 Using the Resource Manager Video inputs and outputs Video codecs JPEG DVCPRO 25 and DVCPRO 50 Audio inputs and outputs Timecode sources inputs and outputs Timecode codecs Operational settings include Video quality compression Field dominance Still play mode Audio window size Timecode generator settings Profile Family 3 March 2000 Configuring Resources Configuring Resources Before you can make use of a Profile application you must allocate Profile resources such as video inputs and outputs for its use These resources are assigned to channels for use by the application Once the resources are allocated they are unavailable for other applications You must manage Profile resources to ensure that each application is able to use the required resources when it needs them To gain ac
95. and passes on change notifications received from each of these machines when other applications such as other instances of Media Manager are running simultaneously While Hardware Communication is initializing Media Manager shows the Hardware Communication Monitor message box If you click the OK button this message box is minimized To connect to a remote Profile machine on your Profile network 1 Choose Add Remove Machine from the File menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click on a machine volume or network icon in the tree pane You can also click the Add Remove Machine button on the toolbar The Add Remove Machine dialog box appears see Figure 43 The label Local appears after the name of the local Profile machine Add Remove Machine Network Host List PROFILES PROFILE 10 Cancel Help Figure 43 Add Remove Machine dialog box 2 To add a remote Profile machine to the network host list click Add The Add Network Host dialog box appears Add Network Host Mew Host Name Cancel Figure 44 Add Network Host dialog box 90 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Connecting to a Remote Machine 3 Enter the name of the machine in the New Host Name box This can be the host name or the machine s IP address such as 128 161 37 138 4 Click OK The new host name is added to the network host list You can click the Add button again to add as many machine names as you want 5 Click OK
96. andle the line level is incremented or decremented by 1 dB clicking on either side of the slider handle changes the line level by 0 5 dB The Level boxes show the current line level If you enter a number directly into a Level box the line level number is rounded to the nearest 0 5 dB 3 To adjust the trim for all channels at once use the Group Fader slider While the Group Fader moves all channels at once it maintains the individual channel differences 4 To mute a channel click the mute button next to the channel name 5 After you have adjusted the line levels click Close or another tab 3 March 2000 Profile Family 15 F Chapter2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager Digital Audio Output You can change the names of the digital audio channels Click Undo if you want to cancel any changes Click Help for context sensitive Help on digital audio output To change a channel name 1 Expand Audio Output and then click one of the Digital Channels to bring up the Digital Audio Output dialog box Figure 35 The channel numbers on the left refer to the physical output connectors on the audio output box Ch 01 and Ch 02 refer to the channel pair on the first connector and Ch 03 and Ch 04 refer to the pair on the second connector and so forth Digital Audio Outputs J12 Outputs 9 12 AE SfEBU Outa J1 2 AE yEBU Gutl 0 J1 2 AES EBU Out Ved AE yEBU Gutl J1 2 v Help Figure 35 Digital Audio Output dialog
97. anel 1 Choose Window Open Panel The Open a Panel dialog box appears Figure 86 Open a Panel E4 k Cancel Figure 86 Open Panel dialog box 2 Select the panel you want to display Panel A through H Only panels that are not currently open appear in the dialog box You can also press Ctrl A through Ctrl H to activate panels A through H 3 Click OK Making a Panel Active To make a panel active such as Panel A do either of the following e Click anywhere inside Panel A if open Or e Choose Window 1 Panel A Panel Control Arranging Panels and Icons If a panel is obscured by another panel you can arrange the panels so that they are all completely visible To arrange the panels in this way e Choose Window Tile Panels If you have minimized the panels you can arrange the icons with e Choose Window Arrange Icons 3 March 2000 Profile Family 151 Y Chapter4 Using VdrPanel Viewing Record Capacity The Record Capacity dialog box shows the amount of recording time remaining on the current media disk volume according to the current compression presets To view the recording capacity 1 Click a panel to make it active 2 Choose Window Record Capacity A message box appears Figure 87 In this instance the message box shows the internal disks labeled ZNT The recording time remaining is represented in Hours Minutes Seconds For more information on compression presets see
98. annel boards Fibre Channel Support You can use Fibre Channel video networking capabilities to move media from one Profile unit directly to another With Media Manager you can use the Fibre Channel connection to transfer media files between machines Ethernet LAN is also required for transferring commands and status information For more information see Chapter 7 Fibre Channel Video Networking Profile Family 3 March 2000 Chapter 2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager The Profile Configuration Manager provides an easy to use interface that streamlines the set up of reference genlock video and audio inputs and outputs system timing and timecode for your Profile video disk recorder The configuration tree allows you to open the specific configuration dialog boxes that control the settings A graphic representation of the Profile rear panel at the bottom of the Configuration Manager window shows which boards are installed The Configuration Manager window appears in Figure 3 Sf Profile Configuration Manager Fille View Option Window Help Q 25 85 54 ntsc gt gal HEH Genlack As LTC Input amp Output H Video Input ni W Video Output og Audio Input 8 Audio Output Toolbar Configuration tree Profile rear panel representation PUDUUEE ODER DEE Audit Mot Mot ro Genlock YA Known Known Codec DiskRec Network DiskRec Known Enown Digital Known Known For Help press F1 2 RS 422 Ref E EN Mot Mo
99. any computer network check with your system administrator for the correct IP addresses to use Ethernet IP Address Set Up To set the TCP IP address for the Ethernet network 1 Login as administrator 2 Choose Start Settings Control Panel or double click the My Computer icon on the Windows NT 4 0 desktop then click Control Panel Double click the Network icon Click TCP IP then Properties Click Specify IP Address For PROFILE1 set the address for example to 192 168 99 1 Click OK Fibre Channel IP Address Set Up You can set up your Fibre Channel network in one of two ways Nn nr Aa o e Through the Fibre Channel dialog box in the Configuration Manager graphical user interface For instructions on how to do this refer to Setting Up Fibre Channel Networking on page 84 e With the feconfig command To set up Fibre Channel with feconfig 1 Open a MS DOS command window and type feconfig followed by Enter The following information is displayed Fibre Channel Network Configuration FC IP Address e e a o e s a me 2h WOE Sert Hardware Address QO TCP UDP checksums Enabled MIRE TCS a ca a ie nw ae Om a ates Se Dasa bed Auto host table administration Enabled F C Switch aoao amp i 4 2 I Disabled 3 March 2000 Profile Family 199 Chapter 7 Fibre Channel Video Networking You must set the IP address the IP subnet mask the hardware address and tu
100. appears You can also drag clips to the empty edit timeline from the current bin 2 Enter the name of the new master in the New Master text box or simply accept the default The default name is always unique 3 Click on the OK button The name of the new empty master appears above the edit timeline Profile Family 3 March 2000 Adding Media to a Master Adding Media to a Master A newly created master is empty You can assemble a master by inserting clips or even other masters into it 1 Click in the edit timeline to make it active 1 Select a clip or master in the current bin 2 Choose Insert from the Media menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click You can also click the Insert Media button on the current bin toolbar 3 The media is loaded onto the edit timeline You can also drag and drop a clip or master onto the edit timeline To drag and drop media to the edit timeline 1 Select a master or clip in the current bin by pressing the left mouse button while the mouse pointer is over the desired clip and hold the button down 2 Drag the master to the edit timeline and release the mouse button 3 Each is inserted into the new master at the closest cursor location After insertion the time cursor automatically moves to the last frame of the new material Playing a Master Now that you have created a new master you can play it or any other master using the edit timeline 1 Select the master you want
101. art Time Duration and Comment A label at the top of each column except Status identifies the settings in that column Choose View Columns to change which columns are displayed See Customizing Your List Display on page 253 This cell displays the current status of the event The word Status does not appear in the header The Status column is active only in the On air List in the Monitor view If there is a conflict between an event and any other event in the current list or another event on the On air List the Status cell displays Error You can identify the conflict by right clicking on the cell and reading the error message in the Event Property dialog box Table 14 shows all the event status indicators Table 14 Event status indicators Status Color Description OO Giesen een e e ae event is The event is currently being executed being executed Record Green The audio and video S the specified input is currently being recorded as the Destination clip name 3 March 2000 Changing Event Settings Table 14 Event status indicators ais oor oecipion Error The signal is in conflict with another event or the material is not available The event is stopped Cued Yellow Approximately five seconds before Start Time the required resources are prepared for playback or recording Event is about to be executed Name This cell identifies the clip or master name whether it is being played or whether
102. ations until you change the configuration again To configure DVCPRO codecs for use as DVCPRO 25 or DVCPRO 50 codecs 1 Close all your Profile applications 1 Start Configuration Manager and choose Option DVCPRO Codec Configuration 2 Select the desired combination of DVCPRO 25 and DVCPRO 50 codecs for your application DYCPRO Codec Configuration EJ Select a codec configuration C E DYCPRO 25 codecs 0 DYCPRO 50 codecs C 4DVCPRO 25 codecs 1 DYCPRO 50 codec f 2DVCPRO 25 codecs 2 DYCPRO 50 codecs C ODVCPRO 25 codecs 3 DYVCPRO 50 codecs Cancel Figure 11 DVCPRO codec configuration selection 3 Select the desired number of DVCPRO 25 and DVCPRO 50 codecs DVCPRO 50 codecs are created using pairs of DVCPRO 25 codecs in ascending order The first DVCPRO 50 codec uses DVCPRO 25 codecs 1 and 2 the second 3 and 4 and so on 4 Click OK for your selection to take effect You do not need to restart your system to change DVCPRO codec configurations However the configuration change will not take effect until you close all of your Profile applications and restart them Profile Family 3 March 2000 Video Input Video Input You may have analog composite component analog CAV or serial digital component video inputs installed in your Profile system The steps to configure video inputs follow Analog Composite Video Input The indicators at the top of the dialog box show the current status of the analog composite vid
103. ave failed to program power down the Profile unit completely power it up again and then run the program again otherwise just restart the Profile 7 After the program runs successfully restart your disk recorder so the changes can take effect 3 March 2000 Profile Family 193 Chapter6 Using Profile Utilities Updating Fibre Channel Microcode From time to time it may be necessary to reprogram microcode on your Fibre Channel board Updating the microcode ensures that software and hardware will properly function together NOTE You should update your Fibre Channel Microcode whenever you install a new version of Profile System Software on your Profile system This release provides two versions of Fibre Channel board microcode You must choose which one to use depending on your environment The two versions are Loop compatible This version is loaded on your Fibre Channel board at the factory Use this microcode with Fibre Channel hubs when your Video Network includes only Profile Systems and SGI Fibre Channel Servers You can reload this microcode with the FC Loop mode Microcode icon in the Profile Debug Tools folder Switch compatible Use the FC Switch mode Microcode to load this version of microcode onto your Fibre Channel board if you are connecting your Profile system to a Fibre Channel Switch In addition you must set switch mode on with the fcconfig s on command or with the appropriate check box in Configuration Manage
104. bes how to launch TimeDelay describes the TimeDelay project file and describes how to use Resource Manager to configure TimeDelay channels e Starting the TimeDelay Process explains how to start the TimeDelay process either manually or automatically and provides instructions for and details about the various settings you need to make e Using the Interface this is a reference section that describes each of the controls in the Record and Playback panels and each of the menu items in the File View and Config menus 3 March 2000 Profile Family 2 7 da Chapter ll Using TimeDelay Getting Started with TimeDelay Here are two different methods that you can use to launch TimeDelay e Double click on the TimeDelay shortcut icon on the desktop When the TimeDelay window appears you can use the default settings that include one record and one playback panel see Figure 166 e Double click on a TimeDelay project file tdx This launches TimeDelay using the configuration saved in the file NOTE TimeDelay uses the standard Windows NT interface For help with Windows NT interaction refer to Microsoft NT manuals To exit TimeDelay e Choose File Quit s Untitled Project TimeDelay File View Config Help Recorder Buffer Size 01 36 09 25 3 Al Stop 00 00 00 00 J Record Pay Fat Coa Piayer 7 Playout Delay 00 00 05 00 00 00 00 00 p i Pav EaAat a FS Figure 166 TimeDelay window Wor
105. box and enter the new play event in the list Profile Family Hew Play Event Clip Name A Start Lime 1437 46 11 Duration 05 45 34 28 Type Absolute start Date 171771938 Comment Eventi Repeat Hour s Minutes f None Evey f jo S C Hourly fio Brdiinete Tine Daily End Date Weekly End Time Cancel Figure 135 Creating a play event 3 March 2000 Scheduling Recording Operations Scheduling Recording Operations You can schedule recording operations to take place automatically at predetermined times For example you may want to record a satellite feed during off hours Scheduling a recording operation is just as simple as a playback 1 Open the list to which you are adding the recording event 2 Choose File New Event Record to open the New Record Event dialog box as shown in Figure 136 Hew Record Event Clip Name A Start Lime 4421717 Duration 05 45 34 2 Type Absolute Start Date 171771998 Comment Eventi Repeat Hour s Minutes None Every fo a fo C Hourly no end iste iime Daily End Date C Weekly End Time Cancel Figure 136 Creating a record event 3 In the New Record Event dialog box enter all the event information as described in Changing Event Settings on page 238 The clip is stored in the default bin with the name you enter in the Clip Name box 4 Click OK 3 March 2000 Profile Family 243 da Chapter9 Using the L
106. box appears Drive INTI detault sz Hename magma Nuance Richter Tidal Yawe volcano To lIntuition OK Cancel Figure 91 Rename Video Clip dialog box 2 If the clip you want to rename is in a different list select it from the Drive box 3 Select a clip from the Rename box The clip name appears in the To box 4 Edit the current name or delete the name and enter a new one Clip names can have up to 32 characters Spaces and uppercase characters are acceptable however uppercase and lowercase characters will not distiguish clip names 5 Click OK 3 March 2000 Profile Family 157 Y Chapter4 Using VdrPanel Setting Clip Protection To set clip read only protection 1 Choose VideoClip Set Clip Protection and the Set Clip Protection dialog box appears Set Clip Protection x Drive INTydefauyy Play Record Play only Figure 92 Set Clip Protection dialog box 2 If the clip you want to protect is in a different list select it from the Drive box 3 To protect a clip select a clip in the Play Record box and then click Protected The clip is now protected as read only 4 To unprotect or unlock a clip select a clip in the Read Only box and then click Unprotected The clip is no longer protected 5 Click OK 158 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Striping a Clip Striping a Clip Striping timecode with VdrPanel allows you to complete a striping process faster than real ti
107. boxes appear see Figure 160 2 Choose one of the eight timecode codecs or None Resource Manager 6010278 35 Channel A 5 Channel E Name Type Add Channel Channel A Flayer A ecorder z Remove Channel Channel Ely Video RW Track 1 MPEG El Audio i Track 1 l a Track 2 Timecode AH Track Delete Track Configuration for Timecode Track 1 Timecode Codec None gt D Ary TC Rec 1 TC Ree 2 TC Ree 3 ae C TC Ree 6 L TC Rec 7 F Crosspoints Cancel Apply Help Figure 160 Timecode Codec check boxes 3 March 2000 Profile Family 273 da Chapter 10 Using the Resource Manager Timecode Generator Settings If you have selected Internal Generator as your timecode input there are several other settings that you can make to the timecode generator To change timecode generator settings 1 With a timecode Track selected in the configuration tree click the TC Generator button The timecode generator panel appears see Figure 161 The controls are dimmed except when Internal Generator is the timecode input Resource Manager B010278 Era Channel A 5 Channel E Name Type Add Channel Channel A Player Recorder x Remove Channel Channel 4 Ely Video ARAL Track 1 MPEG Audio taf Track 1 3 Gi Track 2 Timecode es AH Track Delete Track Configuration for Timecode Track 1 Time
108. c 02 video input 03 video output 04 LTC input 05 VITC input 06 timecode generator 07 LTC output 08 VITC output 09 timecode recorder 10 audio output 11 video combiner mix effect 12 MPEG encoder 13 MPEG decoder 14 audio input 15 DVCPRO 25 codec 3 March 2000 Profile Family 181 F Chapter6 Using Profile Utilities 16 DVCPRO 50 codec 182 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Manually Editing a Configuration File e Column 3 separator e Column 4 5 resource number This specifies which resource of the specified type is desired Resources of a given type are numbered starting at 0 To select the third timecode recorder specify 02 in columns 4 5 For inputs and outputs spread across multiple cards devices are scanned along the Profile EISA bus starting at slot 0 Viewed from the back of the Profile system numbers increment from right to left In a Profile system with two Serial Digital I O cards video input 00 represents the upper BNC connector on the rightmost Serial Digital card while video input 03 represents the second BNC connector on the leftmost Serial Digital card In Profile systems with a mix of video I O cards the video cards are scanned in the following order Serial Digital Component Serial Digital Component with Embedded Audio Component Analog Composite Analog Serial Digital Composite For example in a Profile system with two Serial Digital Component cards and one
109. c winnt system32 drivers etc hosts file will now be automatically administered by fences To update your hosts file manually 1 Open the file in Notepad The format is simple First type the Ethernet IP address followed by the machine name such as PROFILE1 On the next line type the IP address of the Fibre Channel board in that Profile unit then the machine name again and add the characters _fc0 Here is an example LOZ WOO 699 4 PROF TLE T92 kG 4 LOO J PROFILEI fc0 IB ed ok ge be re PROF ILE2 19221666100 2 PROF ILE2Z_ fc0 2 Add these lines to the hosts file and remove any other lines which might conflict with them All lines beginning with a are comments and can be ignored The hosts file will look something like this Copyright c 1993 1995 Microsoft Corp This is a sample HOSTS file used by Microsoft TCP IP for Windows NT This file contains the mappings of IP addresses to host names Each entry should be kept on an individual line The IP address should be placed in the first column followed by the corresponding host name The IP address and the host name should be separated by at least one space Additionally comments such as these may be inserted on individual lines or following the machine name denoted by a symbol For example 102 54 94 97 rhino acme com source server 38 25 63 10 x acme com x client host 192 168 99 1 PROFILE1 192 168 100 1 PROFILE1_f
110. c0 192 168 99 2 PROFILE2 192 168 100 2 PROFILE2 fc0 3 Save the file in Notepad and exit 4 Reboot your Profile unit 5 Copy the new hosts file onto the other machine to save you editing it again 202 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Testing the Fibre Channel Network Testing the Fibre Channel Network Once both Profile machines are back up and running 1 3 Double click on the Port Server icon This starts the Fibre Channel communication tool It must always be running on any machine where you are using Fibre Channel If you want you can place Port Server in StartUp folder and set it to run minimized Make sure its running on the other Profile machine too After configuring all machines verify name resolution using feping by typing fcping PROFILE1_fc0 If this command returns Host PROFILE1_fc0 is up You have successfully resolved the name PROFILE1_fc0 to the IP address 192 168 100 1 Keep in mind that although this verifies name resolution it does not test Fibre Channel connectivity If however the feping command returns Host PROFILE1_fc0O appears unreachable The Fibre Channel IP address could not resolve properly You may want to reboot to ensure that any changes have taken effect or check your spelling Now start the Media Manager by double clicking its icon You only need to run Media Manager when you want to manually copy clips from one machine to another but the Port Server needs to be run at all ti
111. cal attributes of the link as well as how the information is transmitted along it A to D Analog to digital converter An electronic component that converts incoming analog signals into its digital representation Analog video Video represented as a continuously variable electrical signal Consumer TV and domestic VCRs are analog video devices Analog video can be converted to digital format to be stored and manipulated by computer or other digital devices Archive library The archive library is an automated tape storage device used to supplement a machine s disk storage The library consists of digital tape cartridges and in some cases robot that moves cartridges to and from tape transports ASPB Audio signal processing board An audio board on the PDR 200 that provides 16 channels of analog embedded digital and AES EBU digital audio You can install up to two ASPBs in a PDR200 for 32 channels of audio Assemble record mode Video and all audio tracks assigned to a machine are recorded simultaneously along with timecode and any previous contents are overwritten Traditionally this mode is used when appending to a master tape that has not had black timecode and control track previously recorded before editing Audio I O The audio path through the Profile video disk recorder especially the crosspoint circuitry that routes the audio within the Profile system Auto Start A feature that lets you enter a timecode and
112. cal machine to any remote Profile machine in your network A local Profile machine refers to a Profile system to which you are directly attached A remote Profile machine refers to a Profile system that is connected to your local system via an Ethernet local area network LAN To connect to a remote Profile machine 1 Choose File Remote Machine The Connect to Machine dialog box appears The label Local appears after the name of the local Profile machine Connect to Machine Machine name PROFILE a Local PROFILE SfLocal Cancel PROFILES _ Cmca PROFILE TO Figure 132 Remote Machine dialog box To connect a Profile machine from the network host list 1 Select the name of the machine in list box 2 Click Connect 3 The Connecting to Machine dialog box is displayed If the connection is unsuccessful you are given the opportunity to retry the connection or to cancel the operation NOTE To add a Profile machine to the network host list see Connecting to a Remote Machine on page 90 3 March 2000 Profile Family 235 Chapter9 Using the List Manager Building a Playback List List Manager lets you use a simple graphical interface to build lists that automate your operations You can drag media from the Media Manager into your list then define things like when to play the material and what channel and output to use Drag and drop of incompatible clips is not allowed There are five types of channels JPE
113. cally in a fabric environment Once you ve installed the required version of Profile System Software and loaded the appropriate microcode and drivers on all the devices you are connecting to the switch you must configure each device for operation in a Fibre Channel fabric environment To configure your Fibre Channel server or any device other than your Profile system refer to the installation manual for that device for instructions 3 March 2000 Profile Family 201 F Chapter 7 Fibre Channel Video Networking Editing the Hosts File The next step is to edit the file c winnt system32 drivers etc hosts This file tells the Profile system what IP address is associated with what Profile unit If you enter in all the Profile units IP addresses that are on your network then the same file can be copied onto all the other Profile units This saves you editing each Profile s individual hosts file You can also use a DNS server for name lookup however instructions for using such a server are outside the scope of this manual An alternative to editing the hosts file is to use the PDR Network Configuration service fencs to automatically update and maintain the hosts file For more information on fencs see The PDR Network Configuration Service on page 205 If you want to use fencs to automatically update your hosts file you must enable auto host table administration by entering the command fceconfig hta on followed by Enter Your
114. canatsteuatndasueaedshivnsctncsducamdiessdesasiavencssuecsenns 177 108 The main Profile Protocol Resources dialog DOX cccccesseeeeeeseeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeaeeees 179 109 Setting JPEG compression igeccscncesaccecetchdacecumnccdarasanddeceresantaddedesucdantacsoedaanntbensadecasts 180 110 Ponowne WNdOW csin E A 190 111 Services dialog bOX sais ceceiscemeadecnsda smedeeneesanceddnmedapiaddataieesedadiedanbegdetanente ocetaamddearecenueds 191 112 Update Firmware Window ccccssscsceceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeesaueeeesseseeesssanees 192 113 The Update FC Microcode window cccccseceeceseseeeeeeeeseeeeeeueeeeeeaaeeeeeseeneeeeesanees 195 10 Profile Family 3 March 2000 3 March 2000 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 TOOLBOX EGiItOr VOO ei eee el i ee eh ee oe e yl ee 208 Hardware Communication message DOX ccccececesseeeeececeeeeeeeeeeeseeauseeeeeesaeaneeeees 209 Remote Machine dialog DOX ssiscesestoeeede hee naseatieeseweleeeedlsiatiewse eis wee 211 GA df gh lo ae di splay Aen ener eee mnie cme ere ee ne ren eee eee eer 212 Properties dialog DOX cesarenc nna EE E E E cea Seuss 214 Capture Mene irienner A E A 216 Timecode entry WINdOW cccccceceece
115. cccsesseeceesseeceesueeeceaueeseeseeaeeesssgeeeeseaeeeeessasseessageees 214 Deleng Medid seeen eE E pies asoue neces A 215 EmMptYNg Me Recycle BIN eree ERE 215 The Capture Timeline ae asses cacancecesscce aster saacpisenasaoee ansescacee dodnsaasetasenedessnataesavesaler sass sbesenetenies 216 Capturing a New a acter eee ed ea deed de ped asic ete dase SREE 217 LOOD RECON eoira E a R a ee RERE 219 PI O GD ee E E S 219 ea a a E a E S nan aren ane 220 Creating a SUDCID scssrrncenns iinne peiie a NE EE i 220 Usera R a E ey ee nen eee eer erer 221 Event arid Frame COMUOIS sinc cocccsses cs iosesteeeeeacandeasesheoeiesstceewmeesteeawdesieldidedessaiedeeeee 222 SLU A OM Sic Sete eee tec ge es dese a ts decedent dein A selene eee 222 Creating Subclips on the Fly xcc0 50 cecascecensosserene cose sactecnoengaesueece cbaeesenercbeasetssnedes senosacceods 222 TEETHING aio e a T EEA OA T A 223 Creating a New Master nnannnnnnnnaennnneesnnnnnnerrrrrnrrsssrnrrnrrssrnnrenrrnrrnrrrssnnnrrrrresrnrrenne 224 Adding Media to a Master cccccceseeececnseeeeceeeeeeeeesueeeeesuaaseeecsauseeeeseaeseeessaseeessaasees 225 Paymo a NaSO enera E EE EE A 225 Using Ne Adio COniTOlS clases sa ceertnties cos sieeterd eee dics ee hesitate des cesarean eos oats 226 Tool Box Editor Keyboard Shortcuts cccccecccceceeceeeseeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeesaaeeeeseeeeaaaees 228 Using the List Manager List Manager Overview secu le2hccedasicdtcsiestindid Macc
116. cess to Resource Manager and configure Profile resources e In Tool Box Editor choose Config Resources e In List Manager choose Project Configure e In TimeDelay choose Config Resource Manager The Resource Manager is available when an application is running unless media is loaded on a timeline Assigning Profile Channels Your first step is to acquire one or more Profile channels The single channel tab labeled Channel A is the default You can change the name of the channel by entering a new name in the Name text box Channel names can have up to 32 characters but a shorter name is recommended for readability Depending on your system you can configure channels up to a limit set by the application however some systems only have two channels To add a channel click the Add Channel button To remove a channel click the Remove Channel button One channel is always visible A resource such as a video input is available when the checkbox next to its name is empty and its name is in dark print If the resource is in use its name is dimmed If it 1s in conflict that is in use by another application or channel its name appears in red If it is requested the checkbox next to its name is marked Configuring Video Resources To configure video resources 1 Choose a video track in the configuration tree such as Track 1 MPEG 2 Choose an appropriate channel type Player Recorder Player or Recorder see Figure 146 Dependi
117. ck video channels the number of channels available varies depending on the storage method Clips are available on all channels at once so you can play a clip on more than one channel at the same time without making a copy of it Since each channel is independent of the others each playback can start at a different time and at a different place in the clip You can even start playing aclip while it s still being recorded Just start capturing the clip on one channel wait about five seconds and then play the clip back on another channel This kind of control makes the Profile system an ideal solution if you want to go to air with a clip before you are finished recording it NOTE Profile System Software version 3 X supports the PDR 200 equipped with optional DVCPRO bards and PDR 400 systems Version 3 X runs on Microsoft Windows NT 4 0 This version of system software offers support for the DVCPRO codec boards which are standard in the PDR400 and can be optionally installed in the PDR 200 Upgrading your PDR200 with DVCPRO provides compatibility with other DVCPRO equipment DVCPRO is a compression method similar to JPEG but uses fixed data rates of either 25 Mb s or 50 Mb s 3 March 2000 Profile Family 19 F Chapter 1 Introducing the Profile Family Table 1 compares the capabilities of the PDR 100 PDR 200 300 and PDR 200 400 The optional products supported by these disk recorders are listed here e MPEG encoder decode
118. code Generator Starting YW alue any 00 O0 00 00 Generator Mode Format f Fixed Time M Drop Frame Time of Day Cancel Apply Help Figure 161 Timecode generator controls 2 Choose a generator mode You can start timecode using a fixed time or the time of day Click Time of Day to use the Windows NT clock or click Fixed Time to set a timecode value under Starting Value 3 If you selected fixed time you can use the default of 00 00 00 00 Hours Minutes Seconds Frames under Starting Value or set a new fixed starting time This setting takes effect the next time you click the Record button NOTE The Drop Frame control is hidden if your Profile system is configured for PAL video Refer to Video Input on page 47 for information about configuring the Profile system for PAL video 4 To choose drop frame click on the Drop Frame check box To compensate for the 29 97 frame rate in NTSC drop frame timecode synchronizes the rate with elapsed time Drop frame timecode drops two frames per minute except on the tenth minute PAL on the other hand has a constant rate of 25 frames per second and never requires drop frame timecode 274 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Resolving Resource Conflicts Resolving Resource Conflicts Resource conflicts occur when you attempt to allocate a resource that is already in use either by the application you are working with or by another application To resolve a conflict you must e
119. conflict with any other item at the selected location The new name is based on the old name with the addition of a number source becomes source_ When you are copying clips to a volume other than the source volume on a Profile system or an library system Paste Special is available as an option on the Edit and right click shortcut menus NOTE It is possible to play clips or masters with VdrPanel or Tool Box Editor while they are being copied over Fibre Channel To copy a bin 1 In either the tree pane or the contents pane select a bin 2 Choose Copy from the Edit menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click You can also click the Copy button on the toolbar 3 Select another bin into which you want to paste the first bin s contents The selected location may even be in another Media Manager window If both the source and the destination locations reside on machines connected to the Fibre Channel network you may copy between machines 4 Choose Paste from the Edit menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click You can also click the Paste button on the toolbar The bin may be pasted into the same bin it was copied from In this case the bin is automatically renamed Media Manager automatically suggests a new name that does not conflict with any other item at the selected location The new name is based on the old name with the addition of a number source becomes source_ NOTE Copying a bin means that all clips and master
120. connections 1 4 02 00 S i 03 00 a 01 00 100000 kop Ol 02 ED lee 02 035 CD Ty 03 02 CS IK 00 00 ce 00 01 EA 00 02 ae 00 03 I 10 00 El 10 01 10 02 L1 10 03 Ei index 4 audio codecs index 5 audio codecs index 6 audio codecs index 7 audio codecs index 8 audio outputs 1 4 index 9 index 10 index 11 now do the LTC to recorder 1 ff indes 12 LIC npu re andes L LIC eutput index 14 tcRecorder 4 00 25 O7 00 09 00 ede L2 14 CD LA loyCs manually add these lines to add a second Jpeg Codec O2200 75 03 021 Ol 0L 100000 LOH LopeD DSL CD TLCS 3 March 2000 i T E IT index 15 video input 0 shared index 16 video output 1 index 17 video codec 1 at 100KB Default connect index15 gt indexl6 vid in gt vid out Default connect video input gt video codec Schedule connect video codec gt video output Profile Family 187 Assigning a DVCPRO Codec F Chapter6 Using Profile Utilities This example assigns a DVCPRO codec rather than a JPEG codec It also illustrates how to assign both LTC and VITC timecode resources for a channel The sample file is supplied as dvcpro25 cfg in the c Profile configs directory on the Profile system drive ii f4 fd d Sample Config File for a DVCPRO Decoder first do the video system format format format format col 7 is 2 digit base 10 numbers AX Le Tonel runc Starting col
121. corder are considered media Media is stored on disk as media files Audio and video clips do not contain media but instead reference positions in a media file Memory A component of a computer system used for virtually instantaneous temporary storage and retrieval of information data or instructions programs Information in memory is volatile and is lost when the computer is shut down Storing information on a permanent storage device such as a hard disk or a tape allows for retrieval during another work session Menu A list of commands or functions that you select with a pointer A menu is normally displayed in a small window Monitor Two channel audio output of selected machine tracks Generally audio systems or video displays used in a studio environment to control quality Also a video display device without audio capabilities Mouse An input device that when moved across a flat surface causes the pointer to move across a screen The mouse usually has buttons that you press to send signals These signals in turn accomplish certain functions The representation of the mouse on the screen is called the pointer See Pointer MPEG MPEG Moving Picture Experts Group is a set of standards used for compressing digital video and audio MPEG uses compression methods that maintain high quality while requiring smaller bandwidths to transport video and audio streams Profile Family 303 Y Glossary NTSC The sta
122. cs are arranged in pairs each of which can be used as a single DVCPRO 50 codec Because of this paired codec architecture some restrictions apply to DVCPRO codecs which require the following system timing limitations 1 You must supply a Reference In signal house black to the Profile system 2 All video signals that you want to record with a DVCPRO codec must be synchronous with the Reference In signal 3 If you want to use DVCPRO 25 codecs as independent codecs all of your video inputs must be auto timed to the Reference input In Configuration Manager select Enable Auto Timing for each input You must ensure that each input actually auto times by checking that the Auto Timed indicator in the Video Input dialog box is lit 4 If you are unable to auto time an input or if you wish to use DVCPRO codecs for BV W Insert Edit operations you may use only one of the codecs from each pair Codec 1 Codec 3 and Codec 3 Note that the second DVCPRO codec from each pair must not be used for recording or playback Setting the Reference Genlock The Reference Genlock dialog box sets the genlock parameters for VITC reader settings and internal reference timing At the top of the dialog box the status indicators display the current status of the genlock input Locked to External Reference Internal Clock Locked and VITC Present A green light indicates that a particular status is on These indicators cannot be edited To change the reference g
123. ct your domain or local computer name from the list Click OK or press Enter NOTE If a log in error message appears and all the information is correct try deleting the password and clicking OK Profile Family 27 Y Chapter 1 Introducing the Profile Family Starting and Closing Profile Applications After logging into your Profile system you see shortcut icons for the Profile applications on the Windows NT 4 0 desktop Figure 2 PDR Application shortcuts on the Windows NT 4 0 desktop 28 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Starting an Application Starting an Application To start a Profile application VdrPanel in these examples using Windows NT 4 0 e Double click the shortcut icon on the Windows NT desktop Or e Choose Start VdrPanel Or e Choose Start Programs PDR Applications VdrPanel Viewing Help To view the Help for an application e Choose Help Help Topics Or e Click the Help button in a dialog box or a toolbar if available To view version information for VdrPanel in this example e Choose Help About VdrPanel Closing an Application To close Profile applications e Choose File Quit File Exit or click the Close button Profile Applications The following sections provide a brief overview of the standard and optional Profile applications Please refer to the appropriate chapter in this manual for more information about each application Profile Configuration Manager
124. cted the Audio Input and Output check boxes appear at the bottom of the Resource Manager dialog box see Figure 155 Resource Manager PROFILE S12 Be Channel 4 Name Type Add Channel Channel A Player Recorder ad Remove Channel Channel 4 5 Timecode iets fH Track 1 Delete Track Configuration for Audio Track 1 Audio Codec audio 1 Audio Input Audio Output s None gt Cx AES EBU In2J5 AES EBU In3J5 AES EBU In4J5 H AES EBU Out4 J5 TAES EBU In5 J5 TAES EBU Out5 J5 EI Crosspoints Cancel Apply Help Figure 155 Audio inputs and outputs 2 To add an audio track click the Add Track button In the Add Track dialog box that appears see Figure 156 click Audio then enter the number of tracks you want to add Click Add when done The new audio track icons will appear in the configuration tree 268 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Configuring Audio Resources Add Track Figure 156 Add Track dialog box for audio 3 For each audio track choose an audio input or audio output by selecting a check box in the appropriate list 3 March 2000 Profile Family 269 Y Chapter 10 Using the Resource Manager Audio Window Setup The audio window is a segment of audio that is heard when you move through a clip at higher than play speed You can specify the size of the window and thus the amount of the audio that you hear by selecting a number of fields
125. cted items and copies them onto the clipboard Use Paste to put them in the new location 4 Copy Copies the selected items to the clipboard Use Paste to put them in the new location ite Paste Inserts the items you have copied or cut into the selected location Delete Deletes the selected items el x Properties Displays the properties of the selected item 94 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Copying Media Copying Media To copy one or more clips or masters 1 In the contents pane select a clip or master To extend the selection press Shift Up Arrow or Shift Down Arrow Choose Edit Select All or Ctrl A to select all the media in the contents pane 2 Choose Copy from the Edit menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click You can also click the Copy button on the toolbar 3 Select the location where you want to paste the item This can be another bin or anywhere in the contents pane when a bin is selected The selected location may even be in another Media Manager window If both the source and the destination locations reside on machines connected to the Fibre Channel network you may copy between machines 4 Choose Paste from the Edit menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click You can also click the Paste button on the toolbar A clip may be pasted into the same bin it was copied from In this case the clip is automatically renamed Media Manager automatically suggests a new name that does not
126. cting How to Display Timecode on a Panel cccecseseeeceeeeeeeeeaeeeseessaeeeeseeageesens 142 Setting Timecode Crosspo ME inrnsneinen sirar e e ara ice 144 Setting Drop Frame Timecode cccccsccececceceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeesseeeeeeseeaeseseeeesaeaaeesees 146 Panek SAS ICS aoi a acta a a a a tans aa 147 Opening A Pane lansis n a E e a aae dee a qaskiSeadadees 151 WAKING Panel ACV G iain dies as sieeve conceausnwestbaramednadbosneneddaadzet ne ceo A E A E 151 Arranging Fane And CONS ense EE E a aaeauameaaes 151 Viewing Record Capaci onres cede octet T setedousacbiaes 152 Viewing an Audio Monitor for a Panel ccccccsececesseeeceeeecessseeceeeeeeasseesseeeessnseensaees 152 JSN ODS iniae a 154 Deining a New ODi N A aes 154 Name ODS FINS ara a a ca tea etre later sauna tanta Gas 154 Record Ops FINS erinrar A a alco aehe E E E N E 155 Loading and Playing a CID mesere anaana a a Aaa rO aa A A GE ORAE NiE 156 Renaming a Clipse a a E 157 Setting Cip Protection serrer a a AELA eid ce ATE 158 rd a F aein a eee a es Pe 159 Setting Long or Short Clip NAMES cccccccecesseeeeeeeceeeaeeceeeeseeeeseeeeeseeaeseeeeeesaeaneseees 159 E jecing A Gr sparen a ee ee on oO eee 159 DGICUMG a GINO Saco a Sirase a E OEE 2 Gacebnad est ccetnescnesaeadaneeedes 160 CI NS 1S sicegs crust pane c ehcuerl eee a a 161 Saving d Group Of Clips ia GID LIST ete ase cess a N 161 Play no a OIP LIS Coen esses r CR ee Oe e e
127. cut menu with a right click You can also click the Paste button on the toolbar If there is a clip with the same name in the bin where you want to restore it you are prompted to change the name or cancel the operation To restore a clip using the drag and drop method 1 In the tree pane click the cartridge icon you want to restore a clip from This expands the tree pane to reveal the partition icon or icons 2 Click the partition in the tree pane that you want to restore from to reveal the clips in the contents pane 3 In the contents pane click on the clip icon or icons you want to restore hold the left mouse button and drag it to the bin icon in the tree pane where you want to restore the clip 4 If you want to check on the progress of a restore operation click on the Profile logo or choose Tools Transfer Monitor to view the Transfer Monitor 3 March 2000 Profile Family 113 114 Chapter 3 Using Media Manager Renaming an Archived Clip A clip can have a name up to 32 characters long Spaces are legal characters but count for two characters Colons and slashes are illegal in clip names Tildes are only illegal as a first character in a clip name To rename an archived clip 1 In the tree pane select the library cartridge and partition where the archived clip is stored 2 In the contents pane select the archived clip you want to rename 3 Choose Rename from the File menu or from the sho
128. d Tidal Wawe wolcano Cancel Figure 94 Delete Clip dialog box 2 If the clip you want to delete is on a different drive select it in the Drive box 3 Select the clip or clips you want to delete 4 Click OK when complete A message box appears telling you which file is being deleted 160 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Clip Lists Clip Lists You can save and organize clips into lists also called groups You can load a saved group of clips You can also save an existing group of clips under a different name You can also create and later edit a list of clips Saving a Group of Clips in a Clip List A clip list can be saved and loaded later To save a clip list as a group 1 Click within the specific Panel dialog box to select the panel where the clip list is currently displayed 2 Choose File Save Group of Clips and the current list of clips as shown in the Clips box is saved in the current group grp If the clips have not been saved in a group previously the Save Group of Clips dialog box appears Save Group of Clips Save Ih awl profile 5 Seismic grp Save as type Groups of Clips Cancel Figure 95 Save Group of Clips dialog box 3 If you have not already saved the group choose File Save Group of Clips As The Save As command enables you assign a different name to an already named group of clips preserving the contents of the original group The saved group can be loa
129. d be but are not required to be unique 4 Click the OK button When you close the Resource Manager dialog box the panel corresponding to the renamed channel displays the new name in the TimeDelay window This name is saved with other resource information in the TimeDelay project file Modifying a Channel s Configuration While the details of resource configuration are generally covered in Using the Resource Manager on page 257 TimeDelay imposes some unique restrictions when using Resource Manager to configure channels These unique restrictions are described here e Since playback channels share source material with the record channel they must have similar configurations They should have the same number of video audio and timecode tracks and must have the same video compression format You cannot mix DVCPRO and JPEG resources in the same TimeDelay project e Record and playback channels should always have at least one timecode track e The record channel should always use a valid timecode input This input may come from an external VITC or LTC source or may simply be a Profile timecode generator Timecode display and the Auto Start feature are affected if the connected VITC or LTC source does not provide valid timecode e When configuring playback channels which only play material you do not need to select input resources for video audio and timecode tracks Handling Resource Allocation Errors Resource conflicts
130. d the same code are given access to proceed The c profile profile log file tracks all messages from the video processor The state of the video processor is periodically checked If the processor does not respond an administrator alert is generated The event is logged to the Windows NT Event log The Event log can be viewed with the Event Viewer application PDR Access Control is automatically installed and started as part of the installation process and is restarted every time the system is rebooted This procedure is provided in the unlikely event that you need to start the service manually 1 Log in as administrator 2 Double click My Computer on the desktop 3 Double click the Control Panel icon 4 Double click the Services icon The Services dialog box appears Figure 111 Services Service Status Startup Close Network DOE DSDM Manual Norton SpeedDisk Started Automatic Start Norton Unerase Protection Started Automatic NT LM Security Support Provider Manual Stop POR Access Control Started Automatic Plug and Play Started Automatic Pausa Remote Procedure Call RPC Locator Started Manual mE Remote Procedure Call AFC Serice Started Automatic Schedule Manual T Server Started Automatic Hi Profiles Startup Parameters Help PMELLL Figure 111 Services dialog box 5 Select PDR Access Control from the list of services You may have to scroll the list box 6 Click Start to s
131. date FC microcode This program will re flash the microcode in the Genroco card Hit C to exit at any time Checking microcode version in Fibre Channel card gfc Loaded microcode version is 1 7 3 Mew microcode version from file gfcucode img is 1 7 3 Transferring microcode to Enhanced Disk Recorder master gt a Requesting Enhanced Disk Recorder Cmaster gt to flash new microcode Mew microcode installed successfully JEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE You must now reboot your system for changes to take effect ca SE E E E E E E E E E Press Enter to continue _ Figure 113 The Update FC Microcode window 3 March 2000 Profile Family 195 F Chapter6 Using Profile Utilities 196 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Chapter r4 Fibre Channel Video Networking With Fibre Channel you can copy and move media between a network of Profile systems at faster than real time To transfer data across Fibre Channel the Profile system needs both the Ethernet and Fibre Channel networks to communicate The Ethernet local area network LAN carries commands between Profile disk recorders and the Fibre Channel connections send raw video data Both networks use TCP IP Transfer Control Protocol Internet Protocol Because of this communication scheme you must set up separate IP addresses for each network In the example that follows you will connect two Profile units together configure them and run Fibre Channel transfers between
132. ded at any time with VideoClip Load Group 3 March 2000 Profile Family 161 da Chapter4 Using VdrPanel Playing a Clip List To play a list of clips 1 Click within the specific Panel dialog box to select the panel 2 Choose VideoClip Load Group 1f the clip list you want to play is not currently loaded Load Group ot Clips Look in al profile Ej contigs SNS d i q g divers Z extras f clips grp Seismic grp File name Seismic grp Files of type Groups of Clips Cancel Figure 96 Load Group of Clips dialog box 3 Select the group and click OK In this example the group is Seismic grp 4 Click on the first clip in the clip list 5 Click Play to start playing the clip list 162 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Editing a Clip List Editing a Clip List To edit a clip list group of clips 1 Click a panel to select it 2 Choose Video Clip Load Group if the clip list to be edited was previously saved as a group Select the group and click OK 3 Choose VideoClip Edit Clip List to open the Edit Clip List dialog box Edit Clip List x Drive Clip list INT1 default INTI default Richter Clips INT 1 S default feruption 7 INT 1 fdefault magma INTI fdetault Tidal Wawe INT1 fdetault olcano Add gt Intuition magma Nuance lt Remove Richter Tidal Yawe volcano it Figure 97 Edit Clip List dialog box
133. ded in media files on the Profile media disks A clip has a beginning and an end and when first recorded the beginning and end correspond to the first and last frames stored in the media file but a clip may refer to the entire media file or just part of it When you delete a clip the media file that the clip refers to remains on disk if at least one other clip refers to it only the reference to the media file is deleted not the media itself You can mark in and out points in a clip These marks change the effective beginning and end points of a clip while not removing the associated material from the media file On the other hand you can trim media to remove material from either end of a clip which also removes the information from the media file Trimmed material is permanently removed from disk and is no longer available for use The default tool for creating and playing clips on the Profile system is VdrPanel VdrPanel provides you with a VTR like interface complete with transport controls to directly manage media operations Once created with VdrPanel clips are available for use with optional Profile applications such as Tool Box Editor or the List Manager VdrPanel allows you to configure any or all of your channels for operation through a controller connected to an RS 422 serial port These controllers either comply with Profile Protocol such as the optional PRC 100 Profile Remote Control unit or with Louth Odetics BVW or
134. dialog DOK cscs scrdecdccecsedid soorecndidcerttee et slecederaednsseeneateeceeeesd eeeedad ecsdied 160 95 Save Group Of Clips dialog DOX ccccccceeeeececeesseseeeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeesuaeeeeseeeesaaeeeeseeees 161 96 Load Group of Clips dialog DOX eeccccseeeeecessseeeeeseeeeeeseeeaeeeeesaeeeeesaaeseeseeageesesags 162 SY dame 1 0m Listdialog DOXA E eee 163 98 Field DOMINANCE dialog DOX ccssseeccecseeececeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeceeegeeeeeaeeeeeesaaeeeesaeeeeeeseas 165 99 Profile Disk Utility WINdOW ie cx csatseiendecinteedienincen det cade esicind dates etait daaednentnedshcacatondeeiacs 167 100 Set Label dialog DOK asics chcas cede sete sence sane wens seeseneseccoeessnnndeassnsesnceree cbasessiien cies eebue tenes te 168 101 Format DiISk S dialog DOX secsci sccceccetrevnctenssete came cedeetectecosceauataceegbdeuchecezectaceceueoiinds 169 102 Microcode Filename to Load dialog DOX cccceceeseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeseeseeaeeeseneas 170 103 Detall Log dialog DOK rsssia ses brace ces ctatecseee atest cen EE 172 104 WIN Tall WINKOW 0 cece ecec ce eeece cece eens ee eeeeaeeseeeeseaeeseeeeseeeeseeeesaeeeseeeesaeessaeesaaeegas 173 105 Log Sel selection screen dicsti indus dndeakemitelidinansioaw danvieeswions ceaspnamess meatal 175 106 Size selection screen 2 00 cee ccc ceeeececceeneeceeneeeseeceaeeeeeeecueceeecseaaeeeeeaaeeseesuaeseesaeageeseneas 176 107 Log tool complete SCl CCM cicsassiranieccrueaiecisdjenc
135. display during still mode One field display eliminates temporal artifacts while two field display provides the best vertical resolution 10 The Normal normal plays the selected clip or clip list to the end freezing on the last field of the clip or of the last clip in the list 11 The Loop button plays the selected clip or clip list continuously looping back to the beginning of the clip when the clip ends or in the case of a clip list looping back to the first clip in the list when the last clip ends If you create a clip while in Loop mode you are asked to enter a clip length in the form 00 00 00 00 Hours Minutes Seconds Frames The Record operation will automatically stop at the specified timecode thus protecting disk storage space 12 The Bounce button plays the selected clip or clip list continuously until at the end of the clip it plays the clip in reverse or in the case of a clip list it plays to the end of the clip list then reverses the sequence playing all the clips in reverse order If you create a clip while in Bounce mode you are asked to enter a clip length in the form 00 00 00 00 Hours Minutes Seconds Frames The Record operation will automatically stop at the specified timecode thus protecting disk storage space 148 Profile Family 3 March 2000 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 2A 22 23 24 25 26 3 March 2000 Panel Basics The PB EE Playback E to E button determi
136. dit I frame clips only To make an MPEG clip I frame drag the diamond to the far left side of the grid 106 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Using the Transcode Utility Custom ideo Quality Settings Figure 54 JPEG Custom Video Quality Settings dialog box Table 6 JPEG video quality compression Quality Settings Compressionin Mbps mw p Medium default 3 March 2000 Profile Family 107 Y Chapter 3 Using Media Manager Custom Video Quality Settings Figure 55 MPEG Custom Video Quality Settings dialog box Table 7 MPEG Video quality compression Ce 108 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Using the Transcode Utility Transcode Utility CDX_O3 Fie Edit Help tha Convert O Preview Target Format Target Quality I Delete source after conversion eee ee ee BS pt Name ft Lerigth Stats O Remove OF INT 1 default jpegd 00 00 10 245 error ba INT1 Adefault tomt 00 00 18 225 EERTE Figure 56 Transcode Utility dialog box Convert tab 7 In the Preview tab select a video output for the source clip or master from the Source Video Output box This allows you to watch the source media play out on the monitor during the conversion 8 From the Target Video Output box select a video output for the target clip or master This allows you to compare video quality by watching the target media play out on a monitor during the conversion with a few seconds delay from the source media
137. doubled Line Double is the default With Interlaced you may get some flicker in still display Line double reduces flicker Click the button you want The Field Frame Setup button is always depressed because when the Video track type is selected the Field Setup panel is the only panel available Resource Manager 6010278 8 Channel A 8 Channel B Name Type Add Channel Channel B PlayerRecorder x Remove Channel a Channel B fE Track 1 JPEG Sii Audio ai Track 1 a Track 2 Timecode Add Track AH Track 1 Delete Track Configuration for all video tracks PI Field Dominance Still Play Mode i Field 1 Line Double C Field C Interlaced Field Frame Setup Cancel Apply Help Figure 154 Field Frame Setup controls 3 March 2000 Profile Family 267 Y Chapter 10 Using the Resource Manager Configuring Audio Resources Configuring audio resources for a channel involves adding one or more audio tracks to the channel and selecting an audio input for each track When you select the audio input for the track the corresponding output is automatically selected For instance 1f you select AES EBU In1 J5 for your input AES EBU Out1 J5 is automatically selected as the output Likewise if you select an output the corresponding input is automatically selected To configure audio resources 1 Select the audio Track icon in the configuration tree With the Crosspoints button sele
138. e TimeDelay Buffer Location Fa Drive JINT Cancel Figure 172 TimeDelay Buffer Location dialog box 2 Select the appropriate drive 3 Click the OK button 288 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Working with the Record Buffer Saving the Record Buffer Contents as a Profile Movie Each time the TimeDelay process is started the disk storage used by the record buffer is deleted The Save Buffer operation allows you to save the contents of the record buffer before closing or restarting the TimeDelay process To save the record buffer contents as a Profile movie do the following 1 On the File menu click Save Buffer As This opens the dialog shown below Save TimeDelay Clip Mame TimeDelayClip_2 save in INT1 defautlt oneal 2 Enter a name for the movie This movie name must be unique When the dialog is opened a unique default name is suggested If you change the name and it is not unique you will be prompted to enter a new name or cancel the save operation 3 Use the Save in combo box to choose a bin for the movie 4 Click the OK button Saving a large record buffer as a movie will reduce the amount of available disk storage This may effect the TimeDelay application s ability to function 3 March 2000 Profile Family 289 Chapter 11 Using TimeDelay Working with the Playback Panel The Playback Panel allows you to control the playout delay for the playback c
139. e To adjust the size of a column af 1 Position the mouse pointer over the right border of the column title of the column you wish to adjust The pointer changes to a sizing shape 2 Drag the border to the right to widen the column to the left to make the column narrower 3 Drop the border at the desired column width 4 Drag the right border completely to the left to reduce the column width to nothing removing the column from the display To make the column visible again double click on the border you dragged then follow steps 1 and 2 To change column order 1 Select the column you wish to move by clicking on its title You can select more than one column by clicking in one column title then dragging the mouse pointer through the adjacent titles you wish to select 2 Drag the selected column or columns to the desired destination 3 March 2000 Profile Family 255 da Chapter 9 Using the List Manager Using the Event Log As events are performed in the On air List a record of those operations is kept in a file called c profile evntsch log You can extract information from this log file for record keeping billing or any other purpose where accurate records are required The information in the log file is stored as ASCII text in tabular form separated by commas You can use a text editor to read the file but be careful not to save any changes you may make You can see an example of a section of a log file in
140. e 1 for PROFILE1 and 2 for PROFILE2 No two hardware addresses Should be the same on the network feconfig t off followed by Enter TCP IP checksums are now disabled Reboot computer for settings to take effect feconfig hta off followed by Enter Auto host table administration set to off Reboot computer for settings to take effect Now type feconfig again followed by Enter Fibre Channel Network Configuration FC IP POC ress secesie soaa oraaa 192 168 100 1 Hardware AddreSS i bea Su 40644 Ge ea 1 TCP checksums lt 0 eu woo BAe wees ecce ee Disabled Auto host table administration Disabled BU ONIL LOI Be oes Se ee ee ee Disabled Profile Family 3 March 2000 Enabling the Fibre Channel Switch Enabling the Fibre Channel Switch If you intend to connect your Profile system to a Fibre Channel switch instead of a loop you Il need to load the appropriate microcode for the Fibre Channel board as explained in Chapter 6 Using Profile Utilities and set Fibre Channel Switch Mode ON You can do this in one of two ways e Type the following command from the Command Prompt feconfig s on OR e In Configuration Manager select Enable Switch in the Fibre Channel Network Configuration dialog box see Setting Up Fibre Channel Networking on page 84 NOTE You do not need to set the Fibre Channel hardware address of Profile systems connected to the Fibre Channel switch These addresses are assigned dynami
141. e 109 Setting JPEG compression 180 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Manually Editing a Configuration File Manually Editing a Configuration File In some special cases you may wish to manually edit a configuration file You can use any text editor to make changes to an existing configuration file Notepad will save your file in the required format If you decide to use any other editor such as WordPad be sure to save the file as a text document ASCII or txt and use the cfg filename extension if you change the name of the file Configuration files are simple text files containing three types of lines The lines are parsed on a column basis as follows e If column contains anything besides a number from 0 9 the line is ignored as a comment line 66 99 e If column 7 contains a C or c the line is treated as a crosspoint line e All other lines are treated as resource lines Both resource allocation lines and crosspoint lines share a similar format eee ls Vil tunel tune 2 NOTE Although resource and crosspoint lines look similar they have very different meanings This is a frequent source of confusion and error Make sure whether you are editing a resource line or a crosspoint line Resource Lines Resource lines allocate a resource for use by a port The following is the column by column layout of resource lines e Column 1 2 resource type Must be one of the following 00 audio codec 01 JPEG code
142. e 164 In use Tool Tip message 3 March 2000 Profile Family 275 F Chapter 10 Using the Resource Manager Should the application that is using a resource shut down abnormally and release that resource while you have Resource Manager open the listing for that resource remains gray indicating that it is in use The Tool Tip displays lt Error gt as shown in Figure 165 after several seconds of delay The delay is the result of Resource Manager timing out after looking for status information that 1s no longer available If this message appears for a resource close and re open Resource Manager The error indication will disappear and Resource Manager should correctly indicate the status of all resources Video Output s Bl lt None gt SOl Outal9 P SO1 Oute J FP S01 Oute SO1 Outb J Figure 165 lt Error gt Tool Tip message 2 6 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Chapter 1 1 Using TimeDelay TimeDelay is a Profile application that enables you to record incoming video audio or both and to delay the playback for a specific period of time While TimeDelay can be used in combination with other applications like Media Manager Tool Box Editor VDR Panel and others it is primarily intended for users who will dedicate all of a Profile system s resources to one or more instances of the TimeDelay application In this chapter you find three major sections e Getting Started with TimeDelay descri
143. e configuration tree Add Track Ed er Add track of type Wideo i Audio i Timecode i Cancel Help Figure 159 Add Track dialog box for timecode 3 Select a timecode input under Timecode Input You can record timecode from an internal generator genlock VITC LTC inputs or a VITC input from a Profile video input 4 Select a timecode output under Timecode Output The default timecode output is None You can choose either a VITC output from a Profile video output or a LTC output NOTE VITC outputs appear in the Timecode Output list box only if the corresponding video outputs have been selected for the same channel For example SDI VITC OutA J6 appears in the Timecode Output list box for Channel A only if you ve selected SDI Out J6 as a video output for Channel A If you remove a video output for a channel any request for the corresponding VITC output is also removed 272 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Configuring Timecode Resources Choosing Timecode Codecs NOTE Use of the Advanced panel as described in the following step is necessary only if you want to specify the exact codec resource to be used By default the system chooses a codec resource for you based on availability This default option is indicated by displaying Any for your codec selection To select a timecode codec 1 With a timecode Track selected in the configuration tree click the Advanced button The Timecode Codec check
144. e current timecode source value Timecode sources include external VITC and LTC signals internal timecode generators the VITC in the house reference or simply the offset in the record buffer The timecode source is chosen in Resource Manager Record Button Starts the TimeDelay process When you click this button the record panel starts recording and the playback panels start their delays Auto Start Button Opens the Auto Start dialog box Auto start allows you to trigger the TimeDelay process using the current timecode source This button is enabled only when the current timecode source is a VITC or LTC signal Countdown Display Shows the amount of time before the record panel automatically starts The Countdown Display appears only when the Auto Start mode is active All Stop Button Stops the TimeDelay process If the playback has not started yet the delayed start is canceled Video Audio Status LightsThe number of status lights indicates the number of video and audio tracks in the record channel A Video status light turns red when the corresponding video track is not receiving a signal An audio status light turns red when the audio input signal peaks and is clipped Show Hide Meters ButtonExpands the panel to show video and audio meters Video Audio Meters The video meter shows the record channel s data rate relative to the maximum rate Audio meters show the audio input level in dB 3 March 2000 Profile Family 293
145. e during playback default crosspoints take effect at all other times or in the absence of scheduled crosspoints Typically scheduled and default crosspoints are used in sets of three to define playback and E to E modes as follows Default connection of an input to an output E E Default connection of an input to a codec for recording Scheduled connection of the codec to the output to override E E during PB A configuration file should only have crosspoint lines for video and timecode The sample configuration files that follow provide examples of resource and crosspoint lines 3 March 2000 Profile Family 185 F Chapter6 Using Profile Utilities Sample Configuration Files The following sample configuration files demonstrate how to create a basic file and how to add features which the Profile Protocol Resources utility does not support such as assigning two codecs for one channel Yov ll find these and other sample configuration files in the c profile configs directory Basic Configuration This example shows how to create a basic configuration file format is 2 digit base 10 numbers format XX YY gt Ltuncl fune2 starting col 1 format if coll is not between 0 amp 9 its a comment format optional parameters with white space separators start in ool 6 02 00 5 index 1 video input 0 shared 03 00 index 2 video output 0 01 00 100000 index 3 JPEG codec 0 at 100K
146. e external connections Source audio channels are connected to the inputs for the audio channels assigned as the Record Audio Audio outputs from the disk recorder are connected to the audio channels assigned as the Playback Audio Edit controller is connected to the assigned Port Refer to the device s installation manual DIP switch on the breakout box is set to Device for the RS 422 Port Refer to the breakout box installation manual Setting Louth Modes If you use Louth Automation you can set a panel to Louth modes Normally when a clip is cued a freeze or confidence frame appears on the monitor instead of a regular video input feed In Louth switcher mode you do not see a confidence frame you see video input from the feed until you play the clip When the clip is done playing you immediately see the regular video input again Without Louth end mode you may see a few fields of a following clip even if you don t intend to play it Louth end mode ensures that after playing a clip in a list timecode freezes at the first frame of the next clip in that list NOTE Louth menu commands are available only when the panel controller is set to Louth Automation To set a panel to Louth switcher mode 1 Click the panel to activate it The panel controller must be Louth Automation For information on how to set the controller to Louth Automation see Selecting a Controller on page 131 2 Choose Options Louth Swi
147. e media is stored Destination Media The path name of the destination media Destination Profile The name of the Profile unit to which the media is copied Settings Unique to Archive Events Archive events have these added settings see Scheduling an Archive Event on page 247 Media The name of the media clip that is to be archived or restored Path The name of the directory path for the media Action Click either Archive or Restore Cartridge Under Advanced Enter the bar code number for the cartridge 00000015 for example This is an optional setting Partition Under Advanced Enter the partition number where the media is archived This also is an optional setting Monitoring a List as it Runs Events you enter in the Monitor view are performed at their appointed times The current house time is displayed at the top of the window You can monitor the progress of events on each channel in the channel panels Each panel shows Air Time The timecode of the current frame of material Duration The duration of the current material Time Till Next Event This clock counts down the time until the next scheduled event The current event is highlighted in green for easy identification a cued event is highlighted in yellow 240 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Validating a List Validating a List The On air List is validated automatically every few minutes You should manually check any other list to make sure tha
148. eated use Lists you build in the Edit window are not scheduled immediately When you choose the Schedule List command from the Edit menu the list is integrated into the On air List and its events are performed with other events which were already on the On air List List Manager validates the On air List to make sure that you haven t scheduled conflicting events using the same Profile resources You can then schedule the list and let List Manager control your Profile You can follow the operation of a list by using the Monitor view on any or all of your Profle s channels 232 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Starting List Manager Starting List Manager To start List Manager in Windows NT 4 0 e Double click the List Manager shortcut icon on the desktop Or e Choose Start Programs PDR Applications List Manager When you start List Manager for the first time your screen should look similar to the one shown in Figure 130 i List Manager BO42500 OP x Fille Edit View Project Options Help HE Aae E Take Stop Monitor 1 Channel A s E Name Start Time Duration O O Comment o o J Figure 130 List Manager window 3 March 2000 Profile Family 233 Y Chapter 9 Using the List Manager Whenever you start List Manager a Hardware Communication Monitor is also started if it is not already running This program makes calls to the disk recorder keeps track of the Profile host file
149. ect or double click on the name in the Network Host List Changing the machine connection closes the current TimeDelay project If you haven t saved changes to the project you are prompted to save before TimeDelay makes the new connection When the new connection is established the default project settings are used Adding Names to the Network Host List To add a machine to the Network Host List 1 Click the Add button to open the Add Network Host dialog box Add Network Host Mew Host Name Cancel Figure 168 The Add Network Host dialog box 2 Enter the new machine name This can either be the host name or the machine s IP address Ex 128 181 199 237 3 Click OK to close the Add Network Host dialog box and add the new host name to the Network Host List 4 Click OK in the Remote Connection dialog box to close it and to open the connection status dialog box which shows the progress of any new connections 3 March 2000 Profile Family 281 T Chapter ll Using TimeDelay Removing Names from the Network Host List To remove a machine from the Network Host List 1 In the Network Host List click the name you wish to remove 2 Click the Remove button Avoiding a Connection Change When you save a project file it includes the name of the machine to which TimeDelay 1s connected When you launch the project file at a later time TimeDelay attempts to connect to the same machine By importing a
150. ect the event that you want to insert elsewhere 2 Drag the desired event and drop it on the event The event is placed below the selected event Removing Events From a List The On air List grows as you add events You may want to reduce the size of the On air List by deleting events that have been performed and whose status is now Done To remove unwanted events from a list l Select the unwanted event You can select several events by using the standard Windows operations to select more than one event Ctrl click to add an event to the selection Shift click to select a range of events Delete the event or events using Ctrl X or Edit Cut or the Delete key You can also choose Delete from the shortcut menu with a right click Click Yes to confirm that you want to delete the event Profile Family 3 March 2000 Using the Edit Window Using the Edit Window You can use the Edit window to build lists in exactly the same way as you did in the Monitor view The lists you build in the Edit window will not be scheduled until you choose the Edit Schedule List command from the Edit menu The Edit window allows you to create and store lists that you want to reuse By saving your lists you can use them on a daily or weekly basis without having to rebuild the list each time For example you may want to use this for inserting commercials in network feeds Creating a New List To create a new list 1 Choose File Ne
151. ee eae 162 EE Cina LIS erie save geen atndclececs end E hunadetnea 163 Setting In and Out Marks in CLIPS 0 ceeeeceececeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeaseeeeeeeseaeeeseeeeeasaneees 164 Seting INNIS cay oie asegin eo ae a ois aise aps aA a ia a e R 164 REMON IAS resica a i a EE A E E 164 AA MUTA CIPS e a A EE nao aesediawngee 165 Setting Field Dominance for Marks cccccseeeeececeeaeeeeeeeeceeaueeeeeeeseeaaeeeeeeeeeeaeseeseeeaes 165 Chapter 5 Using the Profile Disk Utility Crealinigia Pile SySteMes ons a a adele S 168 SENATA DISK Eabele tence a S 168 Fomatng a DISK VOUM eiie odiatalscniulenesaboutees CuetOuaulia hats eiadeestaas ceil 169 OAC ING Microcode 35 sate erst saacs st E E 170 Relocating and Testing Bad BIOCKS ss csecse ceccsdesescanetcedincaccsMecctse a deca deseree 171 PR akon 2 C21 Mi ie o era rin Teta OR Reena eee verat S 172 Chapter 6 Using Profile Utilities Viewing Profile ISOO Ste cast a5 te escaieonem bnicainte nandumsacestacnn tics saete giana aye dad mates ha hagdensteetanc tuna 173 kog Cape Lio 0 Bememnrce te etter mer erate a ear rote eo neat semitone center Eee meee ere eee ee eee 175 Profile Protocol Resources Sati xgee sistas Sans s Sede gieasytecdasteea abeenetiaaeiatepomeediad wel minenadersalcseee 178 Using the Profile Protocol Resources Utility ccsscccecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeesneseeessaaeees 178 Manually Editing a Configuration File ccccccccssssceceseeeneeeeeceeeeeeeeeeese
152. eeceneeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeaaaeeees 54 ANalOd GOmpONne nt Videc OU 2 ssc assert a oe ceases ees cad weld eet eeatercnsa ene 55 Serial Digital Component Video INPUt ccc ceeeeceeceseeeseeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeseeeesaaaaeeeeeees 57 Serial Digital Component Video Input AdVanced ccccceeeececeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaaeaeeeeeeees 59 VideO OUTD UU resanse a 60 Analog Gomposite Video QuIput sassone e a a E E 60 Analog Composite Video Output Vertical Interval cccccccccceescceceseeeeeeeseeeeeeseaaeeeees 62 Profile Family da Contents Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Profile Family Analog Composite Monitor Output c cccccceceeeseeeeeceeeeeaeeeeeeeeeesaaeeeeeeeeesaaeaeeeeeseanaeeees 63 Analog Composite Monitor Output Burn in Timecode ccceeseeceeeeeeeneeceeeeeeeesenees 64 Serial Digital Component Video OUtpUL 0 ccceeceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeaneas 65 Serial Digital Component Video Output AdVanced cccccceecececeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeseeeeeaeees 66 PONOA e ene tate eres E E ee ee ree meaeee 67 Andog Audo MOU Renee terme le epelnt E neuen crt E 68 Digital Audio INPUT stscececentencettnnsd innnan aeaa a aaaeaii 70 Anadog Audio OWPUt asuisin e aeiee 73 Digtal Audio OUMU gemerenenmtn te tamer eneenr aN Pere en e a e aa aeea aaa ai 76 Ado ConigWalOM sssini a e eE chewed 77 mpu and Output Mapping nesae sonreir cede ER e NE scene aR 77 aret UO UN PEPE E E E E E EE E
153. eeeeeeenaas 291 174 TAG AUIGIO level Controls cconcasncencnevadaevaniemadeebeney cxdvuteahicadeodunhe neste aE A Raa a aa Rei 292 175 WAV OC OMIM ONS Ai dece soe n ease saan teeteeend cedacautas tiers one dadee assaterease ctem AEAEE ARERR 295 12 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Tables 3 March 2000 CONOR WD PDR200 300 and PDR200 400 features compared eee ceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 21 Digital audio input Channel indicators ccccceeeeeceeseeeeeeceeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaueseeeseeaeeeeesaaes 71 Board representation key s1 anc lt cyicoNcswniais toa uaduaten emesis ca Seach Tiga sen ica 80 Configuration example two video input clocking SOUICES sececesseeeeeeeeseeeeees 80 Configuration example four video input clocking SOUICES cccceeeeceesseeeeeeeeeeeees 81 JPEG video quality COMPreSSION asrorin annn a A a iai 107 MPEG Video quality compression ccccceeeeeceseeeeeeeceeeeeeesueeeeeesaeseeeseanseeeseanes 108 Factory set values for JPEG compression presets cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeees 138 NOE AMGl SMOMCULK CY Sea Se crease acta rramnusaguucawes a a a 150 Microcode update TIES nce cei a oe nah Cua a 170 Audio PAGING IONS ech sos 5 sets ct cs coscnere sates eececnetes tae eee a Sateen aac 184 MIME COGS Fakame S atest ete tsnc ces msea sien cial EN 184 Tool Box Editor Keyboard SMOM Cuts asin a ead sere ated a 228 Event stat s IMGICATONS sssrin a e E e a e a a ET
154. eeesseeeeesaeanessees 181 RESOUS LINCS citacctate inant ciscceh viet hen Gaetan ceva dussthaesteeen autehd ans eaucl beth tiamep weapon bees 181 GOSS DOIN MING S cera 5 ace co ses ses eesrnsss inane oaree ase aa aca aa ee ads eae cecaes 185 sampe COMMGUIANOM FIGS ters 186 Base G0 gto U2 110 19 emer teem teeeteenrenn te Seer ete een te eee eee ee eee or eee eee 186 Assigning a Second JPEG Codec 0 0 cee eeecccceceeeseececeeceeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeesuseeeeeeeeeanaees 187 Assigning a DVCPRO Codec 28 ces cose Nasser ses ei ee ee ee 188 OMe AVON a E Se aeasaetea lenient csiee cadens re cate ee eases es tanta ets 190 PDRACCOSS CON MO A Tin ek caren mei ence oi ce et ed net caine raul alates Sake 191 Updating IF WANG ache oh ric ea E oe setae E A taste a toate setae 192 3 March 2000 Profile Family 5 da Contents Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Chapter 9 Profile Family Updating Fibre Channel Microcode ccccccccceecesseeneeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeesueaeeeeeeeesaaaeees 194 Fibre Channel Video Networking Setting Up Hardware for Fibre Channel cccccccccessssscececeeaeeeeeeceeeeseeseceeeeessaneeeeeees 198 Setting Up Software for Fibre Channel ccccccccceceeseeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaasseeeeeeesaaeseeeeeees 199 Ethernet IP Address Set Up cicsccccccceccnsscacteccaesterdacsaeseeecesencsbsbecnsnecbsesaedecsacdessessdesseeadnded 199 Fibre Channel IP Address Set Up cccccccccccessseeeeeceseesaeeeeeeeseeeas
155. ees 285 Handling Resource Allocation Errors cccccsccccssscecceeeecsesececeeeeeesseeesseeeessneeensaees 285 Starting the TimeDelay Process cccccccsesseeceeeeceeeuseseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeesseeeeeesseaeeseeeeeasaagees 286 3 March 2000 Profile Family 7 da Contents Manually Starting the TimeDelay Process cccccceceeceeneeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesuaeeeeeeeeeeeeess 286 Automatically Starting the TimeDelay Process cccccessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeesaesseeseaaeees 287 Working with the Record Buffer ccccccesscecseeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeseeeeaeeeseaeeeeaeeeesseneees 288 Setting the Record Buffer Size ce cecccccccesseeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeessaaaeeseeeeaaaees 288 Changing the Record Buffer s Location ccccccccccceesseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeesueeeeeseeeesaanes 288 Saving the Record Buffer Contents as a Profile MOVI cccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 289 Working with the Playback Panel ccccccsccceeeeeeeeesaeeeeeceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeesseseeeesaaeees 290 SCUINO a PlAVOUL Delay cece sauics en eidd ceca stnsen eecetectstersetensieeewwteniivecandesiulisdaeeeeyhdeceetss 290 Starting a Playback Channel Immediately ccccccseeseeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeesueeeeeseeeeaaaees 290 Modifying a Playout Delay issciieaciuuiunecads suneuenideadsbwmmeeanssansasinetabinaadsieternisduancetndd 290 Fausing Play DACE nia E E EE 290 Working with TIMecOdE isciani e
156. eessaeeeeseeeesaaaaeeseeees 138 81 Video CrosspoOint dialog DOX cceccseeccecesseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeceeeeeeeeesaeeeeesaseeeeseeeeeeesaas 141 82 Timecode Setup dialog DOX cc ceccccccessseeeeeceeesaeeeeeeeeeeeaaceeeeeseeeaseeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaseas 143 83 Timecode Crosspoint dialog DOX ceccccsesececessseeceeseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeaeeeeeesaaeseeseeeeeeeeseas 145 od FRane dialog DOS recreen een REe eee mee een eee eee anne eee ate ee anne 147 85 Go To Timecode Dialog BOX cccccccccecessseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeessseeseseeeesaaaaeeeeeees 148 oo Mme 01 1418 Paneldialog 0 0 enna eee eee a ere ee eee een 151 87 Message box showing record Capacity cccceeeeceeeeeeee cee eeeeeee ee eeeeeaaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeaas 152 88 Audio Monitor dialog BOX vrscocessetcccxececvee denteadsce sda ceded cdenddnswn cdend ceded saved ceceesdsnenteessentces 152 SO ING WGI CialOG DOX secs stas cesvnnnecessteccecesuenentesce vane iainta E aA EEEREN es sdarnceceeidarseteenescnes 155 oo 072 63 1 es 2 016 DO Coane see tee epri eRe erst eae noe manner ate ee enn ene eee eee 156 91 Rename Video Clip dialog DOX cececccseccccesseeeeesseeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeesseseeeseeseeeeesanees 157 92 Set Clip Protection dialog bOX cccecccccccsesseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeseeeeaaaaseeseeees 158 93 Stripe Timecode dialog DOX cc ceecccccessseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeseeeeaseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaeeas 159 94 Delete Clip
157. efault 100 6 from normal Close Oraa Hep M Automatic ITE detect bo OO Oa O D th hho hh Poh D a Figure 13 Analog Composite Video Input dialog box Main tab B 2 If you prefer enter a new name for the input signal in the Name box For example 1f the signal is a network feed you could rename it to Network_Feed The VITC name the window title bar and the configuration tree name change automatically as you enter the new name Names can be up to 30 characters and can include spaces To return a renamed signal to the default delete all the characters in the text field and press Enter 3 Select a video standard Click either NTSC with pedestal NTSC without pedestal or PAL PAL is available only with earlier cards If you change the standard restart all tools that use this channel The board can accept only one input at a time 4 If you use Automatic VITC Detect the Profile unit uses the range set in the From and To lines to look for the VITC signals If Automatic VITC Detect is not checked the system expects to find the VITC signals on the VITC Reader Line 1 default 10 or Line 2 default 12 If the signal is found the VITC Present status indicator is turned on NOTE Input must be auto timed to use automatic VITC detection Input must also be auto timed when using DVCPRO25 codecs independently 5 If you want video input auto timed click Enable Auto Timing Auto timing determines if the input is synchron
158. either LTC output connectors on the back panel or VITC output signals Timecode outputs can be connected to timecode recorders for playback of recorded material from disk to timecode inputs or to timecode generators 1 Select Window Timecode Crosspoint to open the Timecode Crosspoint dialog box The green boxes indicate the current connections For example a green box at the intersection of TCRec 1 and GenlockVITC InA J16 indicates the timecode signal from the back panel input is recorded by timecode recorder 1 2 To assign a crosspoint click in the intersection between the signal and the recorder channel The selections turn green NOTE A timecode recorder must be used by a panel to be available as a timecode output E 3 Click the Close button NOTE To release a timecode output for use by another application click the box at the intersection of the output with the unused box 144 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Setting Timecode Crosspoints Timecode Crosspoint Ee E Fe a a ee ed a FA a ae e ee ee ee Se a ee We a ee a ea ee ee la ee ee Tay at WE at Te Te fe ae ee i A Tae AT Maa et Da qe ea ee Taf any Dee a a a I a ee M4414 ae a ee a ee LE ee et ey es a ee ee i a ek ek re Figure 83 Timecode Crosspoint dialog box 145 Profile Family 3 March 2000 F Chapter4 Using VdrPanel Setting Drop Frame Timecode In NTSC and 525 60 you don actually get 30 frame
159. elect the Profile Network icon you will search all machines and libraries on the network If you select a machine your search will be limited to that machine s volumes and attached library If you select a cartridge in a library your search includes all partitions in the cartridge 1 Select the item where you want to begin your search in either the tree or contents panes 2 Choose Find on the Edit menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click The Find dialog box appears see Figure 52 Find All Files x Find How Named f 0 25 97 Sop Look Ir TRITON12 1NT1 Commercials Close Media irl Hame amp Location Modified E doe TRITONT2 ANT1 Commercials 00 02 01 00 10 30 97 12 48 PM Search Complete Figure 52 Find dialog box 3 Enter the name of the clip or master in the Named box in this example 10 28 97 The Look In box indicates where the search will begin NOTE Wildcards are not supported 4 Click Find Now Click Stop to abort the search When a match is found the result is displayed in the box at the bottom of the Find dialog box as shown in Figure 52 5 If you double click an item in the list of found items the tree pane is expanded and the item is selected in the contents pane 6 You can copy an item from the found list by holding the Control key and dragging the item to the desired location or you can move it by dragging it without the Control key 7 Click Close when you
160. ence source selection Figure 38 You get one system reference by default from the Reference Genlock boards and up to four video input references depending on which video boards are installed in your Profile unit Even if more than four video references are available only the first four input clocking references are used If you look at the bottom of the Configuration Manager window you see a graphic representation of the installed boards A key to the board representations 1s shown in Table 3 3 March 2000 Profile Family 79 Chapter 2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager Table 3 Board representation key No of Video Vid VO SDI I O SDI Seaalaienaicomponent digital component video Vid I CAV Component analog video Vid I Cmpst Analog composite video The video references shown in the Input Clocking tab Video Input 1 4 correspond to the actual video boards installed from left to right as represented at the bottom of the Configuration Manager window For example a system that does not use all four available clock references might be configured like this In this specific example shown in Table 4 you have one analog composite board and one component analog board The panel in the tab shows System Video Input 1 and Video Input 2 Table 4 Configuration example two video input clocking sources Board Board Tag Board Type Input Clock Reference VidICAV I CAV Component analog comes Video Input 1 video
161. enlock settings 1 Click or double click Genlock from the configuration tree and the Reference Genlock dialog box appears see Figure 9 2 Click Automatic VITC Detect to have the Profile disk recorder use the range set in the From and To lines to look for the VITC vertical interval timecode signal If the VITC signal is found the VITC Present indicator 1s turned on Otherwise when you do not use Automatic VITC Detect the disk recorder expects to find the VITC signals on VITC Reader Line 1 default 10 or Line 2 default 12 3 March 2000 Profile Family 43 Y Chapter2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager b ab db amp Figure 9 Reference Genlock dialog box 3 Use the Field Line and Fine entries to adjust the internal timing relative to the reference input Changing this setting affects all system timing including all output timing and the input synchronized timing window Click Default to return to the default timing values 0 0 0 NOTE In order to properly time the disk recorder the Internal Reference Timing should only be changed if the downstream timing requirements cannot be met using the video output Timing Adjustment see Video Output on page 60 This should be done prior to setting individual output delay adjustments 4 Click Undo to return all values in the dialog box as they were set at the time the dialog box appeared 5 Click Close to accept the changes 44 Profile Family 3 March 2000
162. ens 4 100 4 from nominal Chroma Gain e AE j100 3 from nominal Black Level ee a a rlo IRE Lum Black Clip Level seein ienmmaeeti iets 4 gt 10 IRE Lum White Clip Level ee il ah ee Timing Adjustment Line Coarse Fine msec nsec Default Chroma Phase Ue a rlo Degree Default Close Oraa Hep Figure 21 Analog Composite Video Output dialog box 2 Enter a new name in the Name box to change the signal name For example 1f this is a dedicated signal to a main switcher rename it Switcher_1 The VITC Name automatically tracks the signal name and cannot be edited Names can be up to 30 characters and can include spaces To return a renamed signal to the default delete all the characters in the text field and press Enter 3 Click VITC Generator Enable to place VITC on specified lines in the vertical interval as specified under VITC Generator Settings in analog composite video input 4 Click NTSC with Pedestal to set the video output to NTSC with pedestal 5 Under Timing Adjustment you can adjust the timing of the output signal to compensate for any additional delays in your system Any changes you make in this group take place immediately You can delay at the following levels to get the exact amount of delay required Vertical Line level from 2 to 148 lines Coarse Horizontal level from 100 to 100 ms Fine Horizontal level from 100 to 100 ms
163. eo input The indicators are VITC Present Input Locked and Auto Timed also Burst Present for earlier analog composite cards A green light indicates that a status is on These are indicators and cannot be edited To configure analog composite video input 1 Select Video Input from the configuration tree and then click or double click an analog composite input from the list such as Composite InA J5 The Analog Composite Video Input dialog box appears Figure 12 for current analog composite cards and Figure 13 for earlier cards Analog Composite Video Input J5 4 Composite In4 J5 Oo NTSC w Pedestal ITE Input Auto C NTSC woPedestal Present Locked Timed Name Composite nA J5 l Enable Auto Timing VITC Compositev nA J5 Enable Dither VITC Reader Setting Input Gain Adjustment M Automatic Y ITE detect fa 14 Default 100 6 from normal Close Oraa Hep se NETANE NAIENU ELUF Figure 12 Analog Composite Video Input dialog box Main tab A 3 March 2000 Profile Family 47 F Chapter2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager Analog Composite Video Input J5 Compozite ln J5 Overwvritable video Standard D NTSC w Pedestal ITE Burst Input Auto C NTSC woPedestal Fresent Fresent Locked Timed C PAL Name Composite nA J5 M Enable Auto Timing Ae Compositev nA J5 l Enable Dither VITC Reader Setting Input Gain Adjustment l Enable AGC fa D
164. equired for your application 1 Click in a panel to select it 2 Choose Options Select Timecode to open the Timecode Setup dialog box The Timecode Setup dialog box is divided into two groups Display on Panel and Timecode Generator Settings 3 Select the timecode to be displayed on the panel from the Display on Panel group LTC Input is a separate signal input via the genlock card VITC Input is the timecode from the VITC input signal Compute from Field Number calculates the timecode directly from the field number of the recorded video New clips start at 00 00 00 00 TC Rec displays the recorded timecode Generator displays the timecode from the generator for the channel 4 Set up the timecode generator used by the panel with the Timecode Generator Settings group Free Run causes the timecode generator to continue to advance regardless of the current play or record mode of the panel Freeze locks the timecode at the current value The value does not advance with time nor with changes in the play or record mode of the panel Lock to Field Number causes the generator to output a timecode locked to the current clip s timecode When the panel is in stop the value freezes When the panel is in play or record the timecode advances normally During rewind or reverse shuttle the timecode runs backward 142 Profile Family 3 March 2000 5 3 March 2000 Selecting How to Display Timecode on a Panel Panel
165. er 11 Using TimeDelay To allocate resources for Tool Box Editor List Manager and TimeDelay see Chapter 10 Using the Resource Manager 26 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Starting Your Profile System Starting Your Profile System Once the unit is properly installed you are ready to log in For instructions on how to install and power on a Profile unit see the installation manual that came with the unit To log in automatically Power up the Profile unit and the start up routine begins During normal start up you are logged in automatically and the VdrPanel application starts You can hold down the Shift key during start up to interrupt the automatic log in process NOTE If you stop the automatic log in or if it fails the Windows NT log in dialog box appears When logging in remember that this dialog box is case sensitive To manually log in l 3 March 2000 At the Windows NT 4 0 log in window enter the username profile However you must log in as administrator when installing software performing Windows NT administration starting a service or setting an Ethernet IP address Use the Tab key to advance to the password field The password appears as asterisks for password security For the password enter profile Use the Tab key to advance to the From field If your domain name or local computer name 1s not displayed in the box click in the box to access a list of choices Sele
166. er and pressing the left mouse button The media files are then sorted according the criteria of the columns You can also view sort media in the current display in several other ways showing all media at once default clips only or masters only To select a view simply click on the view bar above the contents pane and choose a menu item You can also customize how you sort the media by name type or date or all three at once Selecting and sorting views is useful when you have a lot of media on disk T View All Media 01 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 UU WU UU UU 0605 96 New Master Timeline Eject Open Bin Delete Media Bin Toolbar Insert Media Load Media Figure 117 Current bin display 212 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Opening a Bin Below the current bin display is a set of buttons from left to right e Load Media Loads a selected master onto the edit timeline or a selected clip onto the capture timeline e Insert Media Inserts a selected clip into the currently loaded master on the edit timeline near the location of the current timeline cursor e Timeline Eject Ejects media from the active timeline e New Master Creates a new empty master ready to receive clips e New Bin Creates a new bin within a volume and displays it in the current bin display e Open Bin Opens an existing bin and displays it on the current bin display e Delete Media Deletes selected media Opening a Bin To open or change the cu
167. erride this with a larger mask For example 255 0 0 0 can be overridden by 255 255 0 0 or 255 255 255 0 9 Enter a dotted decimal gateway address in the box provided This is if you have a Profile VideoGateway attached to your network Click Clear to erase an entry 10 Enter a hardware address in the box provided in the range to 120 A hardware address of O zero will allow the address to be automatically configured Every Fibre Channel node board on your Profile network must have a unique hardware address 11 Click OK 3 March 2000 Profile Family 85 F Chapter2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager 86 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Chapter 3 Using Media Manager The Profile Media Manager allows you to have access to digitally stored JPEG MPEG DVCPRO 25 and DVCPRO 50 media and provides tools for managing that media such as explore cut copy paste and delete Media may be stored locally on disk on your Profile unit or it may be on a disk expansion unit RAID system or library system attached to your Profile unit You can also transfer media stored on any Profile system on your Profile network via a Fibre Channel connection Digital video and audio media may be stored in volumes A volume is a disk set or file system on one of the following machines e PDR100 Professional Video Disk Recorder e PDR200 PDR300 or PDR400 Video File Server e PRS200 A or PRS 250 Profile RAID Storage system e PDX 103 Profile Disk
168. ert edit Emulation Setting up BVW insert edit Emulation This procedure sets up a panel to emulate a Betacam Refer to the manual for your hardware controller device to set up Super Edits or BVEs NOTE This procedure requires access to two control ports Close a panel to free a control port for use with the BVW insert edit panel 1 Click within a BV W insert edit panel to select the panel Refer to Selecting a Controller on page 131 if you have not already selected BV W insert edit as the controller for this panel NOTE If you do not select BVW insert edit for the panel insert edit operations are not properly executed The channel can be used as a source deck or be acceptable for remote control systems such as the Ash Vale slow motion controller that do not use EditOn commands 2 Choose Controller Configure to open Profile Options see Figure 76 on page 135 3 Select two unused video codecs one for Playback Video and one for Record Video For example use JPEG 3 for Playback Video and JPEG 4 for Record Video Use Controller Configure with the other panels to assure the codecs are not in use To use DVCPRO codecs for BV W Insert Edit operations use only one of the codecs from each pair Codec and Codec 3 Note that the second DVCPRO codec from each pair must not be used for recording or playback 4 Select two pairs of audio channels For example select Chan 9 and Chan 11 for the Playback Audio and C
169. etail log file 172 Dialog box 300 Digital Audio Input 70 Digital audio interfaces 21 Digital Audio Output 76 Direct Memory Access DMA interface 23 Disk drives 21 Disk Expansion Unit 300 Disk label 168 Disk Utility 30 167 300 Display 300 Dominance field 165 Double clicking 17 Drop frame 300 Drop frame timecode 146 216 Duplicating media in Media Manager 98 Duration 239 Duration in Monitor view 240 DVCPRO codec board 22 DVCPRO codecs assigning 178 DVCPRO System Timing 43 DVCPRO video compression 22 23 DVCPRO converting to JPEG 105 E E to E 39 42 149 300 E to E button 217 E to E timed outputs 41 Edit Delete 248 3 March 2000 New Event 242 243 Edit presets 137 Edit timeline 223 Edit view in List Manager 232 Edit Window 249 Editing a clip list 163 Editing configuration files 181 Editing lists 248 Editor Tool Box 129 EDL 301 EISA 22 Kjecting clips 155 159 Emptying the Recycle Bin 215 Emptying the Recycle Bin in Media Manager 100 Enable Impulse Noise Reduction 52 Enable Luma 52 Enable Procamp 61 Enable Quiet Line 52 Encoders 22 Encoders MPEG 21 Entry window timecode 217 Ethernet 21 32 190 197 Event Archive 247 date 240 duration 239 inserting 248 play 236 record 243 removing 248 settings 238 start time 239 switch 245 taking 252 transfer 246 Event log Windows NT 191 Event Number column 239 Event order 248 Event Scheduler Engine definition 231 stopping 231 Even
170. ete SPP emtr Deer oe mnn ment eye rnon mererstns Seren ieee fer inant ener e sone mcr eeentten 98 Creating Renaming and Deleting BINS cccccceceeeeeceee sees eeeeeseeeaeeeeeeeseeeeseseeeeeaaesees 98 Renaming Clips And Masters cccccccccceseeeceseeeeeeeseseeeceseseeeeesaeseeessaseeseeaaeesessaeseeseas 99 Deleting Clips ANd Masters cecccccssseececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeseeeeeeeeaaeeeeesaeeeeesaeeeeeseeagees 99 EmMmpYMNg the Recycle BiN greene mmneer enema mt rin ee nner eur rere sre tore reeset cents aae 100 WW ACs FO NS Se Sacer cste en castes E de uence ese damascus ca doe ted dated sate cades e 101 Finding Clips and MASIONS sosicc03ec ecece conus sessntonessencedangcesouashen sceseeeieceducwstewesdus ssescebteneasenacce es 104 LISI the Transcode UNY eerste sss cede e A 105 Using a Library VS ONIN seecenca susee ce dusectecnscapieceesabesannss aaceeannee anon Mase deed senee Adaciiaen edsepeeeraesiaeie 112 Archiving a Bin or CID swans ccc cede EEEE EAER 112 Reslonng a Bimor oan eee ronse TEn ene meen EE AEEA ere 113 Renaming an Archived CID ccesccnarininnnnn e raia 114 Deleting an Archived Clip ccccccssseceecccesseeeceeeeceeeeseeeeeeceeaeeeeeaeeeeseeeeeeeaseseeessaees 114 importing ACG ANOS eset se Pedsenected scene enadesauchueddcreeshvaressneoeabuughesmueraueedsses tues aadA 114 Exporting a GAMMA Cao cccsccercesvnraseetaaieteciuiactnlanatedasesessstccessesaneiewevias neenieaebmeeceielawts 116 Updati
171. ew Transfer Event dialog box appears as shown in Figure 138 Hew Hedia cs Event Start Time EEEE Duration 00 01 00 00 Type Absolute Start Date i 1 r Te 998 Comment E vent Source Media Destination Media Source Profile Destination Profile Repeat Hour s Minutes f None Every fo fo C Hourly We Brad rate ime Daily End Date Weekly End Time Figure 138 New Transfer Event dialog box 3 In the New Transfer Event dialog box enter all the event information as described in Changing Event Settings on page 238 4 Click OK 246 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Scheduling an Archive Event Scheduling an Archive Event You can schedule archive events in your lists An archive event copies media to or from a Profile library system such as the PLS 200 The PLS 200 must be attached to a Profile system running the Event Scheduler engine 1 Open the list to which you wish to add the live event 2 Choose File New Event Archive and the New Archive Event dialog box appears as shown in Figure 139 Hew Archive Event E4 start Lime FEE Duration 00 00 00 0 Type Absolute start Date 171771938 Lomment E wenti Media Fath Action i Archive rc Restore Repeat Hour s Minutes f None Every fo fo C Hourly P Hond Gate ime Daily End Date Weekly End Time Advanced gt gt Cancel Figure 139 New Transfer Event dialog box 3 In the New Archive Event dialog box ente
172. external disks in a PDX 103 208 Disk Expansion Unit or a PRS 200 250 RAID Storage System NOTE You must login as administrator to use this utility After starting the application the Profile Disk Utility window appears Most of the disk utility functions can be performed from this dialog box as shown in Figure 99 23 Profile Disk Utility File Disk Utilities Help Current Data Set Physical Volume No of Disks INT 8 3GB Data Set 1 INT Make Data Set Set Label Available volumes Selected Volumes Internal a Adab lt lt Remove Internal SCSI ID SerialNo Vendor No of Blocks Block Size Model Revision Bad Blocks Medium Errors A30 N8051269 SEAGATE 2373630 4096 STIS IW D309 0 0 E3 A40 N8053268 SEAGATE 2373630 4096 STIST7 IW D309 0 0 E A50 LA217180 SEAGATE 2373630 4096 STIST7 IW D309 0 0 E A 6 0 N8051466 SEAGATE 2373630 4096 STIST7 IW D309 0 0 S F 3 0 N8050373 SEAGATE 2373630 4096 STIST7 IW D309 0 0 E 7 40 N8052077 SEAGATE 2373630 4096 STIST7 IW D309 0 0 S c 5 0 LAZT1607 SEAGATE 2373630 4096 57119171W D309 0 0 amp 6 0 N8054015 SEAGATE 2373630 4096 STIST7 IW D309 5 0 i gt loadMicocode Relocate Bad Blacks Wiest Badiblacks Format Detail Log Figure 99 Profile Disk Utility window NOTE If you use the PDX 103 Disk Expansion Unit with a PDR 200 or PDR 300 the 9 gigabyte hard drives in the video disk recorder are limited t
173. f the Profile Once allocated other Profile channels cannot share assigned video outputs Resource Manager B010278 35 Channel A 5 Channel E Hame Type Add Channel Channel A Player Recorder b Remove Channel 5 Channel 4 Ely video APH Track 1 MPEG Audio i Track 1 a Track 2 5 Timecode Add Track AH Track 1 Delete Track Configuration for Wideo Track 1 MPEQG iki Encoder Decoder Video Luality ary any High 24 Mbs A Video Input Video Output s SDl DutA J15 SO1 Oute 115 C l Monitor Oub I6 Crosspoints Advanced Cancel Apply Help Figure 149 MPEG video track settings 262 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Configuring Video Resources Resource Manager 6010278 Channel B Player Recorder eee Channel E id Figure 150 JPEG video track settings 3 March 2000 Profile Family 263 da Chapter 10 Using the Resource Manager Resource Manager OSAKA_ 1 Hh Audio a Track 1 SEEN Timecode fA Track 1 igor en Figure 151 DVCPRO video track settings 264 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Configuring Video Resources NOTE Use of the Advanced panel as described in the following step is necessary only if you want to specify the exact codec resource to be used By default the system will choose a codec resource for you based on availability This default option is indicated by displaying Any for your codec selection
174. f up to eight VTRs with the added benefit of random access to video and audio data stored on disk The PDR400 supports DVCPRO video compression with six record play channels operating at a fixed data rate of 25 Mb s or three record play channels operating at a fixed rate of 50 Mb s The DVCPRO codec boards have either two or four DVCPRO codecs arranged in pairs Because of this paired codec architecture some restrictions apply to DVCPRO codecs These restrictions are discussed in DVCPRO System Timing Considerations on page 43 The Profile system has an EISA motherboard with an internal digital video routing system There are sixteen EISA slots and one ISA slot used for interface cards and routing audio data The server also uses a PCI bus for routing data between the master and slave enhanced disk recorder EDR boards Fibre Channel boards and MPEG or DVCPRO codec boards A video router chip set is integrated on the mother board It routes video signals between the video disk system video mix effects cards and video I O cards The video router is a 32 x 32 crosspoint matrix capable of full bandwidth 4 2 2 CCIR 601 8 bit digital video The video router allows real time transfer of video throughout the system without impacting overall system performance The video router also makes possible simultaneous record and playback on separate channels A block diagram showing the hardware layout of a PDR200 or above is shown in Figure 1 on page
175. ffer 3 Click the Select button Crash Recovery The Crash Recovery option adds recovery features that will restore TimeDelay to the state in which it ended When you activate Crash Recovery Time Delay periodically saves the project file This allows you to add the project file to the pdrstart bat file and fully recover from a crash when the Profile unit restarts If TimeDelay is closed or crashes while recording it will come up recording when started again TimeDelay starts recording at the first break in the timecode and resets the playbacks to their original settings Choose Config Crash Recovery to activate the crash recovery functionality A check mark next to the menu item indicates that crash recovery is activated If you have not saved the project file prior to activating Crash Recovery the Save As dialog box appears prompting you to save the project file To ensure that TimeDelay restarts in case of a crash add the project file name to the parstart bat file as described in Launching a Project at Start up on page 279 3 March 2000 Profile Family 291 F Chapter 11 Using TimeDelay Setting Audio Levels The audio meters in the Record Panel include sliders that allow you to control the audio level as you record Click and drag the audio level controls to the desired record level for each audio track Similar controls in the Player panel allow you to control the playback level of the audio TDelay_tdx TimeDe
176. file machine saved by Resource Manager are used for that machine If no defaults have been saved factory defaults are used To save the current work environment in a project file in the current working directory e Choose File Save To open an existing project file e Choose File Open You can also specify a project file name when you start the Tool Box Editor from a command line tbxedit exe myproject tbx To create a new project file e Choose File New You are asked to save the current project file if necessary and then if you are connected to a local machine the Tool Box Editor caches media and is set up using a default configuration If you are connected remotely you are also asked which machine to connect to in the Connect to Machine dialog box To save an existing project file under a different name e Choose File Save As 210 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Connecting to a Remote Profile Machine Connecting to a Remote Profile Machine You can connect from your local machine to any remote Profile machine in your network A local Profile machine refers to a Profile system to which you are directly attached A remote Profile machine refers to a Profile system that is connected to your local system via an Ethernet local area network LAN To connect to a remote Profile machine 1 Choose File Remote Machine The Connect to Machine dialog box appears The label Local appears after the name of the local
177. g deleting bins 98 deleting an archived clip 114 deleting clips and masters 99 duplicating media 98 emptying recycle bin 100 exporting a cartridge 116 formatting cartridges 120 icons 92 importing a cartridge 114 inventorying the Library 119 library cartridge and clip properties 122 moving media 95 renaming an archived clip 114 renaming clips and masters 99 restoring a bin or clip from archive 113 starting and exiting 88 tape transport status 125 toolbar 94 Tools menu 89 Transfer Monitor 127 updating and inventorying cartridges 117 using a Library System 112 126 viewing properties 101 103 viewing the hierarchy 92 Media properties 101 214 Profile Family 313 314 Index Memory 303 Menu 17 303 Meters audio 226 Microcode 170 194 Microphone 207 Min Lum Q 137 Modify Mark In button 216 Modify Mark Out button 216 Monitor 303 selecting 236 Monitor Channels 82 Monitor output 63 Monitoring a list 240 Motion JPEG 22 Mouse 303 Moving media in Media Manager 95 MPEG 21 105 303 MPEG encoders assigning 178 N Name column 239 Network host list add or remove machine 90 Networking video 197 New Bin 213 New clips 154 New Master 213 Normal 148 Normal vertical interval 54 Notch 51 54 NTSC 23 304 O Odetics 25 131 Off line cartridge 304 onfiguration files creating 180 Open Bin 213 Opening a list 249 Out marks 149 164 Output mapping 79 Overload status 69 P P picture 305 Profile Famil
178. g Audio Outputs J12 Outputs 1 4 Name Analog Out J12 Analog Oute12 Analog Outs12 Analog Out12 Close Dliiele Help Figure 32 Analog Audio Output dialog box Main tab 2 Click the Main tab if it is not already visible 3 Click in the box of the output channel whose name you want to change A channel name can have up to 30 characters 4 After you have changed channel name s click Close or another tab 3 March 2000 Profile Family 73 Y Chapter2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager To change line modes for the XLR connectors 1 In the Analog Audio Output dialog box click the Line Mode tab Figure 33 Analog Audio Outputs J12 Outputs 1 4 A A Figure 33 Analog Audio Output dialog box Line Mode tab 2 In the Line Mode box you have three options Balanced default unbalanced Pin 2 Low or unbalanced Pin 3 Low The illustrations of the XLR connectors to the left of the box give visual cues of the selected mode 3 After choosing a line mode or modes click Close or another tab 74 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Analog Audio Output To trim the line level 1 In the Analog Audio Output dialog box click the Line Level tab Figure 34 es Analog Audio Outputs 1 4 Board J12 Group Fader Figure 34 Analog Audio Outputs dialog box Line Level tab 2 The line level range is 12 to O dB If you trim the line level for an individual channel with the slider h
179. g Profile Utilities To create a configuration file 1 Select the video input codec or encoder and video output you wish to add to the configuration file and click the Add Video button If you wish to assign more than one video codec to a channel repeat the process If you select a JPEG codec a dialog box appears similar to the one shown in Figure 109 Select a compression setting for your recordings and click OK 2 Select one or more audio inputs The output that corresponds to each input is automatically selected Click the Add Audio button 3 Select timecode input tracks and output and click Add Timecode Repeat the process for each timecode resource you wish to add 4 Click the Create File button to save the file When the Save As dialog box appears enter a file name that your application will use when it opens the port The configuration file should be stored in the default C profile configs directory and must have a cfg extension For example you must create vtrl cfg vtr2 cfg etc files for use with the PRC 100 5 Choose OK to write the configuration file You have now completed creating a configuration file for your Profile Protocol application Use this file when you open the desired port from the application such as the PRC 100 You should create as many files as you require for your application Configure JPEG 525 Line Compression EA f 50000 Bytes Field 75000 Bytes Field 700000 Bytes Field Figur
180. g the channel To resume playback after a pause click either the Pause button or the Play button in the paused Playback Panel 290 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Working with Timecode Working with Timecode When TimeDelay channels are configured one our more timecode tracks can be connected to timecode sources including external VITC and LTC signals or an internal timecode generator As with all TimeDelay channel resources the number of timecode tracks in each playback channel should match the number of timecode tracks in the record channel Since TimeDelay panels have a single timecode display they can only display timecode from a single source at a time The Select Timecode Source dialog box shown in Figure 173 allows you to select from multiple timecode sources Select Timecode Source TimeDelay panels can only display timecode from a ingle source at a time This source ie also used for the Auto Start operation Eana Timecode Sources Buffer Position Default GenLock ITC Ind1716 Figure 173 The Select Timecode Source dialog box To select a timecode source 1 Choose Config Timecode Source to open the Select Timecode Source dialog box 2 Select the name of the appropriate timecode source from the Timecode Sources list which is drawn from the record channel s timecode sources The Buffer Position item allows you to show the record play position relative to the beginning of the record bu
181. gee VALLEY GROUP User Guide software release 3 2 O71 0517 01 MARCH 3 2000 PROFILE Family SYSTEM SOFTWARE Copyright Trademarks Disclaimer U S Government Restricted Rights Legend Revision Status Copyright 2000 Grass Valley Group Inc All rights reserved Printed in the United States of America This document may not be copied in whole or in part or otherwise reproduced except as specifically permitted under U S copyright law without the prior written consent of Grass Valley Group Inc P O Box 59900 Nevada City California 95959 7900 Grass Valley GRASS VALLEY GROUP Profile and Profile XP are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Grass Valley Group in the United States and or other countries Other trademarks used in this document are either registered trademarks or trademarks of the manufacturers or vendors of the associated products Grass Valley Group products are covered by U S and foreign patents issued and pending Additional information regarding Grass Valley Group s trademarks and other proprietary rights may be found at www grassvalleygroup com Product options and specifications subject to change without notice The information in this manual is furnished for informational use only is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment by Grass Valley Group Grass Valley Group assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may ap
182. ger Analog Composite Video Output Vertical Interval The Vertical Interval tab brings up the analog composite video output vertical interval controls that determine how the vertical interval signals are handled 1 Click the Vertical Interval tab to view the vertical interval controls The vertical interval line numbers change depending on the selected video standard see Figure 22 Analog Composite Video Output J11 Composite Out4 11 Kain VYerical Interval Field 1 Video Line Frocamp Enable 8 e ow e 8 Bo fo Default VITC ial Pass VITC Pass Video Video Field 2 Video Line Frocamp Enable VITC Enable Pass Video Figure 22 Analog Composite Video Input Vertical Interval tab 2 Click in the boxes for each line to enable Procamp the settings are the same as the regular video VITC Gf VITC Generator Enable is selected or to Pass Video through All or none of the options can be selected for each line The default buttons for Procamp VITC and Pass Video reset these specified values back to the factory presets NOTE If the Pass Video box is not checked the input video is replaced with black Do not check Pass Video for VITC lines as Pass Video overrides VITC insertion 3 Click Undo to return the values in the dialog box to their original settings 4 Click Close to accept the changes 62 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Analog Composite Monitor Output Analog Composi
183. gh it does not automatically switch 6 Click Undo to return the values in the dialog box to their original settings 7 Click Close to accept all inputs 52 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Analog Composite Video Input Time Base Correction Analog Composite Video Input Time Base Correction The Time Base Correction tab is available only on the newer analog composite cards To select the settings 1 Click the TBC Selection tab see Figure 16 Analog Composite Video Input J5 4 Composite In4 J5 SP Seip siers 23 felsic Figure 16 Analog Composite Video Input dialog box Time Base Correction tab 2 When you select Time Base Correction you can select either composite input or Super VHS SVHS or S video input There are two channels available for the most recent analog composite video input board If Time Base Correction is selected in channel A channel B is unselected and vice versa 3 Click Undo to return the values in the dialog box to their original settings 4 Click Close to accept all inputs 3 March 2000 Profile Family 53 F Chapter2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager Analog Composite Video Input Vertical Interval For earlier analog composite cards the controls under the Vertical Interval tab sets how the vertical interval signals are handled This tab is visible only if you have an older card in your Profile unit For the most recent cards the vertical interval settings are handled under
184. han 10 and Chan 12 for the Record Audio Audio channel pair selection must follow these rules The playback record audio channel pair must be sequentially numbered For example Chan 1 and Chan 2 or Chan 14 and Chan 15 The playback record pair must be with the same channel group Channels are grouped as sets of four Chan 1 through 4 Chan 5 through 8 Chan 9 through 12 and Chan 13 through 16 The playback is assigned to the first selected codec in the pair record is assigned to the second selected codec in the pair For example playback assigned to Chan 14 and record assigned to Chan 15 NOTE There must be two audio channels assigned for each audio track to be recorded 5 Select two pairs of timecode For example select TCREC 5 and TCREC 7 for the Playback Timecode and TCREC 6 and TCREC 8 for the Record Timecode 6 If any other selections are highlighted click to deselect them 7 Select the video compression to be applied see Setting Compression Presets on page 137 for more information on video compression and the presets 8 Click OK 9 Choose Controller Comm Port to open the Communication Port dialog box see Figure 74 on page 132 3 March 2000 Profile Family 139 Chapter4 Using VdrPanel 10 Select the RS 422 communication port to be used for the edit controller for example P3 The Port name is the same as the name on the RS 422 breakout box 11 Click OK 12 Verify th
185. hange as you enter the new name Names can be up to 30 characters and can include spaces To return a renamed signal to the default delete all the characters in the text field and press Enter 3 Under Overwritable Video Standard click either 525 Video Standard or 625 Video Standard If you change this standard you must restart all tools that use this channel The video input board can serve both standards but the input can only accept one at a time 4 Select a VITC reader setting If you to use Automatic VITC Detect the disk recorder uses the range set in the From and To lines to look for the VITC signals If Automatic VITC detect is not used the disk recorder expects to find the VITC signals on the VITC Reader Line 1 default 10 or Line 2 default 40 If the signal is found the VITC Present indicator is turned on NOTE Input must be auto timed to use automatic VITC detection Input must also be auto timed when using DVCPRO25 codecs independently 3 March 2000 Profile Family 55 da Chapter2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager 5 To change Input Gain Adjustment move the slider to the desired value The range is from 70 percent to 140 percent 3 dB for the input signal for both 525 and 625 When you click on Default the Input Gain Adjustment resets to the default value 100 percent 6 If you want video input auto timed click Enable Auto Timing Auto timing determines if the input is synchronized to the reference gen
186. hannel that it represents Setting a Playout Delay To set a playout delay enter the delay duration in the Playback Panel s Playout Delay edit box The minimum playout delay is five seconds the maximum delay is five seconds less than the current record buffer size TimeDelay automatically adjusts playout delays that are too large or too small to the closest valid value Starting a Playback Channel Immediately To immediately start a playback channel 1 Start the TimeDelay process 2 In the appropriate playback panel click the Play button Starting playback with the Play button overrides the delay time Once the channel begins playing the delay time is automatically adjusted to reflect the difference between the record and play positions Modifying a Playout Delay To modify a playout delay after the TimeDelay process has started 1 In the Playback Panel click the Stop button The playback channel stops and shows black 2 In the Playout Delay edit box enter the new delay value 3 Click the Play button The playback channel restarts immediately with the new delay Pausing Playback To pause playback click the Pause button in the Playback Panel for the channel that you wish to pause The playback channel s output pauses As the time difference between the record position and the paused playback position increases the playout delay value also increases until it exceeds the maximum playout delay automatically stoppin
187. hat the vertical video line is passed through Blank indicated that line the group are blank 5 Under Noise Reduction earlier analog composite cards only the controls enable and set various noise reduction methods Click Enable Luma and Chroma Reduction This applies the Level and Threshold settings to use a feedback noise reduction scheme on the decoded input signals after they have been separated into chrominance and luminance The Level and Threshold sliders determine the amount of weight the feedback signal has in comparison to the input signal The Threshold range takes into consideration the amount of motion in the picture Use the sliders to adjust the ranges Be sure Enable Luma and Chroma Reduction is checked for the reduction values to be applied Click Enable Quiet Line if desired This acts as a noise reference If the Quiet line is noise free the rest of the signal should also be noise free This allows the decoder to not mistake noise for motion If the Quiet Line is enabled the line values for Field 1 and Field 2 are used Use the sliders to set the line values for each field Click on Default Lines to return to the default values Enable Impulse Noise Reduction automatically filters out noise spikes such as amplifier crackling NOTE If reduction of impulse noise is selected the disk recorder automatically switches the clamp speed to slow It is recommended that you use the spatial adaptive decode option althou
188. have completed your search 104 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Using the Transcode Utility Using the Transcode Utility If you have DVCPRO codecs or if you have MPEG encoders or decoders in your Profile disk recorder you may have media recorded in one compression format that you want to convert to a different compression format The Transcode Utility is a tool that makes format conversions easy The Transcode Utility converts media files clips and masters in six ways From JPEG to JPEG using a different video quality From JPEG to MPEG From MPEG to MPEG using a different video quality From MPEG to JPEG From JPEG to DVCPRO 25 or DVCPRO 50 From DVCPRO 25 or DVCPRO 50 to JPEG From DVCPRO 25 to DVCPRO 50 From DVCPRO 50 to DVCPRO 25 NOTE Converting a low quality video clip to a higher quality higher bit rate will not improve the video quality of the clip though it will consume more disk space The Transcode Utility is started from the Tools menu in Media Manager 3 March 2000 Transcode Utility File Edit Help ee Convert Preview Target Format Target Quality r Medium Delete source after conversion Remove Figure 53 Transcode Utility window Profile Family 105 da Chapter 3 Using Media Manager To convert clips or masters 1 Select one or more clips or masters that you want to transcode in Media Manager s contents pane 2 In Media Manager choose Tools Transcode The Transc
189. he OK button When you close the Resource Manager dialog box a new playback panel is displayed in the TimeDelay window Deleting a Playback Channel To remove a playback channel 1 Choose Config Resource Manager to open Resource Manager 2 Click on the channel tab that you want to remove 3 Click the Remove Channel button to delete the selected channel tab 4 Click the OK button When you close the Resource Manager dialog box the panel that corresponded to the removed channel is no longer displayed in the TimeDelay window Because TimeDelay always needs a record channel and at least one playback channel Resource Manager will not let you delete the record channel or the last playback channel 3 March 2000 Profile Family 283 Y Chapter 11 Using TimeDelay 284 Profile Family Resource Manager VAHLAB1 SAEN Timecode n A Track 1 C None gt J SDl In J14 C SDl InB J14 C SDl In J15 C SDl InB J15 Figure 169 The Resource Manager dialog box CI None EJ SOl OuteJ14 C SOl Outb J14 C SO1 OutaJ15 C SDl OutE J15 3 March 2000 Configuring Channels with Resource Manager Changing a Panel s Name To change a panel s name 1 Select Config Resource Manager from the TimeDelay menu 2 Select the tab name that needs to be changed 3 In the Name edit box type a the new name Names may be up to 32 characters long and may consist of any alphanumeric characters Channel names shoul
190. he clip To move the current position cursor click anywhere on the capture timeline The updated timecode is displayed in the indicator as you move the cursor To adjust a clip s mark in or out point move the current position cursor to the desired location and then click on the Modify Mark In or Modify Mark Out button The mark in and mark out timecode indicators are displayed on either side of the capture timeline The mark in and mark out markers on the capture timeline indicate where these marks lie on the clip To move the mark in or mark out grab the mark in or mark out marker on the capture timeline by clicking on it with the left mouse button and holding the button down while you move it 3 March 2000 Capturing a New Clip To bring up the timecode entry window click in a timecode indicator and then press plus sign minus sign on the keypad or equal sign on the keyboard To add to a timecode click inside a timecode indicator press and the timecode entry window appears Enter the desired value in the form 00 00 00 00 and press Enter Only numbers need to be typed The value is added to the timecode To subtract from a timecode click inside a timecode indicator press and the timecode entry window appears Enter the desired value in the form 00 00 00 00 and press Enter The value is subtracted from the timecode To change the value of the timecode click inside a timecode indicator press and the timecode entr
191. he first column of Figure 36 are mapped to the first four disk recorder channels Ch 01 Ch 04 while digital channels 9 12 Input 09 Input 12 in Figure 37 are mapped to another four disk recorder channels Ch 09 Ch 12 In another example channels 1 4 may be mapped to analog channels 5 8 mapped to AES EBU and so forth In addition analog and AES EBU audio types have an assigned one to one mapping to their respective channels that is input 1 always maps to channel 1 input 2 to channel 2 and so on Serial digital embedded audio contains sixteen audio channels grouped into four groups of group Grp1 may be assigned to channels 1 4 Ch1 Ch4 5 8 Ch5 Ch8 9 12 Ch9 Ch12 or 13 16 Ch13 Ch16 However a maximum of two of the four groups from 78 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Input Clocking Input Mapping The Input Mapping tab is used for mapping input channels to Profile disk channels The channels must be mapped to an audio type analog SDI or AES EBU at all times there is no unmapped state for input mapping However channels may only be mapped to one audio type at a time Analog and AES EBU channels must always be mapped directly to the same physical channel numbers To map input channels ee 1 Choose Option Audio Configuration Board 1 or 2 or click an ASPB Configuration button The Audio Configuration dialog box appears Figure 36 2 Click the Input Mapping tab 3 Click on a but
192. ic VITC detect is not used the disk recorder expects to find the VITC signals on the VITC Reader Line 1 default 10 or Line 2 default 12 If the signal is found the VITC Present indicator is turned on Line and Line 2 cannot be more than 14 lines apart NOTE Input must be auto timed to use automatic VITC detection Input must also be auto timed when using DVCPRO25 codecs independently 5 If you want video input auto timed click Enable Auto Timing Auto timing determines if the input is synchronized to the reference genlock signal The disk recorder records time base corrected video whether or not it is also locked to the reference If auto timing 3 March 2000 Profile Family 57 F Chapter2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager is enabled and the signal was able to be timed into the system the Auto Timed indicator is turned on For more information on auto timing see Auto Timing on page 42 6 Click Enable Dithering if the incoming signal is 10 bit resolution This will produce the best quality result The LSB artifacts on 10 bit video feeds are reduced There is no effect if the incoming signal is 8 bit 7 Click Undo to return the values in the dialog box to their original settings 8 Click Close to accept all inputs 58 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Serial Digital Component Video Input Advanced Serial Digital Component Video Input Advanced The Advanced tab allows you to determine whether the EDH Erro
193. icates the number of video and audio tracks in the record channel A Video status light turns red when the corresponding video track is not receiving a signal An audio status lights turn red when the audio input signal peaks and has to be clipped Show Hide Meters ButtonExpands the panel to show video and audio meters Video Audio Meters The video meter shows the record channel s data rate relative to the maximum rate Audio meters show the audio input level in dB 294 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Menus Menus TimeDelay menus include the following File View Config Hel Remote Connection Connect to a remote Profile unit Remote Ieorinect Import Imports the resource settings from an existing Import TimeDelay project but keeps the current machine Open connection Save OR s Save As Open Opens an existing TimeDelay project file previously saved by TimeDelay with a tdx file extension Set Drive Save Buffer Ag Save Saves the TimeDelay project file All TimeDelay project files receive a tdx file extension If the project Exit file has not been saved before Save works like Save AS Save As Saves the currently open TimeDelay project file with a new file name Set Drive Selects a different disk volume for the record buffer Save Buffer As Save the record buffer as a PDR movie Exit Closes TimeDelay View Contig Help Single Column Displays all the playback panels below the record pane
194. idge is prepared to accept new data To format one or more cartridges 1 Select the cartridge icon or icons in the tree pane 2 Choose Format from the File menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click The Format dialog box appears see Figure 64 The Name field shows the name or names of the cartridges to be formatted If more than one cartridge is selected the number of cartridges is shown see Figure 65 Format 00000016 x Name 00000076 Single Partition Multiple Partitions Partition Duration 2 minutes Anticipated Wideo Quality Broadcast 46 Mbits Anticipated Audio Quality fi 6 bits M Multiple files per partition OF Cancel Help Figure 64 Format Cartridge dialog box 120 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Formatting Cartridges Format Multiple Cartridges Fa ee 4 cartridges selected Single Partition f Multiple Partitions Partition Duration 2 minutes Anticipated Video Quality Broadcast 46 Mbits Anticipated Audio Quality fi B bits M Multiple files per partition OF Cancel Help Figure 65 Format Cartridge dialog box 3 Click Single Partition or Multiple Partitions With a Single Partition the cartridge or cartridges will have one partition when formatted and all clips are archived to the same partition With Multiple Partitions the cartridge or cartridges will have two or more partitions depending on other settings You do no
195. iguring resources 259 283 connecting to a remote machine 280 launching 278 menus 295 playback panel 294 project file 278 record panel 293 3 March 2000 Timeline capture 216 edit 223 Timeline Eject 213 Timing Adjustment 65 Tool Box Editor 31 129 207 configuring resources 259 exiting 208 launching 208 Tool Tips 307 Toolbar 34 Media Manager 89 Toolbar buttons 94 Tracks 307 Transcode Utility 105 Transfer Event 246 Transfer Monitor 127 Transport controls cue 218 fast forward 218 loop play 218 mode 218 play 218 reverse 218 rewind 218 stop 218 Transport status 125 Tree hierarchy 92 Trigger Follow 248 Trim from Out Mark 149 Trim to In Mark 149 Trimming 307 Type box 147 U Undo button 34 Unity audio 227 Unlocking clips 158 Update Fibre Channel Microcode 32 194 Update Firmware 32 192 Updating a cartridge 117 User mark 220 Using 173 3 March 2000 V Validating a list 241 VDR Panel shortcut keys 150 VdrPanel 30 129 VdrPort logs 174 Vertical Interval 54 62 Video channels 21 crosspoints 141 Gain 61 input 21 input and output 262 Video disk recorder server 307 Video interface 307 Video network 21 197 Video resources configuring 259 Video router 22 307 Viewing columns 238 VITC 37 133 142 272 307 erase 65 Generator Setting 65 reader setting 43 VITC detection 24 Volume 87 93 168 307 VTR 19 22 207 W Window Open Panel 139 Timecode Crosspoint 144 Video Crosspoint 141 Windows NT 4
196. ile see Project Files on page 210 If there is no project file present you will automatically connect to the local machine Otherwise you will go to the Connect to Machine dialog box see Figure 116 To exit the Tool Box Editor e Choose File Close A message box is displayed asking you to confirm that you really want to exit the application Click on the Yes button to confirm the exit or the No button to cancel the quit command Configuring Resources You must configure video audio and timecode resources before using Tool Box Editor You configure resources with Resource Manager To start this tool e Choose Config Resources For instructions on using Resource Manager see Using the Resource Manager on page 23l 3 March 2000 Profile Family 209 da Chapter Using the Tool Box Editor Project Files You can save your work environment into a project file tbx A project file stores allocated resources and the current bin Saving your environment eases the transition of set ups between users A descriptive project title is displayed in the title bar of the Tool Box application including the current machine name and channel A project file contains the following information for the last Profile machine connected to e What the last machine was e The Resource Manager configuration e The current bin If you connect to a new remote Profile machine during a session the default settings for that Pro
197. ing is based on references in the file c profile edr_isp all Do not alter this file in any way as it may lead to incorrect programming of parts To update firmware 1 Close any applications that may be running on the system 2 Ata command line type vdrsvc stop and then press Enter This stops the PDR Access Service 3 Choose Start Programs PDR Debug Tools Update EDR Firmware or double click the Update EDR Firmware icon A window appears 4 The program warns you to shutdown any applications that may be running and to stop the PDR Access Service If you have already done so as instructed in steps 1 and 2 type Y Otherwise type N and return to step 1 C profilesisp exe Copyright tc Altera Corporation and Tektronix Inc 1997 ISP Embedded Processor Code v1 86 ISP reprograms Altera parts on the EDR and MHE boards This could have an adverse effect on the 1968 if applications are running Please shutdown all applications and stop vdrsvyc Cudrsuyc stop gt before proceedin q Continue with ISF program Yy Hn Figure 112 Update Firmware window 5 The update procedure steps through the reprogramming of the components giving progress information as it proceeds It retries up to three times to reprogram parts in the event of verification errors After reprogramming all parts a summary is provided that describes what has been done 192 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Updating Firmware 6 If parts h
198. ion 26 Shuttle Bar 10 Normal 25 Go to Clip 11 Loop Beginning 12 Bounce 24 Back One 13 PB EE B Aii 23 Forward 14 Clip Group One Field Position Bar 15 Remove In ES ES alesis 22 Go to Mark 2 Clip End 16 Set In Mark 17 Trim to 18 Trim from 19 Set Out 20 Remove 21 Group Name In Mark Out Mark Mark Out Mark Box Figure 84 Panel dialog box 1 The Type box shows the type of pictures I for I frame B for Bidirectional and P for Predictive B and P apply only to MPEG pictures An I frame picture or Intra picture is analogous in JPEG MPEG and DVCPRO and so applies to all 2 The Size box shows the number of bytes stored for the current field The more detailed the picture the higher the number of bytes Target compression rate is set in the Edit Presets dialog box accessed from Controller Configure See Configuring a Controller on page 133 3 The Timecode box is the current timecode of the selected clip To configure timecode refer to Setting Timecode on page 142 For example when you use slow motion replays from several camera angles the timecode can free run or freeze Clicking on the Timecode box brings up the Go To Timecode dialog box Entering a new timecode value and clicking OK moves a clip to a specific timecode location If there is no 3 March 2000 Profile Family 147 F Chapter4 Using VdrPanel recorded timecode VdrPanel displays a timecode calculated from the curre
199. is selected The selected location may even be in another Media Manager window The tree pane will automatically scroll when dragging a bin to the very top or bottom of the tree If you hold down the Ctrl key when you drop the item the item is copied to the new location not moved Dragging a clip or a master to a different machine or volume always results in a copy the original clip is not deleted When copying or moving clips to a new location if a clip or master with the same name already appears at that location you will be prompted to change the name or cancel the operation as shown in Figure 47 3 March 2000 Profile Family 97 Y Chapter 3 Using Media Manager Confirm Copy E3 P 0 28 97 already appears at this location Shar Fi TOU may rename or skip this file or may replace the existing file Lancel f 0 28 97 _1 Help Rename All Rename Replace Figure 47 Confirm Copy dialog box Duplicating Media To duplicate media means that you copy a clip or master and the underlying media files that the clip or master reference A normal copy operation between locations on the same Profile machine does not copy the associated media files only references to those media files NOTE You can play clips or masters with VdrPanel or Tool Box Editor while Media Manager is duplicating the clip or master This is only practical for longer media To duplicate a clip or master 1 In the contents pane select the cli
200. ist 249 saving a TimeDelay project 279 SCSI 22 306 IDs 168 log file 172 SDI 306 SECAM 306 Select timecode 142 Serial Digital Component Video Input 57 Output 65 Serial port 132 306 Service PDR Access Control 191 Set In Mark 149 Set Out Mark 149 Settings event 238 Short clip names 159 Shortcut keys VDR Panel 150 Shuttle Bar 149 Shuttle Rate 149 150 Size box 147 SMPTE 272M Level A 23 67 Software Development Kit 25 32 Sorting media files 212 Sorting media 212 Source 306 Spatial Adaptive 51 Start Time 239 Starting an application 29 starting TimeDelay 278 Status bar 34 306 Status Bar Media Manager 89 Status column 238 Stop 148 Striping a clip 159 Subclip 220 Subnet mask 200 Switch event 245 System timing 39 Profile Family for DVCPRO 43 System timing E to E 39 T Take button 252 Target compression rate 137 TC Recorder 142 TCP IP 198 TCREC 139 TekCfg 25 TekPdr 25 TekRem 25 TekVdr 25 TekVfs 25 TekVme 25 TekXfr 25 Temporal Spatial Adaptive 51 Testing a bad block 171 Text insertion point 306 Time base correction 53 Time Till Next Event in Monitor view 240 Timecode 142 147 crosspoint 144 display 147 drop frame 146 216 entry window 217 free run 142 freeze 142 internal generator 272 lock to field number 142 Timecode Resources changing generator settings 274 choosing codecs and generators 273 configuring 271 Timecode Source 306 TimeDelay 31 277 296 auto start 287 configuring channels 283 conf
201. ist Manager Scheduling Rules and Constraints Rule 1 Absolute events always start at the scheduled time e Of multiple absolute events inserted at the same time the last inserted absolute event is the one that is scheduled e If an event s end time overlaps an absolute event start time that event is shortened so that the absolute event starts on time Rule 2 An approximate event always cues if it is the next event in the time line e A cued approximate event is de cued 150 frames prior to the start time of an absolute event see rule 1 e Approximate events remain in the list during their aging process The aging process allows approximate events to stay cued past their start time Allow at least fifteen seconds for a channel to switch between record and playback The 15 second gap is used in the following manner 5 seconds for queuing 5 seconds for de queuing and 5 seconds to account for transition gap Allow at least 10 seconds between starting a recording on one channel and playing that clip on another channel The 10 second delay allows the material to exist at least 5 seconds prior to queue time In the situations described here use absolute events rather than approximate events because the rules for approximate events allow them to exceed the constraints 244 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Using a Live Feed Using a Live Feed To further automate station operation you can integrate live feeds into your lists Fo
202. ist Manager also lets you record incoming video at predetermined times or send incoming video directly to an output You can also set up times to switch a live connection transfer media between Profile systems connected via Fibre Channel or even archive a clip on a library unit You can combine these functions to increase the automation level of your station operations See Figure 130 NOTE Profile system software version 3 X supports JPEG and DVCPRO List Manager Overview The Profile List Manager works with events Each event is a task or operation that List Manager performs on a clip or a master or on incoming video List Manager uses a software engine called the Event Scheduler Engine to schedule your lists It runs behind the scenes and does all the actual work of playing and recording clips at the appointed times This low level software starts automatically when you start the List Manager and continues to run for the rest of that Windows NT session even if List Manager isn t running If you need to stop the Event Scheduler for any reason click the minimized Event Scheduler icon then type exit on the command line and press Enter List Manager lets you schedule playback record switch transfer and archive events A playback event lets you play a clip or master at a designated time while a record event allows you to record material at a given time A switch event schedules a live connection input and output are connec
203. it is a new clip being recorded Start Time You can enter the time at which you wish to play the specified material Enter the time in standard timecode format HH MM SS FF If the time entered consists of one or two digits not separated by colons List Manager displays the entry as a number of seconds not frames For example if the time entered is 25 List Manager displays 00 00 25 00 Leading zeros are ignored that is 0025 is interpreted as 00 00 25 00 Duration The duration of the playback event is set by the duration of the media If you change the duration to one shorter than the media s duration List Manager will play the material from the mark in point for the specified duration If you enter a longer duration List Manager plays the material from the mark in point to the last mark out point then freezes on the last frame for the rest of the duration Comment The Comment cell displays the name of the master or clip which you dragged into the window You can change this to a title more meaningful to you However this will not change what clip or master is used nor will it change its name Optional Columns These are the columns that you can add to the window to provide you with additional event information Action When you drag material into the List Manager window Action is set to Play The possible actions are Play Record Switch Transfer and Archive These options are described in later in this chapter Even
204. ith either the slider bars or arrow buttons The corresponding numeric values are displayed in the text boxes Video Gain raises or lowers the overall amplitude of the video signal It has a range of 50 to 200 percent of nominal Chroma Gain changes the amplitude of the chrominance portion of the signal to change the color intensity It has a range of 50 to 200 percent of nominal Black Level sets the voltage level of the reference black level This is expressed in mV in the PAL video standard and in IRE units in NTSC The range in the PAL standard is 140 to 140 mV The range in the NTSC standard is 20 to 20 IRE Chroma Phase sets the colors by varying the phase of the chrominance subcarrier The range is 45 to 45 Luminance Black Clip Level is the point where the procamp clips the luminance portion of any video that drops below this level For PAL the range is 150 mV to 0 mV and 20 IRE to 7 5 IRE or 0 IRE if pedestal is not selected in the NTSC standard Luminance White Clip Level follows the same logic only it clips any luminance above the set threshold Its range in the PAL standard is 700 to 909 5 mV and 100 to 139 5 IRE in the NTSC standard Default Procamp resets the Procamp to the factory defined levels 7 Click Undo to return the values in the dialog box to their original settings 8 Click Close to accept the changes 3 March 2000 Profile Family 61 F Chapter2 Using the Profile Configuration Mana
205. ither request a resource that is available or free the resource that you want from its other use Resource Manager uses color coding to indicate the status of a resource If a resource such as a video output is in use its listing is dimmed grayed out If you request a resource that is in use its listing turns red indicating a conflict Resource Manager also uses Tool Tips to provide additional information about resources that are in use When you hold the cursor for a short period of time over a resource that is in use gray or in conflict red a Tool Tip appears with status information about that resource Tool Tips do not appear for resources that are available When the resource is being used by another of the applications that use Resource Manager the Tool Tip supplies the name of the application using the resource and the Profile unit or PC on which that application is running see Figure 162 Video Output s lt None gt Figure 162 Tool Tip showing an external user When the resource is being used by the application in which you are currently working the Tool Tip simply lists the channel that is using the resource as shown in Figure 163 Video Output s Figure 163 Tool Tip showing an internal user When the resource 1s being used by an application that does not use Resource Manager such as VDR Panel the message in the Tool Tip says only In use as shown in Figure 164 Video Output s Figur
206. ized to the reference genlock signal The disk recorder records time base corrected video whether or not it is also locked to the reference If auto timing is enabled and the signal was able to be timed into the system the Auto Timed indicator is turned on For more information on auto timing see Auto Timing on page 42 6 Click Enable Dithering if the incoming signal is 10 bit resolution This produces the best quality result The LSB artifacts on 10 bit video feeds are reduced There is no effect if the incoming signal is 8 bit 7 Click Vertical Blanking to enable vertical blanking When enabled for the 525 standard lines through 9 and 264 through 272 are blanked for the 625 standard lines 1 through 5 311 through 317 624 and 625 are blanked 8 Adjust the input gain on the syncs to compensate for any losses in the input You can 48 Profile Family 3 March 2000 9 10 3 March 2000 Analog Composite Video Input adjust the gain manually or with earlier cards click AGC Automatic Gain Control which enables the internal quality monitoring circuit to automatically adjust the gain to keep the sync level constant To adjust the gain manually move the slider to the desired value The range is from 71 to 141 percent 3 dB of the input signal For earlier cards the range is from 45 to 142 percent 3 dB of the input signal for NTSC and 82 to 142 percent for PAL When you click Default the Input Gain Adjustment resets
207. king With the TimeDelay Project Profile Family A TimeDelay project includes the resource configuration for record and playback channels as well as application specific information like single or two column view current timecode source and information used for crash recovery This project information is stored in a file that uses a tdx file name extension When you start TimeDelay a default TimeDelay project is created Although it contains a record and playback channel the default project is not usable until you assign video and audio inputs and outputs with Resource Manager Once you save a TimeDelay project you can use the project file to start the TimeDelay application Launching a project file directly starts TimeDelay with the saved project settings 3 March 2000 Copying Project Files Between Machines Saving a TimeDelay Project To save a TimeDelay project 1 Choose File Save or File Save As This opens a standard WindowsNT Save dialog TimeDelay projects use the tdx file name extension 2 Chose a file name and file location for the TimeDelay project This can be anywhere on the WindowsNT network 3 Click the Save button Opening an Existing Project To open an existing TimeDelay project do one of the following e Double click a TimeDelay project file in the WindowsNT desktop e With TimeDelay running select File Open This opens a standard WindowsNT Open dialog which allows you t
208. l audio and video in memory or on a disk The process may involve converting an analog signal to a digital one Some compression of the digital data may be involved Cartridge tape A tape used in the library that stores video and audio in digital form CD ROM Compact Disc Read Only Memory the preferred medium for multimedia storage because of its large capacity high quality ease of use and low cost Channel A collection of video audio and timecode resources used for either playing or recording Chroma A term that describes the saturation or vividness of a color A chroma of O describes a neutral gray color Chroma ranges to the most vivid color a screen or printer generates for a specific hue and value See Hue Cleaning cartridge A special tape cartridge that cleans tape transports on demand 298 Profile Family 3 March 2000 3 March 2000 Clicking Quickly pressing and releasing the left mouse button usually without moving the pointer Clip A clip is a reference to recorded video or audio tracks from a single source and may include timecode If a clip includes both video and audio they must be synchronous A reference to several clips edited together is called a master Deleting a clip will delete its associated material only if that material is not used by another clip or master Clip position Clip position refers to the current location in a clip denoted by timecode CODEC CODEC is an acronym for Code
209. l in p EAn mii a single column When the column becomes too large for Two Columns the screen scroll bars appear to allow access to hidden panels Two Columns Displays the record and play panels in two columns as shown in Figure 175 2 Untitled Project TimeDelay File View Config Help Player Buffer Size 01 34 23 00 3 AN Stop Flayout Delay 00 00 05 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 2 Record or Figure 175 Two column display 3 March 2000 Profile Family 295 T Chapter ll Using TimeDelay Help Config Resource Manager Resource Manager Opens the Resource Manager dialog box for Timecode Source allocation of video audio and timecode resources and for adding naming and removing channels Auto stan Crash Recovery Timecode Source Opens the timecode display selection dialog box If the record channel has more than one timecode track this allows you to select the one for display in the record and playback panels Auto Start Opens the auto start setup dialog box Crash Recovery Turns on auto restore mode 296 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Glossary 3 March 2000 Access Time The time it takes to find and retrieve digital information generally from hard disk storage AES EBU Acronym for Audio Engineering Society European Broadcasting Union an industry standard for the transmission of serial digital audio information The standard specifies the physi
210. lay File Yiew Contig Help Butter Size 00 00 25 00 3 All Stop 00 00 00 00 Show Hide Record Auto Start motels DUNen m my Record level sliders Piayer 1 Playout Delay 00 00 20 00 Show Hide Meters button 0 00 Playback level sliders Figure 174 The audio level controls 292 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Using the Interface Using the Interface This is a reference section that describes the operating controls and menus found in the TimeDelay window It is divided into three sections the Record Panel the Playback panel and the Menus The Record Panel The following is an overview of the record panel controls Panel Name Displays the record channel name The default record channel name is Recorder You can change the channel name using the Resource Manager but in Resource Manager the first tab is always the record channel The record panel might shorten long channel names to fit in the display Buffer Size This edit box displays in timecode format the duration of the record buffer the length of material recorded before the buffer fills and starts recording at the beginning of the buffer This control allows you to set the duration of the TimeDelay buffer The minimum buffer size is 10 seconds The maximum buffer size is the recording capacity of the current record buffer volume By default the maximum buffer size is shown when TimeDelay is started Timecode Display Displays th
211. le Drop frame In NTSC you don t actually get 30 frames per second the real number is about 29 97 fps Timecode usually assumes 30 fps To account for the discrepancy drop frame timecode skips or drops two timecode values at the beginning of every minute except every tenth minute This allows timecode to exactly match a real time clock on 525 60 systems This correction is not needed on 625 50 systems because the frame rate is exactly 50 fps E to E EE Electronics to Electronics mode routes audio and video input directly to output 300 Profile Family 3 March 2000 3 March 2000 Edit The process of creating or refining a sequence of media clips in a specific order EDL An Edit Decision List is a list of events that include the source to be recorded and where to record it In addition an EDL can include information about transitions cuts dissolves wipes transition durations effects etc Factory default The value assigned to a parameter as delivered from the factory See Default Field A part of the total number of lines that represent a video image scanned in two passes For example an NTSC 525 line frame is divided into 262 5 line fields See Frame Firmware Software instructions that are permanently stored in the memory of a computer and are not lost when you turn the power off fps The abbreviation for frames per second the standard way of measuring the speed of video playback Thirty fps is con
212. lications See Starting and Closing Profile Applications on page 28 for more information NOTE Louth and Odetics RS 422 protocols are also supported although there is not a one to one correspondence between these protocols and the Profile API Louth and Odetics protocols do not allow you full access to the functionality of the Profile system 3 March 2000 Profile Family 25 da Chapter I Introducing the Profile Family What to Read First The order in which you should read the chapters of this manual depends on how you want to set up your Profile system e Before using your Profile unit you must first configure your video and audio boards Refer to Chapter 2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager e Once you have configured your video and audio boards and if necessary rebuilt your file system you are ready to capture and replay video and audio clips Refer to Chapter 4 Using VdrPanel e To configure your Fibre Channel board see Chapter 7 Fibre Channel Video Networking e To read Profile logs access your Profile system from a remote PC or attach a PRC 100 Profile Control Panel refer to Chapter 6 Using Profile Utilities e To learn how to manage media on disk or over Fibre Channel on a Profile network see Chapter 3 Using Media Manager e If want to use optional software applications see Chapter 8 Using the Tool Box Editor Chapter 9 Using the List Manager or Chapt
213. lock signal The disk recorder records time base corrected video whether or not it is also locked to the reference If auto timing is enabled and the signal was able to be timed into the system the Auto Timed indicator is turned on For more information on auto timing see Auto Timing on page 42 7 Click Enable Dithering if the incoming signal is 10 bit resolution This will produce the best quality result The LSB artifacts on 10 bit video feeds are reduced There is no effect if the incoming signal is 8 bit 8 Click Vertical Blanking to enable vertical blanking When enabled for the 525 standard lines through 9 and 264 through 272 are blanked for the 625 standard lines 1 through 5 311 through 317 624 and 625 are blanked 9 Click an appropriate format under Select Video Input Format 10 Click Undo to return the values in the dialog box to their original settings 11 Click Close to accept all inputs 56 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Serial Digital Component Video Input Serial Digital Component Video Input You can configure serial digital component video input with the Serial Digital Component Video Input dialog box The current status indicators shown at the top of the dialog box are Video Present VITC Present and Auto Timed The green light indicates that a particular status is on These indicators cannot be edited To configure serial digital component video input 1 Select Video Input on the configuration
214. log box appears see Figure 59 If you have two or more PLS 20 systems connected simultaneously you must enter a drive number when prompted Profile Family 3 March 2000 Importing a Cartridge Import Cartridge X Please enter the name of the cartridge om This name should match the cartridge s barcode Cancel f Verify the cartridge with its library entry Help C Do not verify the cartridge fast import Inventor the cartridge and update the library C Import unformatted cartridge C Import new cleaning cartridge Figure 59 Import Cartridge dialog box 3 Enter a unique label name number for the cartridge This name must match the barcode on the cartridge for example 00000015 If the label is not unique or matches a label already in the library the cartridge 1s rejected 4 Click a button to tell Media Manager how you want to import the cartridge If you want to verify the contents of the cartridge click Verify the cartridge with its library entry If the label barcode matches the one in the library and the directory entries match the cartridge is imported If the label matches but the directory entries do not the cartridge is rejected If the library system can find no record of the barcode label the cartridge is stored as an unknown cartridge For a fast import with no verification of the cartridge s contents click Do not verify the cartridge fast import As long as the label matches one i
215. log box for a cartridge ececcseseeceeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaeeeeseeeeeeeeneas 123 68 Properties dialog box for an archived clip ccccceeeeeeceseeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeesaeegeeeesaas 124 69 Tape Transport Status dialog DOX nssnannnnnnnnnennnennnnnnnnnernsnnnrnnennsrnrrnssnnrrrrressnnnn 125 70 Add Tape Transport dialog DOX nseeneenessennennnnnnessrnnernnnnssrrrrrrnrrrssrrrrrnnrrrssrrnrenn 126 71 Transfer Monitor dialog DOX c ccccccceeceeceeeeeeesaeeeeeeceseeeeeeeaaeeeeeseeeeeeaaeseesneageeeenaas 127 12 Vaani WOW srecni ESE AEE S AS ESAE EAT 130 ES Controller Setup dialog DOK aise see scietcetied cs es dete ne ccdetdene re cade vdccaath cnduedesteatutndde tence 131 74 Comm Port dialog a sag ct gst ste sacgs seen to see nennc doce sesuussnncoemses sues lt eeqqseceeutes sane sasenees 132 75 SetClp Marks dialog DOK coccisntg cho ceete cate sceeeh geet ack tasee tests cedenBaade ueceedoccesetectnacwacaesec acts 133 76 Profile Options dialog DOK sic sostccnets adace shersncsecndondecce aecisesasee ondot danse sdeas senehaessateps scenes 134 77 Profile Options dialog box with DVCPRO Selected c cesceceeeeeeeeeaeeeneeeeeeeees 134 78 Profile Options dialog box BVW insert edit only eee eee ee ceeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeees 135 79 Profile Options dialog box BVW insert edit only with DVCPRO selected 136 80 Edit Compression Presets dialog DOX ccccccccecsesseeeeeeeseeeeeeeee
216. ls that do not change from frame to frame It does so by relying on a GOP A GOP is composed of I frames B pictures and P pictures An I frame or I picture is analogous to a JPEG frame in that it is a self contained picture It does not use motion vectors as do the B picture and P picture See B Picture P Picture Input device A device that allows you to send information to a software application Typical input devices include keyboards mice tablets and trackballs See Pointer and Pointing Device Insert record mode In insert record mode audio and video material can be recorded independently New material can replace existing material anywhere in the program Insert record mode requires timecode on the destination 302 Profile Family 3 March 2000 3 March 2000 Interface A common connection that is used for sending or accepting information and control between programs and machines Keyboard An alphanumeric input device that allows communication with software applications Library system The Profile Library System PLS 200 is a robotic tape library that provides affordable mass storage for the Profile video disk recorder LTC Longitudinal Time Code is typically an analog audio track or a dedicated address channel on a tape LTC cant be read in still mode and may not be reliable during low speed shuttle operations Media files Audio video and timecode sources that have been captured by the Profile disk re
217. ly error items in the Transfer Monitor the error logo appears without animation The Network tab divides entries into four columns source destination percent complete and average megabytes per second When copying source and destination paths are constructed using the machine volume bin clip names A destination clip name may be different from the source clip name 1f the clip was renamed when pasted or moved to the new location which has to be done when a clip with the same name already appears at the new location The Library tab divides entries into four columns operation source destination and percent complete Library operations that occur in the background include archive restore inventory update format delete import clean and export The destination column is only 3 March 2000 Profile Family 127 F Chapter 3 Using Media Manager filled in for the archive and restore operations The percent complete column will show Pending while a cartridge is being loaded into a transport and cued to the correct tape position NOTE Only network library archive and library restore transactions can be cancelled To interrupt a transfer do the following 1 Click the Network or Library tab depending on the type of transfer you wish to interrupt 2 Select the transaction you wish to interrupt 3 Click the Cancel Transaction button This button is unavailable unless the transaction is highlighted The label for this but
218. mat mm dd yyyy Time field both start time and the duration will be in the format Hour Min Sec Frames or Hour Min Sec Frames Allowed event actions are Play Record Switch Archive or Transfer For play and record events the Clip Name Start Time Start Date Duration Comment will be saved in the list text file For a switch event Start Time Start Date Duration Comment will be stored in the list text file For Transfer event source Profile Machine Name or IP address destination Profile 250 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Importing a List Machine Name or IP address source media and the destination media will be stored in the text file For Archive event Cart Label Clip Name Partition Number and the Option Keep Delete clip after archiving will be saved Here is a sample list file in ASCII text format Play event The format is Action Clip Name Start Time Duration Type Start Date Comment Play INT Default River Rafting 05 10 20 00 00 01 30 00 Absolute 027027 T997 River Rarting Record event t The tomat is Action Clip Name start Time Duration Type t Start Date Comment Record INT Default Pepsi commercial 05 10 20 00 00 01 30 00 Absolute 02 02 1997 Commerciall Switch event The format is Action Start Time Duration Type Start Date Comment Switch 05 10 20 00 00301230700 Absolute 02 02 1997 Coke Archive event tIhe format is Action Start Time Du
219. me For example on a traditional VTR it might take you an hour to stripe a one hour clip But with VdrPanel you can stripe a one hour clip in a matter of minutes To stripe timecode on a previously recorded clip 1 Choose VideoClip Stripe Clip and the Stripe Timecode dialog box appears Stipe Time Code starting time code oo foo oo foo hr min sec frm User bits oo0o0000 Cancel Figure 93 Stripe Timecode dialog box 2 Enter the timecode you want to start the clip with in the form 00 00 00 00 3 Enter up to eight digits to mark the clip with user bits 4 Click OK when complete Setting Long or Short Clip Names Long clip names display the full path name of the clip for example INTI default clipname Short clip names display only the clip name Clip names are shown in Clip Name box in a Panel To set the clip name to be short or long e Choose Options Display Short Name or Options Display Long Name NOTE This setting only applies to the current panel Each panel can have a different setting for clip name length Ejecting All Clips To eject all clips 1 Choose VideoClip Eject All Clips 2 All clips in the Clips box in the Panel are ejected immediately 3 March 2000 Profile Family 159 T Chapter4 Using VdrPanel Deleting a Clip To delete a clip 1 Choose VideoClip Delete Clip to open the Delete Clip dialog box Delete Clip Drive INTI default select clip s to be delete
220. mes from the data set select volumes from the Selected Volumes list and click Remove 3 Choose File Make Data Set or click Make Data Set Setting a Disk Label To set a disk label 1 Choose File Set Label or click Set Label The Set Label dialog box appears Set Label Curent Label INT New Label Pe Figure 100 Set Label dialog box 2 Enter the new label name in the New Label box The label name can have up to seven characters and can contain only alphanumeric characters 0 9 a z or A Z dashes or underlines _ 3 Click Set when complete 168 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Formatting a Disk Volume Formatting a Disk Volume Formatting disks organizes them so the Profile system can write data to and read data from them in an orderly way All media disks come preformatted from the factory gt gt gt CAUTION Formatting disks removes all media and other data from the disks Format disks only when absolutely necessary To format a disk l 2 3 3 March 2000 Select the desired physical volume with the tab in the lower pane Select the desired disks Choose Disk Utilities Format Disk s or click Format The Format Disk s dialog box appears If disks are non Seagate you can select a block size The estimated time remaining to format the disk or disks is displayed Click Format on the dialog box to continue formatting the disks Format Disk s Block Size ANSE
221. mes on all machines connected to the Fibre Channel network or they won t be seen by Media Manager For information on how to use Media Manager see Chapter 3 Using Media Manager on page 87 You will not automatically see the other machine on the network For example if you are running Media Manager on PROFILE1 you will only see PROFILE1 l 3 4 Choose File Add Remove Machine The Add Remove Machine dialog box appears The Local label follows the name of the current machine PROFILE1 Click on the computer name for the other Profile machine you want for example PROFILE2 Click Add Click OK For more information on connecting to remote Profile machines see Connecting to a Remote Machine on page 90 You can now copy or move media from one machine to another In addition you can play a clip or master with VdrPanel or Tool Box Editor while the media is being moved or copied to another machine 3 March 2000 Profile Family 203 Chapter 7 Fibre Channel Video Networking Using the Listhames and Copymovie Commands The listhames command line utility provides a way to list media on a remote Profile without using Media Manager Valid arguments are datasets or volumes groups or lists and media Dataset names are case sensitive That means that INT and int would be considered different datasets The two arguments for listnames are e start_arg list media based on a starting argument start_arg
222. mings and deletions since the last update If you inventory the tape before you update it any changes to the tape since the last update are effectively lost To update one or more cartridges 1 In the media tree or contents pane select one or more cartridge icons 2 On the File menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click click Update Since the update takes several minutes to complete you are asked to confirm the operation as shown in Figure 61 Confirm Update Are you sure you want to update OOO0001 2 The cartridge may be unavailable for some operations while it is being updated Figure 61 Confirm Update dialog box 3 Click Yes to update the cartridge or cartridges 3 March 2000 Profile Family 117 da Chapter 3 Using Media Manager To inventory one or more cartridges 1 In the tree or contents pane select one or more cartridge icons 2 Choose Inventory either from the File menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click Since the inventory takes several minutes to complete you are asked to confirm the operation as shown in Figure 62 Confirm Inventory Are vou sure you want to do a full inventory of QO00001 2 The cartridge may be unavailable for some operations while it is being inventoried Figure 62 Confirm Inventory dialog box 3 Click Yes to inventory the cartridge 118 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Inventorying the Library Inventorying the Library There are
223. n Manager SAVING a GOMMOUTA NON FE sess cies spate a a acundee 35 Oa Ina COMMGURAT OMG Ie wiie con sake ohc Cacia alata a 36 SEUNG MaASler JbINNC COC 24 5 ducsecen sceneries de rege bes cress ie heee ad Wares oiled Bstoe sees Sects eae 37 Seng THe SYVSIEND TNN apse sdecsntcesds lear tcasd sad tcsen diesel acd nude atesests vacdee sche Reade eeniees 39 i 0 ea TMd OUDOIN ee ere een eee ee een 41 PRUE STM MIN O red ete Lcet ace gh ets oo oe saree ate Goau nacdea a en od nas vcuintaind a hgh ahaa uaa aaeee beets 42 DVCPRO System Timing Considerations cccceccceceesseseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeseaeaeeees 43 Setting the Reference Genlock cccccccccssseeceeeeceeaeeeeeececeesaeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeeeessaaaeees 43 Changing LTC Input and Output Names cccccccseeececeeeseeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeseeseesaesseeeeaaaaaeeseeees 45 Using DVGPRO COdECS saesae cori cetices eace tear te tees Selatan eceneioee 46 Video MDU bonia eta avons detanelaaudsedectuesaadeon tented ices veces eater mas aan avhea dla Waaeat ei dtetmannciens 47 Analog Composite Video Input cccccccseeeeeceeeesseeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeseeseeeseaeeeeeseeaaeseeseesseaeees 47 Analog Composite Video Input Advanced Control c cceceececeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeaaaee ees 50 Analog Composite Video Input Time Base Correction ccccceeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeeaeaeeees 53 Analog Composite Video Input Vertical Interval ccccsecec
224. n the library the cartridge goes directly into an available slot If the library system can find no record of the barcode label the cartridge is stored as an unknown cartridge To inventory the cartridge click Inventory the cartridge and update the library The cartridge is loaded into a transport and its contents are inventoried The database is updated if it did not match what was inventoried To import an unformatted cartridge click Import unformatted cartridge The cartridge is put into the first available slot and appears in the media tree with an unformatted cartridge icon To import a new cleaning cartridge click Import new cleaning cartridge The library system cannot differentiate between a cleaning cartridge and an ordinary cartridge It must be told when a cleaning cartridge is imported If you provide a unique tape label the cleaning cartridge is stored in a cleaning cartridge bin 5 Click Import 6 A prompt appears requesting that you physically insert the cartridge into the library Once the robot is in position and you insert the cartridge press any button on the library s control panel 7 The Importing Cartridge dialog box remains on the screen until the robot puts the cartridge in the available slot Since this is done in the background click OK at any time When the robot retracts with the imported cartridge it scans the cartridges s barcode If the barcode does not match the name that was entered for the im
225. nd Audio Input and then click one of the Digital Channels to bring up the Digital Audio Input dialog box Figure 29 The channel numbers on the left refer to the physical input connectors on the audio input box Ch 01 and Ch 02 refer to the channel pair on the first connector and Ch 03 and Ch 04 refer to the pair on the second connector and so forth Digital Audio Inputs J12 Inputs 9 12 Name AES EBUAn92 AES EBUAn1 0 12 SES EBLHm1 1 12 SES EBLHm 212 Close Iiei Help Figure 29 Digital Audio Input dialog box Main tab 2 Click the Main tab if it is not already visible 3 Click in the box of the input channel whose name you want to change A channel name can have up to 30 characters 4 After you have changed the channel name or names click Close or another tab 70 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Digital Audio Input To check the status of digital input channels 1 In the Digital Audio Input dialog box click the Status tab Under Status Indicators you see the error status of each channel If a channel has an error the indicator is on See Table 2 for a description of each error indicator Digital Audio Inputs J12 Inputs 3 12 Figure 30 Digital Audio Input dialog box Status tab 2 When you are done checking for errors click Close or another tab Table 2 Digital audio input channel indicators Indicator Description S Unlocked Error Receiver unlocked Validity Error AES recei
226. ndard composite color format used in North America and Japan that was developed by the National Television Standards Committee Off line cartridge The archive library has immediate access of up to 80 cartridges However the library database can contain information about any number of cartridges A cartridge is considered off line when it has been ejected from the library storage device but remains in the library database PAL The Phase Alternate Line standard is used to encode color information in Western European composite video Panel TimeDelay The graphical representation of a channel The record panel shows controls for the record channel A player panel shows controls for a play channel Partitions To give the archive tape transports some degree of random access a data cartridge is divided into an number of partitions Media may be added to a partition until that partition is full Deleting media from one partition does not affect any other partition Parameter A variable that is given a specific value This value is passed to a program before execution Pixel The smallest part of a display memory that can be addressed Playback Playback is the act of playing a clip track or master loaded on a machine at any rate Playback delay The amount of time that the playback channel is behind the record channel Pointer The pointer allows you to make selections in menus to size and position windows and icons and
227. nes in the vertical interval If VITC Generator Enable is selected VITC is placed on the lines given in VITC Generator Line 1 and 2 If you only want one line use the same number for both If VITC Erase Enable is selected it removes any VITC that may have been recorded previously Without enabling VITC erase previous VITC may or may not be overwritten so it is best to enable it The range of lines is determined by the Start and End values 4 Under Timing Adjustment you can set the timing of each output with respect to the reference genlock internal reference timing which in turn is set with respect to the external reference input house black With the reference genlock timing set to the factory default of 0 the outputs have an adjustment range of 2 5 lines to 148 lines of delay The Fine delay is in pixels and the Line delay is in lines 5 Click Undo to return the values in the dialog box to their original settings 6 Click Close to accept the changes 3 March 2000 Profile Family 65 Y Chapter2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager Serial Digital Component Video Output Advanced To change error detection settings for serial digital video output 1 Click the Advanced tab to view the Serial Digital Component Video Output Advanced settings see Figure 26 Digital Component ideo Output J5_A SDI Out J5 Figure 26 Serial Digital Video Output dialog box Advanced tab 2 Click Insert EDH Packets to inse
228. nes the action during Stop or Record If you select Playback the recorded image is displayed as a still during Stop and audio is silenced If E to E is selected the input signal is routed through to the display during Stop or Record The Clip Position Bar displays the relative position of the current frame within the current clip For example if the Clip Position Bar is to the far left the frame is at the beginning of the clip 1f it is at the far right the frame is at the end Click on the bar to activate it or press j or The Remove In Mark button removes the in mark and restores the clip to its first available field The Set In Mark button sets the in mark for the current clip at the current timecode you can also press 1 When the clip is played it starts at the in mark instead of the clip beginning however the portion before the in mark is not lost Use Remove In Mark to remove the in mark The in mark only affects this instance of the clip If the clip repeats in the clip list or is used by another panel this in mark is not automatically present The Trim to In Mark button removes the portion of the current clip preceding the in mark you can also press c This action affects all copies of this clip on all panels The trimmed material is not retrievable A warning message and verification prompt are displayed before the material is trimmed The Trim from Out Mark button removes the portion of the current clip following the o
229. nfig Record Buffer and the Record Buffer dialog box appears The maximum record time reflects time allocated to all activated buffers and time allocated to the channel and available record time on the Profile unit Record Buffer Record Buffer Length BE mir o SBC Cancel Mas Record Time 103 min 7 sec Figure 125 Record Buffer dialog box 2 Enter the length of the record buffer and click OK E 3 Click BUF in the upper right corner of the screen to activate this feature When activated the button is lit 4 Follow the steps in Capturing a New Clip on page 217 Playing a Clip Now that you have recorded a clip you can play it back 1 Select a clip in the current bin 2 Choose Load from the Media menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click You can also click on the Load button on the current bin toolbar The clip is loaded onto the capture timeline 3 Click on the Play button You can also drag and drop a clip onto the capture timeline To drag and drop a clip 1 Select a clip by clicking the left mouse button while the mouse pointer is over the desired clip and hold the button down 2 Drag the clip to the capture timeline and release the mouse button 3 March 2000 Profile Family 219 220 Profile Family da Chapter Using the Tool Box Editor Trimming a Clip Trimming a clip means changing the mark in and or mark out points so that the clip duration becomes shorter To t
230. ng and Inventorying Cartridges cccccccccceeeessseeeeceeeeeaseeeeeeeseesseeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeees 117 Inventorying the Library sacctesaste asics eacoanteaiaac os cece alaceusxacecancilonctaensdendettorwniteesauneweeteassemeeuanie 119 Formatting Cartridges coieseccecoce astaceaccasateceacecisssaavaceocnsnssose EE aA iE Eai eean EEES 120 Viewing Library Cartridge and Archived Clip Properties 0 cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 122 Viewing Tape Transport Status ccccccccesccceceeseesseeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeesaeeeeeeeeeesaeaaeeseeeeaaaees 125 Viewing the Transfer Monitor cccccscccceescecseeeceeeeeeeeeecseeseeeessseeeseaeeesssececsaeeessaseensaees 127 Using VdrPanel Selecting a Controller eee 131 Selecting a Communications Port cceceeeseeeeeceeeeaeeeeeeeeseesaeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeseeaaeeeeeeeees 132 Selecting Clip Length BVW Only c ceceececeeeeceeeeaeeaeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeeteeeeeeeeeenseeaes 133 CONMOUMITICr a COMMOUET wtedesicacinsiun arsctaainlersienenteanonia tunes let ialiatadoncmetionmiiotedaeataaudas 133 Setting Compression Presets ctecteecindccsecicdcoiencebadauseceudentatecseaeartoen aheesteadateceenuetnyeateceiess 137 3 March 2000 Setting up BVW insert edit EMUlatiON ec cccceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeaaeeeeeeeeseeneseeeeeeens 139 SEUNG IM OULMIM ONES os cccs sists E ead Bes saa Gee eawcx nace 140 Selecting Video ClOSSDOINS seresa eE 141 Seno Meco CC eae a E EE 142 Sele
231. ng on the channel type different codec or encoder decoder information 1s displayed below the configuration tree as listed in Table 15 Table 15 Channel types Channel Type JPEG DVCPRO Player Recorder Codec resource Player Codec resource Codec resource Recorder Codec resource Codec resource 3 March 2000 Profile Family 259 Y Chapter 10 Using the Resource Manager Type Player Recorder ha H EG Figure 146 Choosing a channel type 3 To add a video track click the Add Track button and the Add Track dialog box appears H see Figure 147 Click Video then select JPEG DVCPRO 25 or DVCPRO 50 depending on the type of track you want Click Add when done The new video track icon will appear in the configuration tree NOTE A channel cannot have tracks with different video formats you cannot mix JPEG DVCPRO 25 and DVCPRO 50 tracks To change the video format you must first remove all existing video tracks before adding a track of the desired format Add Track Ea r Add track of type Wideo Audio Timecode Cancel Help Figure 147 Add Track dialog box for video In the Video Quality list box select a video quality if you want something other than the default Medium The higher the quality the more disk space is used NOTE Custom quality settings are not applicable with DVCPRO 25 or DVCPRO 50 To make a custom quality setting click the button next to the Video
232. nitially connects to the machine that was selected in the Media Manager s machine list box If the application is not installed an error occurs Viewing and Hiding the Toolbar and Status Bar By default the toolbar is visible To hide it Choose View Toolbar To make it visible again choose View Toolbar again By default the status bar is visible To hide it Choose View Status Bar To make it visible again choose View Status Bar again To refresh the tree and contents panes Choose View Refresh or press F5 Viewing Help and Software Version Information To view Help topics on Media Manager Choose Help Media Manager Help Topics To view program and software version information and copyright 3 March 2000 Choose Help About Media Manager Profile Family 89 da Chapter 3 Using Media Manager Connecting to a Remote Machine You can connect from your local Profile machine to any remote Profile machine You can also connect remotely from any PC running Windows NT 4 0 and Profile System Software A local Profile machine refers to a Profile system to which you are directly attached A remote Profile machine refers to a Profile system that is connected to your local system via an Ethernet local area network LAN The Hardware Communication Monitor makes calls to the disk recorder manages the contents of the Profile host file profile hst owns connections to the machines listed in the host file
233. nnnnnannnnnnnnnennnnni 62 Analog Composite Monitor Output dialog box Main tab ccccceesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeae ees 63 Analog Composite Monitor Output dialog box Burn in Timecode tab 006 64 Serial Digital Component Video Output dialog DOX cc ccceeeccceeeeeceeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeees 65 Serial Digital Video Output dialog box Advanced tab cccccceeeeeeessseeeeeeeeeeeeeens 66 Analog Audio Input dialog box Main tab cccccesseeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeseeseeseeaaess 68 Analog Audio Input dialog box Line Level tab ice ceececeeeeeeceeeeeee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeae ees 69 Digital Audio Input dialog box Main tab cccccecceeecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeesueseeeseaaeeeees 70 Digital Audio Input dialog box Status tab ce ccecceeeeceeeeseeeeeseeeeesesseeeeseeaaeeeeeees 71 Digital Audio Input dialog box Sample Rate Converter tab ccssseceeseeeeeeeeee ees 72 Analog Audio Output dialog box Main tab cccccecsceeeeceeeeeseeseeeeeeeaaaeaeeeeeeeanaesees 73 Analog Audio Output dialog box Line Mode tab cccccecceceeseeeceeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeaeees 74 Analog Audio Outputs dialog box Line Level tab cc eeccecsesseeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeanees 75 Digital Audio O tputdialog OX ceceno a nee 76 Audio Configuration dialog box Input Mapping tab cccceseccessseeeeeseeseeeseeaeeeees 77 Audio Configuration dialog box Output Mapping tab a00
234. nt position 00 00 00 00 or above Go To Timecode Enter time code Cancel Figure 85 Go To Timecode Dialog Box 4 The Play button runs the selected clip at normal speed If there are multiple clips in the clip list Play starts with the first selected clip and proceeds through the list Normal Loop and Bounce modes determine how the clip or clip list is played 5 The Stop button halts the current Play shuttle or Record function 6 The Rewind button shuttles the clip backwards to the beginning the first available field or in mark of the selected clip Use Go To Clip Beginning or enter a timecode value in the Timecode box to move directly to the beginning without shuttling 7 The Record button starts storing the incoming video as JPEG or DVCPRO streams and audio under the selected clip name If no clip is selected a default clip name pound sign followed by a number is assigned See Defining a New Clip on page 154 The record process continues until the disk decoder runs out of storage space or you click another command button such as Stop Recording does not start unless there is a video signal assigned to the selected panel and there is disk storage available 8 The Fast Forward button shuttles the clip forward to the end Use Go to Clip End or enter a value in the Timecode box to move directly to the end of the clip without shuttling 9 The Field Selection button selects a one field or two field
235. o format for each video channel For example you could enable analog audio on one channel embedded audio on another and AES EBU on the rest NOTE Do not turn off sample rate conversion or use AES EBU as a reference unless you are certain that all inputs and outputs are synchronous 3 March 2000 Profile Family 67 Y Chapter2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager Analog Audio Input In analog audio input you can change audio channel names check the channel overload status or adjust line levels in decibels Click Undo to cancel changes or click Help for context sensitive Help To configure analog audio input 1 Expand Audio Input and then click one of the Analog Channels The Analog Audio Input dialog box appears Figure 27 The channel numbers on the left refer to the physical input connectors on the audio input box Ch 01 refers to the first connector and Ch 02 refers to the second connector and so forth Analog Audio Inputs J12 Inputs 1 4 Mame Analog tnt 12 analogine Analogna O analogine Close Unda Help Figure 27 Analog Audio Input dialog box Main tab 2 Click the Main tab if it is not already visible 3 Click in the box of the input channel whose name you want to change A channel name can have up to 30 characters 4 After you have changed the channel names click Close or another tab 68 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Analog Audio Input To trim the line level or view
236. o select an existing TimeDelay project file Launching a Project at Start up To automatically launch a TimeDelay project at start up 1 Configure and save a TimeDelay project 2 Add the name of the TimeDelay project file to the end of the pdrstart bat file Pdrstart bat is a start up script that is installed with the Profile software By adding the project name to the start up file you ensure that TimeDelay will not attempt to run until all Profile services have been initialized at start up Copying Project Files Between Machines Once you create a TimeDelay project file you can copy it to any number of machines or open it remotely There are several issues to consider e When you copy a project to and run it on a PC rather than a Profile unit the project still references the original machine name No matter which PC launches the project TimeDelay connects to the same machine A better alternative is to use File Import to import another project s configuration information then save the project again to create a project file that has a different machine name e When you copy a project to and run it on a Profile unit the machine name stored in the project does not matter TimeDelay always connects to the local machine What should be considered is different machine capabilities 3 March 2000 Profile Family 279 Y Chapter 11 Using TimeDelay Connecting to a Remote Profile Unit You can run TimeDelay on any PC that
237. o the storage size of the 4 gigabyte hard drives in the PDX 103 3 March 2000 Profile Family 167 Y Chapter 5 Using the Profile Disk Utility Creating a File System A file system is created for all media disks before a Profile disk recorder is shipped from the factory You can set up a file system any time you need to build or rebuild your system NOTE If you are upgrading a PDR 100 to version 2 1 or later of system software from version 1 4 XX or earlier you must rebuild your file system Information on the disks is shown in the upper left panel of the Profile Disk Utility window information such as physical volumes data sets number of disks and disk size Additional information is shown in the lower pane SCSI IDs of each disk serial numbers vendor names number of blocks block sizes model numbers revision numbers bad blocks medium errors read errors and write errors A volume consists of a set of physical disks such as an array of eight internal disks in a Profile disk recorder or in a PDX 208 Disk Expansion Chassis A data set is a group of disks that can consist of one or more volumes The data set name is the name that appears in VdrPanel Media is striped across all disks in the data set To create a file system 1 Select a data set from the Current Data Set box For example Data Set J int 2 Select the volumes to be included in the data set from the Available Volumes list and click Add To remove volu
238. ode Utility dialog box appears with the selected media in the transcode list 3 You may add more clips or masters to the transcode list by dragging them from Media Manager and dropping them on the list You can also transfer media using Copy and Paste commands 4 In the Convert tab select the target format DVCPRO 25 DVCPRO 50 MPEG or JPEG If you select DVCPRO 25 or DVCPRO 50 skip to step 7 NOTE When DVCPRO is the target format you cannot change video quality or make a custom quality setting because the DVCPRO quality setting is fixed at 25 Mb s 5 In the Video Quality box select a video quality if you want something other than the default Medium The higher the quality the more disk space is used 6 To change a custom quality setting click the button next to the Video Quality list box and the Custom Video Quality Settings dialog box appears Select either Custom1 or Custom2 in the Video Quality list box When selected you can change the name of a custom setting Click Undo to cancel changes and OK when done For JPEG see Figure 54 and Table 6 select a video quality with the slider You can move the slider with the mouse or arrow keys For MPEG see Figure 55 and Table 7 select a chrominance value either 4 2 0 or 4 2 2 Then move the diamond on the grid or click the High Medium Low or Draft button the corresponding bit rate and picture structure is shown on the right side of the dialog box NOTE You can e
239. of the clip or master e The length of the media in the form 00 00 00 00 Hours Minutes Seconds Frames e The compression format of the media JPEG MPEG DVCPRO 25 or DVCPRO 50 e The date and time the media was last modified in the format 12 2 94 9 40 PM Month Day Year Hours Minutes AM PM fe Untitled Media Manager File Edit View Tools Help Ea co _03 E Profile Network CDX_O3 Local E ProfileT oolbosT emp T ey Recycled ten pim pim pim pln piim pim pim pim piy pim piim Figure 45 The Media Manager tree pane The icons shown in tree pane are explained in more detail here The Profile network icon is the root for all other items in the tree pane Profile machines Each icon is labeled with the Profile machine s name A Profile can be a local machine or one connected via Ethernet alone A Profile machine connected via Ethernet and Fibre Channel An unconnected machine icon Appears if no connection could be made This icon cannot be expanded 92 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Viewing the Media Hierarchy amp A non Profile server that recognizes Media Manager connection requests Media may be copied to this server from other machines on the Fibre Channel network A volume A machine s storage is divided into one or more volumes The volume icon represents a physical set of disks either an internal disk set and external expansion box such as the PDX 208 or a RAID disk a
240. on Software developers can use the API to control the Profile from third party hardware devices for example The API consists of seven libraries e The TekCfg library provides an interface to the Profile configuration e The TekPdr library furnishes calls that inventory and manage movies in Common Movie Format CMF an internal file format standard for video audio and timecode e The TekRem library makes it possible for a remote Windows NT system to control a Profile disk recorder over an Ethernet LAN e The TekVdr library provides an interface for playing and recording video and audio clips e The TekVfs library supports low level access to individual media files in the media file system e The TekVme library controls the optional video mix effects board e The TekXfr library supports media streaming of Fibre Channel connections Eight RS 422 serial ports come standard on a disk recorder A disk recorder can issue serial commands or receive them from an external device via RS 422 communication lines The Profile Protocol associates each API call with a specific number that can be sent over an RS 422 line The ProLink application monitors Profile Protocol calls over an RS 422 link allowing you to use compatible hardware devices such as the PRC 100 Control Panel to issue commands to a Profile unit Windows applications are also available to control the Profile system Your disk recorder comes with several standard and optional app
241. on Background or White on Background 6 Click Undo to return the values in the dialog box to their original settings 7 Click Close to accept the changes 64 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Serial Digital Component Video Output Serial Digital Component Video Output To open the Serial Digital Component Video Output dialog box 1 Select Video Output from the configuration tree and then click or double click a digital component output from the list such as SDI OutA J5 The Serial Digital Component Video Output dialog box appears see Figure 25 Digital Component ideo Output J5 4 SDI OutA J5 VITC Generator Setting C VITC Generator Enable 10 24 Line 1 fio Line 2 SE ONARAN fiz Hame 5D Out J5 ITC 50 0 utA JEVITC Timing Adjustment Line Fine fo fo D VITC Erase Enable 10 ed Default Close Oraa Hep Figure 25 Serial Digital Component Video Output dialog box 2 Enter a new name in the Name box to change the signal name For example 1f the signal named SDI OutA J13 is a dedicated signal to a main switcher you could rename it to Switcher_l The VITC name automatically tracks the signal name Names can be up to 30 characters and can include spaces To return a renamed signal to the default delete all the characters in the text field and press Enter 3 Under VITC Generator Setting you can place VITC vertical interval timecode on specified lines and or erase li
242. on dialog box 2 Click Auto hosts administration for TCP IP name lookup When selected the PDR Network Configuration Service fencs exe automatically administers the file c winnt system32 drivers etc hosts 3 Click Use TCP Checksum When selected a checksum is used to aid in error checking 4 Click Enable Multicast if the Fibre Channel Multicast option is installed and you want to enable it This checkbox is dimmed if the option is not installed Disabling the option even though it is installed can be done to avoid unintentional file transfers or the need to manage the feature if it is not in use 84 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Setting Up Fibre Channel Networking 5 Click Enable Switch to enable the Fibre Channel driver to communicate with Fibre Channel switches This box should be checked if your Profile unit is directly connected to a Fibre Channel switch fabric 6 The Hostname box shows the name of the Profile host with a unique Fibre Channel identifier appended to it in this case _fc0 7 Enter dotted decimal IP address in the box provided Contact your network administrator for an appropriate address The IP address must be different than the Ethernet address for the machine Click Clear to erase an entry 8 Enter a netmask in the box provided A netmask can help speed routing of network traffic Click Clear to erase an entry Based on the address you use for a netmask there is an implicit netmask but you can ov
243. on that you want to archive Hold the left mouse button and drag the selected icon to the partition icon in the tree pane where you want to archive the bin or clip 4 If you want to check on the progress of an archive operation click on the Profile logo or choose Tools Transfer Monitor to view the Transfer Monitor Restoring a Bin or Clip To restore an archived clip means to copy it from a partition in a cartridge in the library system to disk Clips are always copied out of the library when restored they are never moved To restore an archived clip using the copy method 1 In the tree pane click the cartridge icon from which you want to restore a clip This expands the tree pane to reveal the partition icon or icons 2 Click the partition in the tree pane from which you want to restore to reveal the clips in the contents pane 3 In the contents pane select the archived clip you want to restore To extend the selection press Shift Up Arrow or Shift Down Arrow Choose Edit Select All or Ctrl A to select all the media in the contents pane 4 Choose Copy on the Edit menu or from the shortcut menu with the right click You can also click the Copy button on the toolbar 5 Select the location where you want to restore the archived clip This can be a bin or anywhere in the contents pane when a bin is selected The selected location may also be in another Media Manager window 6 Choose Paste on the Edit menu or from the short
244. onal XLR216 or BNC216 Digital Interface chassis You can choose an audio format for each video channel For example you could enable analog audio on one channel embedded audio on another and AES EBU on the rest There are several video boards that allow a Profile video server to be used with various standard video formats composite analog serial digital component or component analog video are all possible All boards accept 525 or 625 NTSC or PAL video standards 3 March 2000 Profile Family 23 4 Chapter 1 Introducing the Profile Family The latest analog composite input and output board offers two input and output channels per board The two output channels for this board are similar to the output channels of the original analog composite board An analog composite monitor board allows you to display text and burn in timecode on an output monitor The component analog input allows dithering auto timing and vertical blanking As with other inputs you can automate VITC detection You can adjust input gain and also select an input format such as Betacam A serial digital component board provides two channels of both input and output plus embedded audio when used with an ASPB You can also enable dithering auto timing and automate VITC detection The board also has error detection and handling The standard reference genlock board allows you to time your Profile server to other devices in a broadcast facility You can lock a
245. or Legal characters are a z A Z 0 9 lt gt Use _ underbar for transparent space 6 To clear entire monitor click Clear Display Click the button again to display text once more Under Windows NT 3 51 this button appears as a check box 7 Click Undo to return the values in the dialog box to their original settings 8 Click Close to accept the changes 3 March 2000 Profile Family 63 F Chapter2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager Analog Composite Monitor Output Burn in Timecode To display burn in timecode 1 Click the Burn in Timecode tab to bring up the controls for displaying burn in timecode on the monitor see Figure 24 Analog Composite Monitor Output J12 4 Monitor Out4 J12 Start Column Large Window Size C Black On White White On Black Show Hide Window Black On Backgroud Default Cl rie Hel C White On Backgroud i pa Wee eip Figure 24 Analog Composite Monitor Output dialog box Burn in Timecode tab 2 To display timecode on an attached monitor select Show Hide Window 3 To display a large timecode window select Large Window Size 4 Under Window Position select the Start Row and Start Column for the timecode with the sliders This determines where the timecode is displayed on the monitor screen The current row and column are displayed on the right 5 You can display the timecode in one of four formats Click on Black on White White on Black Black
246. order To aid in the timing setup all video inputs have auto timing circuits which time the input video to the internal timing reference as long as the input video is within the auto timing sync window 2 lines for the latest boards from 0 5 to 3 5 and 1 lines for all others The auto timing circuit is always trying to lock to the signal If you try to auto time a signal outside of the window the video signal appears to be broken up as it cannot be timed into the system If the input drifts out of range it is retimed as soon as it drops back into range The disk recorder can use untimed signals if auto timing is not enabled but they are not timed correctly and may cause jumping and skipping when switching between playout and E to E mode NOTE If you select auto timing for an input signal and it cannot auto time with the genlock reference signal the input signal is not recorded accurately If you must record an input that cannot lock disable auto timing and then record There may be problems if you are operating in E to E mode but the clip plays back correctly timed If auto timing is enabled and the signal is able to be timed into the system the Auto Timed indicator is turned on Also for serial digital component input Line 1 can still be adjusted but Line 2 is always equal to Line 1 14 42 Profile Family 3 March 2000 DVCPRO System Timing Considerations DVCPRO System Timing Considerations The Profile DVCPRO 25 code
247. overload status l 3 March 2000 In the Analog Audio Input dialog box click the Line Level tab Figure 28 Analog Audio Inputs J12 Inputs 1 4 Line Level Overload 12 Chol cho cho ee Ch 04 Group Fader Close Urda Help Figure 28 Analog Audio Input dialog box Line Level tab The line level range is 12 to 12 dB If you trim the line level for an individual channel with the slider handle the line level is incremented by 1 dB clicking on either side of the slider handle increments the line level by 0 5 dB The Level boxes show the current line level If you enter a number directly into a Level box the line level number is rounded to the nearest 0 5 dB To adjust the trim for all channels at once use the Group Fader slider While the Group Fader moves all channels at once it maintains the individual channel differences If a channel is overloaded the Overload indicator is on This means that the incoming audio is clipping After you have adjusted the line levels click Close or another tab Profile Family 69 Y Chapter2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager Digital Audio Input In digital audio input you can change channel names check the status of channel errors and change the setting of the sample rate converter Click Undo if you want to cancel any changes or click Help for context sensitive Help To configure digital audio input 1 Expa
248. oves on to the next block NOTE The following tests are nondestructive Testing bad blocks determines whether a bad block error is really a physical problem with the disk or just a nonrepeatable read error that can be ignored If the error is nonrepeatable the block may be removed from the bad blocks list Otherwise the block will be reallocated To test bad blocks e Choose Disk Utilities Test Bad Blocks or click Test Bad Blocks To relocate bad blocks e Choose Disk Utilities Relocate Bad Blocks or click Relocate Bad Blocks NOTE You must read the detail log SCSI log to view the results of these tests See The Detail Log on page 172 3 March 2000 Profile Family 171 Y Chapter 5 Using the Profile Disk Utility The Detail Log The detail log scsi log records the history of everything that happens on a disk and helps you track problems with disks For example when you relocate or test bad blocks you must read the detail log to see the results To open and read the detail log 1 Choose Disk Utilities Detail Log or click Detail Log The Detail Log dialog box appears 2 Click Close when done checking the log information Detail Log Figure 103 Detail Log dialog box NOTE Scsi log is a binary file you cannot view it with WinTail See Viewing Profile Logs on page 173 for information about viewing other Profile logs 172 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Chapter 6 Using Profile Utilities
249. ow A tool tip is hidden most of the time appearing only when the user puts the cursor on a tool and leaves it there for approximately one half second The tool tip appears near the cursor and disappears when the user clicks a mouse button or moves the pointer off of the tool Tracks Clips and masters are made up of individual tracks A clip may consist of any combination of a video track timecode track and up to 16 audio tracks A master may consist of any combination of a timecode track 0 4 video tracks and 0 16 audio tracks Trimming Shortening an originally recorded media file to a desired duration using the In and Out marks Material beyond the In and Out points is removed from the volume unless it is used in another clip or master Video interface The link to or from the internal video router and the external video signal An example is acomposite analog input channel This path takes a composite analog video signal and converts it to 8 bit component parallel digital and places it on the video router Another example is the component serial digital output This path takes component parallel digital video from the video router and converts to serial digital component format Video disk recorder server A device such as the PDR 200 Video File Server that stores audio and video as digital information on disks VITC Vertical Interval Time Code is encoded into the video lines at the start of field VITC can be read during still
250. p name in the Clip Name text box or simply accept the default The default name automatically increments to a unique name With a right click in the text box you can choose from several editing commands Clip Name Text Box Figure 123 Clip Name text box 4 Click on the Record button You can also choose Record from the Media menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click 5 When you are done recording click on the Stop button See Figure 124 Loop Reverse Rewind Fast Forward Stop Play Play Figure 124 Transport controls The transport controls are e Loop Play Plays the active timeline at normal speed When the end of the media is reached play begins again at the beginning of the media e Reverse Plays the active timeline in reverse e Rewind Rewinds the active timeline or returns the current position to the beginning of the clip e Play Plays the active timeline at normal speed e Fast Forward Fast forwards the active timeline e Stop Stops play on the active timeline 218 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Loop Recording Loop Recording You can also loop record material To loop record material you set up a record buffer that will allow you to record for a length of time When you reach the end of the record buffer the current position moves back to the beginning of the buffer and previously recorded material is overwritten The steps for loop recording are as follows 1 Choose Co
251. p or master you want to duplicate 2 Choose Duplicate from the Edit menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click The Duplicate operation always automatically renames the new clip Creating Renaming and Deleting Bins A bin can have a name up to 32 characters long Spaces are legal characters but count for two characters Colons and slashes are illegal Tildes are illegal as a first character in a bin name To create a new bin 1 In the tree pane select the machine or volume where you want to create the new bin When a volume icon is selected the new bin is added to that volume When a machine icon is selected a new bin is created in the first volume in that machine 2 Choose New Bin from either the File menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click 3 A new bin called NewBin 1s placed in the tree The bin name is highlighted so you can change it Accept the new bin name by pressing Enter NOTE Renaming a bin involves modifying the path of every clip or master in the bin to reflect the new name If a clip or master cannot be renamed because it is locked or in use you end up with two bins one with the old name and one with the new one The clip that could not be modified remains in the bin with the old name 98 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Renaming Clips and Masters To rename a bin 1 Select the bin in either the tree or contents pane 2 Choose Rename from either the File menu or from the shortc
252. pear in this publication Use duplication or disclosure by the United States Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph c 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252 277 7013 or in subparagraph c 1 and 2 of the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights clause at FAR 52 227 19 as applicable Manufacturer is Grass Valley Group Inc P O Box 59900 Nevada City California 95959 7900 U S A Rev Date Description NSS _ _ gt gt gt gt gt __ XX amp amp _ _ _ _ a si gt gt March 1999 Original issue Supports System Software Version 3 0 Part number 071 0517 00 March 2000 Profile System Software Version 3 2 with DVCPRO 50 support Part number 071 051 7 01 Contents Chapter 1 Chapter 2 3 March 2000 Preface ABOULTOIS Marake ert celle ok Be ee eee eee ale eee 15 Related Documentals a a ek heteowdecacise alec AA ANA 16 Terminology and GOnVentiOns oseese een E eee 17 Introducing the Profile Family A Proe System OVENVIOW anen n a ad otto nate ores sla eas eae cent 22 video Disk SUDSVS 16M esxistswutees Gactantecoees A 22 Video COMDRCS SION ras ease rattacts et acs rece A nc oat axed exces eases 23 Video and Audio Interface Boards cccccssssseeceeeeeeceeeueeeeeseesueeceeeaeeeeesuaeseesseageeseseas 23 Profile Sottware Developmen csess
253. pens the help topic on the Tape Transport Status dialog To add a transport to the list of active transports 1 In the tree pane select the appropriate library icon 2 Choose Tape Transport Status from the File menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click The Tape Transport Status dialog box appears 3 Click the Add button The Add Tape Transport dialog box appears as shown in Figure 70 Add Tape Transport Traneport Mum a Robot Position Cancel Help Figure 70 Add Tape Transport dialog box Enter the logical transport number 0 255 4 5 Enter the physical robot position 0 3 6 Click OK 7 Click Close when you are done viewing the transport status To remove a tape transport from service e Click the appropriate Disable button To clean a tape transport e Click the appropriate Clean button A tape transport does not need cleaning until the Needs Cleaning message appears beside the Clean button The library system will find the first available cleaning cartridge in the system and use it to clean the selected transport If the library system is unable to find the cleaning cartridge that is there is no cleaning cartridge in the library you will get a message stating that no cleaning cartridge was found 126 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Viewing the Transfer Monitor Viewing the Transfer Monitor When clips are copied to a different machine the media that is referenced b
254. port it is rejected 3 March 2000 Profile Family 115 Y Chapter 3 Using Media Manager Exporting a Cartridge To export a cartridge is to eject or remove it from the library system 1 In the tree pane select the icon for the cartridge you want to export 2 Choose Export Cartridge from the File menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click and the Export Cartridge dialog box appears By default the cartridge location is Out of library Export Cartridge Cartridge location EE Out of library Cancel M Update the Cartridge Help Fermanently remove from the library database Figure 60 Export Cartridge dialog box 3 Select the appropriate box Ifyou select Update the cartridge the cartridge is loaded into a transport and its directory is updated to reflect clip name changes or deletions Then the cartridge is ejected If you select Permanently remove from the library database all references to the cartridge are deleted from the library database then the cartridge is ejected If you select both boxes the cartridge is loaded into a transport and its directory is updated to reflect clip name changes or deletions This information is saved on the cartridge Then all references to the cartridge are deleted from the library database and the cartridge is ejected 4 Click Export 5 A prompt appears requesting that you physically remove the cartridge from the library Once the robot is in po
255. profile hst which lists Profile systems on the network as well as remoting activities Hardware Communication Monitor Commands Number of Connections 1 Figure 131 Hardware Communication Monitor message box Viewing Help To view Help topics e Choose Help Help Topics Closing List Manager To close List Manager e Choose File Exit Configuring Resources Before you can use List Manager you must configure video audio and timecode resources which are required for List Manager to operate You configure resources with Resource Manager To start this tool e Choose Project Configure Resource Manager provides the means to add or remove channels JPEG MPEG or DVCPRO add or remove video audio and timecode tracks and assign inputs and outputs to those tracks For detailed instructions on using Resource Manager see Using the Resource Manager on page 257 System resources used by List Manager are not available to other applications whether or not a list is scheduled If you try to start an application that requires the resources being used by List Manager you ll be warned that those resources are not available You can free up those resources for use by other applications by starting the Resource Manager then setting the desired resources to None 234 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Connecting to a Remote Profile Machine Connecting to a Remote Profile Machine You can connect from your lo
256. project file rather than opening it you can use the resource configuration from the project without its connection information To import a project file and avoid changing the connection 1 Choose File Import to open the Import Project dialog box a standard WindowsNT Open dialog box 2 Select a project file 3 Click the Open button Unlike the Open operation importing a project file does not change the current machine connection 282 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Configuring Channels with Resource Manager Configuring Channels with Resource Manager The Resource Manager is used for creating and configuring all TimeDelay channels In TimeDelay the first channel labeled Recorder in Figure 169 is always the record channel and all other channels are playback channels You cannot remove the first two channels because TimeDelay always requires a record channel and at least one playback channel You can have as many as 6 playback channels For more detailed information about using Resource Manager refer to Using the Resource Manager on page 257 Adding a Playback Channel To add a playback channel 1 Choose Config Resource Manager to open Resource Manager 2 Click the Add Channel button This creates a new channel tab in the Resource Manager dialog box 3 Configure the new channel as necessary Instructions for using Resource Manager are in Using the Resource Manager on page 257 4 Click t
257. quence Couleur A M moire standard color format Serial port Usually the standard RS 232 C of a personal computer Attach a serial cable to communicate with a peripheral device such as a modem or printer S N Ratio The Signal to Noise Ratio measured in decibels is the ratio between the maximum signal level and the noise level with no signal present The higher the value the better the sound reproduction Source In Profile operations a source is any signal video audio or timecode presented to the machine inputs A VTR output a satellite downlink a camera output and a facility router output are all examples of sources Status bar The status bar at the bottom of most windows provides status information short explanations of commands and errors Tape See Cartridge Tape Text insertion point The I shaped pointer which appears in a text input area Clicking the mouse in a text input area causes the text cursor to appear in that area Whatever information you type on the keyboard appears in the text input area displaying the text cursor Timecode Source LTC VITC Timecode generator TimeDelay The name of the application and the amount of time that elapses between the start of the record channel and the start of the playback channel 306 Profile Family 3 March 2000 3 March 2000 Tool Tips A tool tip is a small pop up window that displays a single line of text describing the purpose of a control in a wind
258. r example you may want to broadcast a live event inserting stored commercials at appropriate times 1 Open the list that you want to add a live event to 2 Choose File New Event Switch and the New Switch Event dialog box appears as shown in Figure 137 Hew Switch Event Duration 00 00 00 0 Type Absolute Y S tart Date i 1 fl fil 995 Comment E vent Repeat Start Time Hourls Minutes None Every lo 0 Hourly P NoEnd Gate Time Daily End Date Weekly End Time Cancel Figure 137 New Switch Event dialog box 3 In the New Switch Event dialog box enter all the event information as described in Changing Event Settings on page 238 This will set the cross point switch for the channel so that your video input is routed directly to the output In a PDR 100 audio inputs are not routed to audio outputs for switch events however they are routed to audio outputs in the PDR 200 300 and 400 4 Click OK 3 March 2000 Profile Family 245 Y Chapter 9 Using the List Manager Scheduling a Transfer Event You can schedule transfer events in your lists A transfer event schedules the copying of media from one Profile video disk recorder to another Profile unit on the network requires Ethernet and Fibre Channel connections Only one Transfer event may be scheduled at one time 1 Open the list to which you wish to add the live event 2 Choose File New Event Transfer and the N
259. r Decoder the link between component parallel digital video and the SCSI 2 channel The CODEC compresses the video data to a rate that is commensurate with the available disk bandwidth Conversely the CODEC decompresses the video data coming from the SCSI 2 channel back to 8 bit component parallel digital video The PDR400 Profile video disk recorder translates digital video data between CCIR 601 digital component and compressed motion JPEG DVCPRO 25 or DVCPRO 50 for storage on hard disk Command line The line that you type to invoke a program or initiate an action A command line usually contains the application program name along with optional arguments known as command line options Composite video A single video signal composed of combined luminance and chrominance information Component video Typically the transmission or storage of video as a separate luminance and chrominance information such as Y B Y R Y Compression video A technique for reducing the amount of space needed to store images or sequences of images JPEG Motion JPEG M JPEG DVCPRO 25 DVCPRO 50 and MPEG are examples of video compression techniques Data cartridge A digital tape cartridge that is capable of storing media in large quantities dB Decibel In theory the minimum change in sound intensity that the human ear can distinguish also a relative unit used to compare the strength of acoustic signals Profile Family 299 Y Glo
260. r Detection and Handling packet is present which audio groups 1 4 are present and which errors are present Full Field FF CRC or Active Picture AP CRC plus parity and checksum errors To reset EDH for serial digital video input 1 Click the Advanced tab to view the Serial Digital Component Video Input Advanced settings Digital Component ideo Input J5 4 SDI InA J5 Figure 20 Serial Digital Component Video Input Advanced 2 Click Reset FF CRC to reset Full Field errors or Reset AP CRC to reset Active Picture errors 3 Click Undo to undo the resets 4 Click Close to exit 3 March 2000 Profile Family 59 F Chapter2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager Video Output You can configure either analog composite or serial digital component video output on your Profile system depending on which boards are installed Analog Composite Video Output To open the Analog Composite Video Output dialog box 1 Select Video Output from the configuration tree and click or double click an analog composite output from the list such as Composite OutA J11 The Analog Composite Video Output dialog box appears see Figure 21 Analog Composite Video Output J11 6 Composite OutB J11 Maun Vertical Interval Mame Composite OutBJ11 VITC Compasitev 0 utB J11 C VITC Generator Enable M NTSC with Pedestal Frocamp Adjustment T Enable Procarp D Luminance C Gaussian Chroma Filter Video Gain acai
261. r Panel COMI and COM2 are available on the unit s back panel RS 232 DB 9 connectors Any P ports used by VdrPanel should have the DIP switches set to Device DIP switch must be down 3 Select a serial communications port such as P1 4 Click OK 132 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Selecting Clip Length BVW Only Selecting Clip Length BVW Only If you have chosen a BVW controller you can specify clip length by setting mark in and mark out points 5 NOTE The Set Clip Marks clip length dialog box shown here will not appear unless the panel controller is a BVW controller This is not the same as setting clip length while in Loop or Bounce mode Click a panel to make it active Choose Controller Clip Length The Set Clip Marks dialog box appears Figure 75 Set Clip Marks Enter mark in Enter mark out po foo foo foo foo fio foo fro hr min sec frm hr min sec frm Apply to loaded clip s Figure 75 Set Clip Marks dialog box Enter the mark in and mark out points by specifying the hour minute second and frame settings This applies to future clips only unless you perform step 4 Click Apply to Loaded Clip s if you want the mark in and mark out points to apply to existing clips as well as future clips Click OK Configuring a Controller To configure the playback and record video channels audio channels and the VITC timecodes for the selected controller l 2 3 March
262. r a Fibre Channel switch NOTE The cable which connects individual machines to the Fibre Channel hub is the same cable that connects two machines together This cable comes with the Fibre Channel card However Profile Fibre Channel cables sold for use with Fibre Channel hubs do not have the required connectors for use with the Fibre Channel switch You must obtain cables appropriate for use with the switch The pinout for a 9 pin D type connector to 9 pin D type connector is as follows e Pin 1 to 5 and pin 5 to 1 e Pin 6 to 9 and pin 9 to 6 198 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Setting Up Software for Fibre Channel Setting Up Software for Fibre Channel A common mistake is to set the IP address of the Fibre Channel board to the same IP address as the Ethernet network This is wrong they must be separate networks Each Profile unit has a computer name often the serial number of the unit But some people like to change it to something more meaningful such as PROFILE1 or PROFILE2 For Fibre Channel you must set up two IP addresses for each Profile one for the Ethernet card and the other for the Fibre Channel board Here are some made up IP addresses for two Profiles units Computer Name PROFILE1 Ethernet Address 192 168 99 1 FC Address 192 168 100 1 Computer Name PROFILE2 Ethernet Address 192 168 99 2 FC Address 192 168 100 2 You can use the these addresses if you want but if your Ethernet boards are connected to your comp
263. r all the event information as described in Changing Event Settings on page 238 4 Click OK 3 March 2000 Profile Family 247 Chapter9 Using the List Manager Editing Event Lists You can reorganize your event lists at any time While you can change the settings for each event in a list sometimes you ll want to change the order of events or add replace or delete events from the list The following sections describe how to organize your lists to meet your needs Changing the Order of Events You may want to change the order of events in your list There are two ways to do this If an event s type is set to Absolute you must Change the Start Time of the event so that it starts at the desired time If an event s type is set to Follow you can Select the event by clicking on the event in the left most column of the window then drag the event to its new position to the list You can move several events by using the standard Windows operations to select a range of events Shift click to select a range or extend it then drag the selection Inserting Events To insert an event in a list from a Media Manager window 1 Select a clip or master in the Media Manager contents pane 2 Drag the material to the List Manager window 3 Drop the material in the list where you want to place the new event The new material is dropped below the highlighted event To insert an event elsewhere in a list 1 Sel
264. r board optional PDR 200 standard PDR 300 e DVCPRO CODEC boards optional PDR 200 standard PDR 400 e Fibre Channel interface board e Video mix effects board e PDX208 Profile Disk Expansion Units e PAC208 and PAC216 Analog Digital Audio Interface chassis PDR 200 300 400 e XLR216 and BNC216 Digital Audio Interface chassis PDR 200 300 400 e PRS250 Profile RAID Storage Systems e PLS20 and PLS200 Profile Library Systems e PRC100 Profile Control Panel unit e LVS 100 Live Controller e Profile VideoGateway e CD ROM Drive e Profile Tool Box Editor software e Profile Tool Box List Manager software e Profile TimeDelay application software 20 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Table 1 PDR200 300 and PDR200 400 features compared Feature PDR200 300 PDR 200 400 Video inputs Analog composite component analog Analog composite component analog CAV serial digital component CAV serial digital component Video channels 2 or 4 play record channels 2 or 4 play record channels JPEG CODECs Video channels 1 or 2 record channels encoders 4 None MPEGencoders 6 or 8 playback channels decoders and decoders Optional PDR 200 Standard PDR 300 Video channels 6 play record channels 25 Mb s DVCPRO 3 play record channels 50 Mb s CODEC Up to eight 18 GB Ultra SCSI Eight 18 GB Ultra SCSI Audio 16 channels digital standard AES 16 channels digital standard AES EBU embedded up to 32 channels EBU embedded
265. ration Type Start Date F Comment Clip Name Cart Label Path Partition Number Archiver O59 10 2000 00 01730700 Absolute 02 02 1997 AdI Ssurt Soap Labell INT Default 1 Transfer event t The format is Action Start Time Duration Type Start Date Source Profile Destination Profile Source Media Destination Media Comment Transfer 05 10 20 00 00201230200 Absolute 02 02 1997 Profilel Profile2 Soap Surf Soap Ad New Surf Ad Importing a List You can import a list that has been previously exported to an ASCII text file st To import a file l 2 3 Click the Edit window tab Choose File Import An Open dialog box appears displaying files of type st in the path c profile Select the name of the file you want to import Double click the file name or click OK Deleting an Entire List To remove an entire List 3 March 2000 Choose Edit Delete List Profile Family 251 Chapter9 Using the List Manager Overriding Events in a List Not every operation in your environment can be predicted to the second In some instances you Il want to be able to interrupt an event as it s playing or stop a list completely List Manager provides you with the tools you need to meet these challenges Taking an Event As your list executes you may want to manually choose a particular event and start playing it immediately For example you may have inserted a very long Switch event
266. ration file and some sample files that you may find helpful if you need to modify files manually Using the Profile Protocol Resources Utility When you start the Profile Protocol Resources utility by double clicking its icon a large dialog box similar to the one shown in Figure 108 appears The available Profile resources are displayed in the dialog box Note that these resources will vary according to the features of each Profile system For example while JPEG codecs are available on all Profile systems MPEG encoders and DVCPRO codecs appear as resources only on Profile models that are so equipped 178 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Profile Protocol Resources Video Resources Video Input Codec Type S01 In4 J14 JPEG 1 SDl InB J14 JPEG 2 SDl In 15 JPEG 3 SDl InB J15 JPEG 4 DYCPRO25 1 DYCPRO25 2 DVCPAROZS 3 DYCPRO25 4 Audio Resources Audio Inputs AES EBU Int J5 AES EBU In2 J5 AES EBU In3 J5 AES EBU In4J5 AES EBU In7 J5 AES EBU In8 J5 AES EBU In12 J5 AES EBU In13 J5 Arer MLI Led IC Timecode Resources Timecode Input Timecode Tracks LTC In1 J16 LTC ln2J16 LTC In3 J16 LTCln4J16 SDIWITC In J14 SDIWITC InB J14 SDIWITC In J15 SDIWITC InB J15 GenLockITC In J16 m Tit mW HA Figure 108 The main Profile Protocol Resources dialog box Using the Profile Protocol Resources Utility Video Output SO1 Out4J1 4 SDI OutB J14 SDI Out J15 SDI OutB J15 Audio Outputs AES EBU Out
267. rd 1 J6 Input Mapping Input Clocking Output Mapping Monitor Channels QutA Jh QutA Jh QutA J5 Qutb J5 Output 01 E Figure 37 Audio Configuration dialog box Output Mapping tab The columns represent the sources to the sixteen channels on the input side and the destinations from the sixteen channels on the output side The examples in Figure 36 and Figure 37 illustrate the system with a PAC 208 chassis allowing the selection of analog channels 1 8 and digital channels 9 16 A PAC 216 chassis however provides sixteen analog inputs and outputs or sixteen digital inputs and outputs For the PAC 208 rows 9 through 16 of the analog channel column and rows through 8 of the AES EBU channel column are cross hatched to indicate that these channels are not selectable In Figure 37 in the column labeled AES EBU rows 9 16 appear dimmed indicating that this audio type is always mapped and cannot be unmapped Attempting to remap this section results in an error message The number of columns in the mapping grid depends on the number of possible input or output audio types that may be mapped to or from the disk recorder channels The grid is used for selecting which of the possible input or output audio sources and destinations to map to the channels Audio channels are mapped in groups of four channels only and the four audio channels are always mapped to consecutive disk channels For example analog channels 1 4 Input 01 Input 04 in t
268. rding ODEPaAlIONS aescasiscarescesdceceeseeeded sen eebeluee eeedsdiewwic edie wander rie ses 243 Scheduling Rules and COMMS aS ennes sett loess cst e a aie emcenenes 244 LISIING aLe FCCC nesctet succor asics neta coi E T E E E CRS 245 Sched ulng a Transie EVEN eiren ce ceccceetne ETE Woke au gsatee Oates acreage ane 246 Scheduling an Archive Event ccccececcececseeseeceeeesaeeeeeseeeeseseeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeseesaeeeeeesseeageesees 247 EHUn Event crn en a eaten aac a teciae ct emaue incanenaue linda iy toe vapis Reade 248 Changing the Order Of Events ccccccssssceccecessseseeeeeseeeueeceseeseeaueeeeeesseaeseeeeessaeageeeees 248 HAS SPA EV SINS rere tecssneuienes dit aean ait E am untecuunna ae a dens ryeuettecanseaenaeaten 248 ReEMOVINGIEVERIS Fona LIS srrcensehsderc averted elt aneom a 248 Using the Git WV IMG OW se crit a ratte ae ed eaett ie Loe aah Gl 249 eno aA NOW ES e caesar a nerds aera as ates cecenseeea 249 DAW MOA LIS ica Me deste tess eiede ce escende A medians ee 249 ROU S IC eS Bias case rer craninecarces cacan a a a 249 sj ae a LIST rere ee ee a ee ae te a Stn CC ee oe 250 EX DOMINGO a klS asctese alan awctnca a E E acre asennad ebeneecceeiin 250 List File ASCII Text FORMAL cssices vtceedee2ts2cchesloee le saehd tact is ssieish ccs axnebadeed nach oade neil ene 250 MMPOG A ES heen reer reepore a en rer nce rare eee tray errmr tte Teor hierar ee vn we eee 251 Deleting an Entire oie etere en rereet cece es acer aa sa
269. rim a clip 1 Select the clip you want to trim in the current bin 2 Load the clip onto the capture timeline 3 Do one of the following e Drag the mark in or mark out cursors to a new position on the timeline see the mark in and mark out cursors in Figure 119 page 216 e Drag the current time cursor to a new location and click on the Modify Mark in button or Modify Mark out button The current position is taken as the new mark position e Adjust the in and out marks by entering the new timecodes in the boxes provided see the timecode entry boxes in Figure 119 page 216 Even when trimmed media remains on disk Choose Media Cleanup to remove excess media permanently from a trimmed clip The trimmed portions are removed from disk thus freeing space for more clips NOTE Media Cleanup works only if no subclips have been created from a clip If subclips have been created or if the clip is referenced by a master Cleanup will fail Creating a Subclip A subclip is a portion of an existing clip Subclips can help you order your material when creating masters The buttons that allow you to create subclips are the Create Mark in and Create Mark out buttons With the Create Mark in button you mark where you want to start the subclip with the Create Mark out button you specify where you want to end the subclip In addition you can set user marks as points of interest that you can jump to at a later time Clip Name Text Box
270. rn off TCP checksums and auto host table administration By turning off TCP checksums you maximize bandwidth but you will not be able to detect data corruption You turn auto host table administration table if you do not intend to use fencs see The PDR Network Configuration Service on page 205 Type feconfig followed by Enter The following is displayed usage fcconfig options options i lt fc_ip_address gt dotted decimal 0 lt gateway gt dotted decimal n lt subnet_mask gt dotted decimal a lt hardware_address gt 1 120 0 for autoconfig e lt on off gt enable disable tcp checksums hta lt on off gt enable disable auto host table admin 5S lt on off gt enable disable use of the switch For PROFILE1 in this example type the following NOTE Do not reboot when prompted 192 168 100 1 followed by Enter FC IP address set to 100 100 100 1 Reboot computer for settings to take effect feconfig g 255 255 2550 followed by Enter Gateway set to 255 255 255 0 Reboot computer for settings to take effect NOTE Based on the address you use for a subnetmask there is an implicit subnetmask but you can override this with a larger mask For example 255 0 0 0 can be overridden by 255 255 0 0 or 255 255 255 0 feconfig a 1 followed by Enter Address set to 1 Reboot computer for settings to take effect NOTE The hardware address can be any number between I and 120 In these examples us
271. rocessing board ASPB This board is capable of delivering 16 channels of analog embedded digital or AES EBU digital audio The Profile unit can be equipped with two of these boards for a total of 32 channels of audio Video and Audio Interface Boards Video and audio interface boards receive incoming and send outgoing video and audio data These boards are responsible for converting the video and audio to internal formats used by the video server The PDR200 300 and 400 come with the Audio Signal Processing board ASPB This audio architecture accepts and simultaneously processes sixteen audio inputs and outputs Internally all audio is processed with a selectable storage resolution of 16 or 20 bits Inputs may be individually clocked in groups of four and any clock group may be referenced to the system reference house black or any one of four video inputs Output clocking is synchronous to system reference Sample rate conversion is available for all inputs 30 to 50kHz providing uniform storage at 48kHz You can configure the PDR200 300 or 400 to operate with analog AES EBU digital or embedded SMPTE 272M Level A audio depending on which options are installed in your system All three audio formats are supported without external conversion equipment Analog audio is only available with an optional PAC 208 or PAC216 Analog Digital Interface chassis You can expand the number of XLR or BNC connectors for AES EBU audio with an opti
272. rofile Family 3 March 2000 Profile Applications NOTE The following optional applications Tool Box Editor List Manager and TimeDelay may be purchased for use on your Profile system Please contact your Grass Valley Group representative for more information on purchasing Tool Box Editor List Manager and TimeDelay Tool Box Editor The optional Tool Box Editor lets you create new media by logging and capturing video and audio clips while also providing an inexpensive cuts only editing system Refer to Chapter 8 Using the Tool Box Editor List Manager The optional List Manager allows you to set up simple station automation You can record incoming video at predetermined times send incoming video directly to an output or combine all of these functions to increase the automation level of you operations Refer to Chapter 9 Using the List Manager TimeDelay TimeDelay allows you to delay incoming video by an amount of time you specify For more information see Chapter 11 Using TimeDelay 3 March 2000 Ee G4 it 4 elas xlolo ka ke KI DI ee ma EAEN TINY Cal Capture Y List Manager PROFILE50 File Edit View Project Options Help pjene e lt First Channel Stat Tine Duration Tan 00 00 00200 Hocrzd i dein Soa 0 00 00 00 Fi a Profile Family 31 32 Chapter 1 Introducing the Profile Family Profile Utilities e Profile Logs allo
273. rray PRS 200 A closed bin la An open bin ef A Recycle bin appears below each volume A master 2 A locked master io Clips and archived clips with audio and video 2 Locked clips and archived clips with audio and video Hi Clips and archived clips with no audio a Locked clips and archived clips with no audio Clips and archived clips with audio only no video 5 Locked clips and archived clips with audio only no video An item in the Profile clip database that Media Manager does not recognize wj A library system appears after volumes The library icon appears only on machines connected to a Profile library system Z A cartridge appears below the library icon SH A cartridge that is out of the library A cleaning cartridge may appear anywhere in the cartridge list 8 An unformatted cartridge iH An unformatted out of library cartridge Cartridges that are in an unknown state 41 An unknown out of library cartridge Ld A partition appears under cartridges This is a closed partition J An open partition 3 March 2000 Profile Family 93 F Chapter 3 Using Media Manager Toolbar The Media Manager toolbar provides one button access to commands z Add Remove Machine Opens the Add Remove Machine dialog box Select Current Machine box Expands the machine item in the tree Up One Level Goes to the folder one level up Cut Removes the sele
274. rrent bin 1 Click the Open Bin button 2 Enter the name in the text box or select the desired bin from the list box and press OK 3 The selected bin is loaded into the current bin display Creating a New Bin You will often want to create a new bin to store and organize new media To create a new bin 1 Click the New Bin button below the current bin display and the new bin dialog box is displayed 2 Enter the name of new bin in the text box or accept the default name 3 Click OK to accept the new bin name The new bin automatically appears in the current bin display Record Time Remaining Below the edit timeline lower left is the record time remaining in the form 00 00 Hours Minutes This indicates the amount of storage remaining in the current Profile volume The amount varies based on the current video quality Generally the higher the quality of video the more disk space is used thus leaving less time remaining Renaming Media To rename a clip or master 1 Select the clip or master in the current bin 2 Choose Rename from the Media menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click You can also select the bin or master again in the current bin 3 Type a new name then press Enter 3 March 2000 Profile Family 213 Y Chapter 8 amp 8 Using the Tool Box Editor Viewing Media Properties You can view the media properties for clips and masters To view these properties 1 Select a clip or master in the
275. rs Configure Fibre Channel dialog box You should also use the switch compatible version of microcode if you are connecting your Profile system to Fibre Channel devices from other manufacturers Please note that this inter operable microcode has not yet been optimized for loop operations Follow these instructions to use either of these icons to load Fibre Channel microcode 1 Close any applications that may be running on the system 2 At a command line type vdrsve start and then press Enter This starts the PDR Access Service if it is not already started 3 Choose Start Programs PDR Debug Tools Update FC Microcode A window appears 4 The program asks if you want to continue Type Y 5 The program now reads the new image of the microcode from c profile etc gfcucode img The program automatically copies the old microcode to the file c profile etc gfcucode old 6 Restart the disk recorder in order for the microcode update to take effect Use the Fibre Channel Configuration dialog box or the fcconfig command to verify that switch mode is on or off according to your needs Each icon establishes settings that should be appropriate for most uses Use the Fibre Channel Configuration dialog box or the fcconfig command to verify that switch mode is on or off according to your needs Each icon establishes settings that should be appropriate for most uses 194 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Updating Fibre Channel Microcode Up
276. rt Full Frame CRC and Active Picture CRC into the video stream 3 Click Blank Ancillary Data to insert ancillary data information into the video stream 4 Click Undo to return the values in the dialog box to their original settings 5 Click Close to accept the changes 66 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Profile Audio Profile Audio The audio architecture used in the PDR 200 300 and 400 and updated PDR 100 s accepts and simultaneouly processes sixteen audio inputs and outputs at up to four simultaneous clock rates Internally all audio is processed in floating point at 48kHz with a selectable storage resolution of 16 or 20 bits Inputs may be individually clocked in groups of four and any clock group may be referenced to the system reference house black or any one of four video inputs Output clocking is synchronous to system reference Sample rate conversion is available for all inputs 30 to 50kHz providing uniform storage at 48kHz The Profile system can be configured to operate with analog AES EBU digital or embedded SMPTE 272M Level A audio depending on which options are installed in your system All three audio formats are supported without external conversion equipment Analog audio is only available with an optional PAC 208 or PAC216 Analog Digital Interface chassis You can expand the number of XLR or BNC connectors for AES EBU audio with an optional XLR216 or BNC216 Digital Interface chassis You can choose an audi
277. rtcut menu with a right click You can also select the clip s name a second time 4 Type the new name and press Enter NOTE The renaming operation does not take permanent effect until after an update operation see Updating and Inventorying Cartridges on page 117 Deleting an Archived Clip To delete an archived clip 1 In the tree pane select the library cartridge and partition where the archived clip is stored 2 In the contents pane select the archived clip or clips you want to delete 3 Press the Delete or Backspace key or choose Delete from the File menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click When an archived clip is deleted it is not moved to the Recycle bin It is removed from the library database s record of archived clips Also since tape is not a random access medium the storage space is not reclaimed as it is on the disk drives and the space cannot be reused until all clips in a partition have been deleted NOTE The delete operation does not take effect until after an Update operation see Updating and Inventorying Cartridges on page 117 Importing a Cartridge To import a cartridge is to insert or add it into the library system 1 In the tree pane select the library icon If you have a stand alone drive you must insert the cartridge you are importing into the drive 2 Choose Import either from the File menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click The Import Cartridge dia
278. rtical lines can be more difficult Comb Filter Decode mode tries to separate high frequency luminance from the chrominance using the same notch filter as the notch decoder but also takes information from the next line It uses this information to determine if high frequency is luminance or chrominance A comb decoder readily determines finely spaced vertical lines are luminance A lack of line to line phase alteration causes difficulty with fine horizontal lines Spatial Adaptive Decoding uses either the comb or notch decoder on a pixel by pixel basis depending on which gives the best results For horizontal lines notch is used for vertical lines comb is used NOTE Spatial adaptive and temporal spatial adaptive decoding uses the high or low threshold setting Temporal Spatial Adaptive This is for earlier analog composite cards only Decoding uses both the next line and the same line in the alternate field in the calculations This decoder uses all of the properties of the Spatial Adaptive decoder plus it uses Temporal interfield changes information The phase change or lack of from field to field helps determine whether high frequency should be decoded as chrominance or luminance The threshold determines the amount of motion allowed between alternate fields to still have the Temporal decoder recognize the pixel High allows more motion than Low 3 For the current analog composite card click Enable Clamp Speed to enable it
279. rtridge on page 116 and Updating and Inventorying Cartridges on page 117 To archive a bin or clip using a copy command 1 Select the bin in the tree pane or the clip in the contents pane that you want to archive To extend the selection press Shift Up Arrow or Shift Down Arrow Choose Edit Select All or Ctrl A to select all the media in the contents pane 2 Choose Copy either from the Edit menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click You can also click the Copy button on the toolbar 3 In the tree pane select the partition icon where you want to archive the bin or clip 4 Choose Paste or Paste Special either from the Edit menu or from the right click shortcut menu You can also click the Paste button on the toolbar If there is a bin or clip with the same name in the partition where you want to archive it you are prompted to change the name or cancel the operation Also a clip can only be added to a partition if there is enough space for it 112 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Restoring a Bin or Clip To archive a clip or bin using drag and drop 1 In the tree pane click the cartridge icon where you want to archive a clip This expands the tree pane to reveal the partition icon or icons 2 Click on the bin that you want to copy or from which you want to copy a clip The clip icons from the bin appear in the contents pane 3 In the tree pane select the bin icon or in the contents pane select the clip ic
280. rtridge 117 Inventorying the library 119 IP address 199 ISA 22 J JPEG 22 141 JPEG CODECs 21 JPEG codecs assigning 178 K Keyboard 303 Keys shortcut 150 L Labeling a disk 168 LAN 32 190 198 3 March 2000 launching TimeDelay 278 Launching TimeDelay at start up 279 Library properties 122 Library system 303 Line formats 21 Line level 69 List building 236 editing 248 event order 248 inserting events 248 opening 249 saving 249 validate 241 List Manager 31 129 231 configuring resources 259 Edit view 232 engine See Event Scheduler Engine 231 live events 245 Monitor 231 monitoring a list 240 recording 243 listnames command 204 Live events 245 Load Media 213 Loading clips 156 Loading microcode 170 Lock to Field Number 142 Locking clips 158 Log Capture Tool 175 Log file 173 Logging in 27 Logs 173 Long clip names 159 Loop 148 Loop Play 218 Louth 25 131 LTC 24 45 142 144 272 303 Luminance Black Clip Level 61 Luminance Only 61 Luminance White Clip Level 61 M Mainframe bandwidth 21 Manual conventions 17 3 March 2000 Manually logging in 27 Marks 133 149 164 Master adding media to 225 creating 224 delete 99 playing 225 renaming 99 Master List 236 Master timecode 37 Master VITC 37 Max Chroma 137 Media cleaning up trimmed clips 220 sorting 212 Media files 303 sorting 212 Media Manager 30 87 128 archiving a bin or clip 112 copying and pasting media 95 creating renamin
281. rts automatically when you power on your Profile system For more information refer to Chapter 4 Using VdrPanel Panel E Panel Control oo Oo Clips timecode size type aona Rec rew stop play ffwd Tawa 7 Tae y gt Panel G Panel Control timecode size typi sa Cea ajan EE Rec rew stop play ffwd rew a pay ffwd P Ft Fr Imm St eed ceed ome lt 5 Profile Disk Utility File Disk Utilities Help Profile Disk Utility As shipped from the factory Profile media disks come preformatted and with a file system already created Profile Disk Utility allows you to create new file systems reformat disks and change disk labels To find out more about how to use this utility refer to Chapter 5 Using the Profile Physical Volume No oi bike Make Data Set Set Label Selected Volumes Pdalyy amp Intemal Serial No Vendor No of Blocks Block Size Model Revision Bad Blocks Medium Errors N8051269 SEAGATE 2373630 4098 STIN7IW D309 0 3 N8053268 SEAGATE 2373630 406 STISIT7IW D309 0 0 Disk Utility 99 LA217180 SEAGATE 2373630 4098 STISI7IW D309 0 0 NB051466 SEAGATE 2373630 406 STISIT7IW D309 0 0 N8050373 SEAGATE 2373630 4098 STIN7IW D309 0 0 N8052077 SEAGATE 2373630 4098 STISI7IW D309 0 0 LA211607 SEAGATE 2373630 4098 STISI7IW D309 0 0 N8054015 SEAGATE 2373630 4098 STIN7IW D309 5 0 H Test Ead ElGcKS Detail Log 30 P
282. s LEGIE LTCOutl DComponentVITC1InA DComponentVITC1OutA TCRec 1 TCRec 2 Default connect LTCIn1 to LTCOut1 Default Connect LICIA to TCRecCHI Scheduled connect TCRec l to LITCOUtI Default connect DComponentVITC1lInA to DComponentVITC1OutA Default connect DComponentVITCIInA to TCRec 2 Scheduled connect TCRec 2 to DComponentVITC1O0utA Profile Family 189 Y Chapter6 Using Profile Utilities PortServer PortSever allows you to control a Profile unit remotely using Ethernet communications For example you can run PortServer on a remote Profile system so that you can access it from a local Profile using your LAN Simply double click the PortServer shortcut icon on the desktop to start it or choose Start PDR Applications PortServer The PortServer interface is shown in Figure 110 Untitled Port Server pararem Figure 110 PortServer window 190 Profile Family 3 March 2000 PDR Access Control PDR Access Control PDR Access Control is a Windows NT service that prevents one application from crashing another user s application by mistake Though largely transparent to users the service prevents applications from accidentally reloading the video processor while in use essentially providing a controlled gateway to the processor Applications attempting to load different video processor code than what is currently running are denied access and terminated however applications attempting to loa
283. s in the bin are copied to the new location 3 March 2000 Profile Family 95 Y Chapter 3 Using Media Manager Using Paste Special Paste Special is a method of pasting clips or masters that are currently on the clipboard as a result of a copy or cut operation Paste Special is enabled only when you have selected a bin on a different volume a bin on a remote machine or a partition in a library system Unlike Paste which always copies the material between a clip s mark in and out points Paste Special offers you the option of copying all the media that the clip references To use Paste Special after placing media on the clipboard choose Paste Special from the Edit menu or the right click shortcut menu When the Paste Special dialog box appears click the button for the paste option you prefer then click OK Paste Special Paste Options ae Ra ty ed eR RAE C Copy entire Media File Cancel Figure 46 The Paste Special dialog box 96 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Moving Media Moving Media To move a clip or master to another bin 1 In the contents pane select a clip or master To extend the selection press Shift Up Arrow or Shift Down Arrow Choose Edit Select All or Ctrl A to select all the media in the contents pane 2 Choose Cut from the Edit menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click You can also click the Cut button on the toolbar 3 Select the location where you want to paste the media
284. s not click to toggle it The Search Lines are automatically established for NT SC 525 and PAL 625 Check VITC Present If it is still not on check the genlock signal to make sure that VITC exists and is within the expected range 3 For each video input that should have VITC select it from the list 3 March 2000 Profile Family 37 da Chapter2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager e For automatic VITC detection on analog composite and serial digital component signals Verify Automatic VITC detect is selected If it is not click to toggle it Set VITC Reader Line to the beginning of the search line The minimum line number is 6 in PAL and 10 in NTSC Check for VITC Present e For manual VITC detection on analog composite and serial digital component signals Verify Automatic VITC detect is not selected If it is click to toggle it Set VITC Reader Linel and VITC Reader Line2 to the lines where VITC is located If you only have one VITC line enter the same value on both Reader lines Check VITC Present If itis still not on double check your line numbers and try again 4 For each video output that should have VITC select it from the list e For analog composite on preexisting PDR 100 and PDR200 units Verify VITC Generator Enable is checked If not click to toggle it Click on Vert Interval to open the Vertical Interval Line Programming dialog box Select the desired VITC lines by checking in the
285. s passed between Windows NT and the real time processor The following information is logged Direction gt indicates NT to video processor lt indicates video processor to NT VDR port number 0 3 Tick count msec since Windows NT booted Message The start of the VdrPort log file contains the date and time year month day hours min sec msec and the equivalent tick count Events are logged to two files VdrPortLog 000 and VdrPortLog 001 174 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Log Capture Tool Log Capture Tool The Profile Log Capture Tool is used to capture Profile logs and package them in zip format to be sent to Grass Valley Group To start the Log Capture tool double click the Log Tool icon on the Windows NT desktop choose Start Run and enter C profile logstool exe in the text entry field or enter start logstool on a command line When you start the log capture tool it compresses the current set of Profile logs and launches the log set selection screen Figure 105 You can choose the current set of logs or one of the last four log sets captured Clicking the Cancel button cleans up any temporary files and exits the program If you click Cancel while copying and compressing when the program is first started the Current Logs selection will not be available Untitled Profile Log Capture Tool Figure 105 Log set selection screen 3 March 2000 Profile Family 175 Y Chapter6 Using Profile Utilities
286. s per second the real number is about 29 97 fps Timecode usually assumes 30 fps To account for the discrepancy drop frame timecode skips or drops two timecode values at the beginning of every minute except every tenth minute This allows timecode to exactly match a real time clock on 525 60 systems This correction is not needed on PAL or 625 50 systems because the frame rate is exactly 50 fps To set drop frame timecode e Choose Options Drop Frame or Options Non Drop Frame NOTE This setting applies to all open panels channels 146 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Panel Basics Panel Basics In the VdrPanel application you can display up to eight Panel dialog boxes at a time one for each video channel Each Panel dialog box has independent controls A close up view of a Panel dialog box is shown in Figure 84 A description of each Panel function follows NOTE f the panels are stacked choose Window Tile Panels The VdrPanel interface follows the same conventions as other Windows NT applications the control menu box title bar menu bar minimize and maximize buttons mouse and keyboard all perform as expected Refer to specific operating information about these items in the Windows NT manuals 3 Timecode 2 Size 1 Type 4 Play 5 Stop a Panel 4 Panel Control OF x 7 Record Night Afternoon 28 Clip Name 8 Fast Evening Box Forward LateEvening 27 Shuttle Rate Morning 9 Field Select
287. s the ability to group tracks to perform functions across several tracks at the same time such as gain mute etc GOP A Group of Pictures GOP is part of the video compression scheme used by MPEG MPEG uses motion prediction to increase efficiency that is 1t reduces data by not duplicating pixels that do not change from frame to frame It does so by relying on a GOP A GOP is composed of I frames B pictures and P pictures See B Picture I frame P Picture Hard disk Computer systems use hard disks as permanent storage devices Information is magnetically recorded on spinning platters for quick access Hardware The physical parts of a system such as a computer display monitor or keyboard Help Profile software applications come with on line help manuals that include examples demonstrations and reference information about using the application The manual and the Help window it is displayed in follow the Microsoft standard Hertz Hz Hertz is the unit of frequency named after the physicist Heinrich Hertz 1857 1894 One hertz Hz is equal to cycle second Hue A term that describes a color family for example red or yellow Hue is a polar coordinate that is it moves in a circular motion around the color spectrum and ranges from 0 to 360 with 0 being red Hue is measured in degrees See Chroma l frame MPEG uses motion prediction to increase efficiency that 1s it reduces data by not duplicating pixe
288. several clips or masters at a time Choose Delete from the Media menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click Press the Delete key or the Delete button on the bin toolbar A dialog box asks you to confirm that you want to delete the selection If you click on Yes the media is deleted if you click on No the operation is cancelled When media is deleted it is moved to the Recycle bin until the Recycle bin is emptied NOTE If a clip is locked you cannot delete it When a clip is deleted its source material is not deleted if any other clips or masters reference that material Only after the last clip is deleted is any disk storage freed Emptying the Recycle Bin When a clip or master is deleted it is moved to the Recycle bin and is permanently deleted when the Recycle bin is emptied If an item of the same name is in the Recycle bin the new item is automatically renamed To empty the Recycle bin 3 March 2000 Choose File Empty Recycle Bin NOTE If the Recycle bin contains no deleted media the Empty Recycle Bin menu item is dimmed Profile Family 215 Y Chapter amp Using the Tool Box Editor The Capture Timeline Profile Family The capture timeline allows you to capture and trim clips You can set the current time position and adjust mark in or mark out points Click on the Capture button below the audio controls to activate the Capture timeline without changing the current time position
289. sidered real time playback in NTSC 25 fps in PAL 24 fps is standard for film and is considered animation speed playback In the range of 12 to 15 fps the human eye can detect the difference between one frame and the next visually this appears as a jerky motion or flicker Frame The standard unit of measure for film and video One frame represents one complete still image divided into two fields Frequency response The frequency range which an electronic component can accurately reproduce Humans some can hear from 20 Hz to 20 000 Hz 20 KHz An ideal audio component would have a frequency response totally flat and without any deviation from 20 Hz to 20 KHz Frequency response specifications are measured in decibels dB based on how closely an output s response resembles that of the input Genlock This term defines the relationship between video paths Two video signals that are exactly synchronized are said to be genlocked GUI A Graphical User Interface GUI provides a visual way to interact with computer software GUIs allow people to control an application by using a pointing device such as a mouse to perform operations The usual alternative to a GUI is a command line interface which requires people to type in application specific commands following precise rules of syntax GUIs are considered easier to use than command line interfaces Profile Family 301 Y Glossary Group In audio terms this provide
290. sing VdrPanel Using Clips With VdrPanel you can define rename and delete a clip You can load an existing clip or group of clips Defining a New Clip There are two methods for defining clips e You can create and name an empty clip then record to it Name Clip First e You can start recording with an empty clip list then rename the recorded clip to a meaningful name Record Clip First Either method creates and stores a named clip Use whichever method is most convenient for you You can choose VideoClip Rename Clip at any time to change a clip name Name Clips First To define a clip by first naming the clip 1 Click in a panel to select it 2 Select VideoClip New Clip to open the New Clip dialog box Figure 89 3 Select a drive from the Drive list The number of drives available depends on your hardware 4 Enter a clip name up to 32 characters long Spaces and uppercase characters are acceptable however uppercase and lowercase characters will not distinguish clip names 5 Click OK The new clip is added to the clip list for the selected channel 6 If the Loop or Bounce buttons are pressed in the panel a dialog appears asking you to specify the loop or bounce duration in the form 00 00 00 00 7 Click the Record button in the selected Panel dialog box to begin recording The timecode and compression rate fields are updated NOTE A video input signal must be present on the selected channel for recording
291. sition and you remove the cartridge press any button on the library s control panel 6 The Exporting Cartridge dialog box remains on the screen until the robot ejects the cartridge Since this is done in the background click OK at any time If you are using a PLS 20 you must manually remove the cartridge from the drive 116 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Updating and Inventorying Cartridges Updating and Inventorying Cartridges Using the Media Manager to archive delete or rename bins or clips simply updates the library database not the cartridge directory This is why delete and rename operations are so fast the cartridge is not loaded into a transport Archive operations do copy data to a cartridge but the cartridge directory is not updated Once a bin or clip is archived deleted or renamed the library database and the cartridge s physical directory are out of synch The update and inventory operations allow you to resynchronize the cartridge directory and library database The update operation rewrites the cartridge directory with the library database s record of what should be on that cartridge Conversely the inventory operation reads the cartridge directory and rewrites the library database s entry for that cartridge gt gt gt CAUTION It is very important that you update a cartridge before you inventory the cartridge Updating prior to inventorying ensures that the cartridge directory reflects all archivals rena
292. ssary Default A value that is automatically assigned or used in the absence of any other input For example a new Profile system shipped from the factory is zero timed by default while E to E mode is the nondefault setting Dialog box A box displayed in a computer application s graphical user interface where you choose options and enter information Use the mouse or keyboard to move from field to field click on buttons and position the text insertion point Enter information with the keyboard Digital In digital audio video systems sounds and images are converted into a series of binary values ones and zeros D to A Digital to analog converter A device used to convert digital signals into an analog form For example compact disc players use D to A convertors to convert the digital information on the CD into analog audio suitable for amplification Disk expansion unit A product PDX 103 and PDX 208 that adds disk storage to a Profile video disk recorder Disk Utility The Profile Disk Utility tool is used to maintain Profile hard drives This includes formatting and labeling disk volumes eliminating bad blocks and updating hard drives with new microcode Display A device that receives video output from a display adapter such as VGA card and displays the video output on a screen Dragging Pressing and holding down the left mouse button while moving the pointer The mouse pointer must be over an object such as a fi
293. sseeeeseeeesseeeeeeseaaeseees 199 Enabling the Fibre Channel Switch cccceccccccecseeeseeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeesseaeeeeeeesanensees 201 Editing the Hosts Filg sarc siaecnenct content tranasaaahtuantncatsteutuinadlea Niradaeskuieaiuieeansesenon mish asuemueanent 202 Testing the Fibre Channel Ne twork cccccccccecessseseeececeeseeeeeeeeseesaeceeeeeseeaueeeeeeesssaneeeees 203 Using the Listnames and Copymovie COMMANAS cccccsseeeeeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeaaneeeeeeees 204 The PDR Network Configuration Service ccccccceesseeceeeeseeeeeeceeeesseeeeeeeeeesaseaeeseeeeaaaaes 205 Using the Tool Box Editor Starting and Exiting the Tool Box Editor cc cecccceceeceeeseeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaueaeeeeeeseeaageeeeeees 208 Configuring TRESOUNCOS al saan t aca cteoccpesvsi sien Aosse cosa Ancee ioduedeeds ssn seicsecete widen cea ssdeendexeens 209 ONS GE CS atid tanec rane se sane Mink E nl inetantPueenedests 210 Connecting to a Remote Profile Machine ccccccccceceeeeeeceeeesseeeeeeeeesaeseeeeeeeesaaeeeeeeees 211 SOIC CUM a C Urnrent NM edesin E E E 212 Peng a B esa T E E A EEEE EE 213 Creating a New BIM reieusecipienoiie iA E saves 213 Record Time REMAINING c cccccescceceeseceeseeeceeeecesuseeceeeeeesseeseeseesaueesseeeessaeessneseeeses 213 Aonaid Moda ghee antec dup ds ceretcseqatancectoncdthascedec edaeeaenecanseeearadeesacactsegacanaseeneassarcesen seve 213 Viewing Media Properties ccccc
294. ssion coefficient the amount of MPEG video compression varies according to the bit rate the amount of DVCPRO compression is fixed due to the fixed data rate Higher compression ratios or bit rates store more video but the result is lower quality video On the other hand lower compression ratios or bit rates result in higher quality video and less storage capacity Audio however is not compressed Since the video compression ratio can be varied to change the video quality given available storage time the amount of storage depends on your choice of compression ratio A quick rule of thumb is that five minutes of JPEG video plus four channels of audio and two channels of timecode is roughly equal to one gigabyte of disk storage at 75 000 bytes per field in the 525 standard video format For example a PDX 208 Disk Expansion unit expands storage up to twelve hours and a PRS 200 RAID Storage System can bring it up to approximately 96 hours For video stored in the MPEG format at an average 12 Mbp s you can just about double these capacities with video quality roughly equivalent to JPEG at 24 Mb s In addition to video compression the disk recorder boards also integrate the digital audio data coming from the EISA bus with typically four channels of audio per channel of video up to 32 These recorder boards communicate with the SCSI 2 interface using a Direct Memory Access DMA interface The PDR 200 300 and 400 also support the audio signal p
295. ssseeeeceeeseeeeeaeeeecesuaeeeessaseeesaeseeeesauseseeseasseesseaes 217 EIO E PION she aia R E T a Rae aes 217 Record DUNONG rig iei raa eesti act cote Rit asec OE A onic emia bee 217 ClipsNaMme Text DOK xoxo ross acetic casera cede N A te hee eneueees 218 RAINS DON CONVO Sies a a a ase 218 Record Buler dialog DOK sesiis a a eee Als 219 Create and User Mark buttons plus event and frame controls cccceeeeeeees 220 EGE UMEN Oeste esse i eles wind a ial le i ciutiareh i saute naa eceath eee eve 223 Tom NahiGles On INS edit UME NG x scsesseceie a ccscy ex ted teeta N 224 Audio contol sson a ee a a 226 LstManager WIN COW nanesen a N AS 233 Hardware Communication Monitor message DOX cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 234 Remote Machine dialog Dox saccvces acsiecee el eects eee a Andee 235 A pasie Dla VDAC AIST ste rsa ni ctect caterer lessees a eden eee tease nagtc ene acacia 237 Play event properties dialog DOX ccccsscccccssceeceseeeeeceeeseeecesaeeeeeseaeeeeesueeeeessaasees 238 Creating a Play OVEN cecccccccsesseececeesueeseeceecesaseeeeeeeseeeesaeeeeesseeeeseeeeesueaaeeeeeeesaaees 242 credtinga record ove eacctcSeuce tithe leet d Gcaemctuntacaeenteodavenesnidecssaetat eases detest 243 NeW SWIICh EVeNt GialOG OX scice sees cece se nets acters ceal ea ceases cceeertaceee eae 245 New Transfer Event dialog DOX csie aei Ta 246 New Transter Event dialog OX essseeccee ariecte Serge i ede ceeds a E tienes 247 Ne
296. st moved to the Recycle bin It is permanently deleted when the Recycle bin is emptied To delete a clip or master 1 Select the clip or master in the contents pane 2 Press Delete Backspace or choose Delete on the File menu or from the shortcut menu with the right click Press Shift Delete to skip the Recycle bin and delete the material immediately 3 The clip or master icon disappears from the tree and is moved to the Recycle bin 3 March 2000 Profile Family 99 da Chapter 3 Using Media Manager Emptying the Recycle Bin When a clip or master is deleted it is moved to the Recycle bin and is permanently deleted when the Recycle bin is emptied If an item of the same name is in the Recycle bin the new item is automatically renamed To empty the Recycle bin 1 Select the bin labeled Recycled in the tree pane 2 Choose Empty Recycle Bin with a right click or from the File menu To always delete media immediately avoiding the Recycle bin 1 Select the bin labeled Recycled in the tree pane 2 Choose Properties with the right click or from the File menu The Recycle Bin Properties dialog box appears see Figure 48 3 Click the Options check box to enable immediate removal of deleted items 4 Click OK Figure 48 Recycle Bin properties dialog box 100 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Viewing Properties Viewing Properties Media Manager lets you view the properties of a volume media properties for clips
297. t line level If you enter a number directly into a Level box the line level number is rounded to the nearest 0 5 dB 5 To adjust the trim for all channels at once use the Group Fader slider While the Group Fader moves all channels at once it maintains the individual channel differences NOTE If the audio interface box is not present the Monitor group will not appear If your system is configured with an XLR 216 digital only chassis channel selection ts the only option available in the Monitor Channels group 6 Click OK to accept your changes or click another tab 82 Profile Family 3 March 2000 System Audio Configuration System Audio Configuration To set recording and playback quality or audio scrubbing os 1 Choose Option Audio Configuration or click the System Audio Configuration button amp The System Audio Configuration dialog box appears Figure 40 System Audio Configuration Recording Wineliti J bit a Eit Scrubbing Enabled Elapback Giitrelttiy J bit 2m Eit Close Unde Help Figure 40 System Audio Configuration dialog box 2 By default recording and playback are set to 16 bit quality To change the audio quality click the 20 bit button for either recording playback or both Audio is played back at its recorded resolution even if the system is configured for 20 bit playback quality If 16 bit quality is enabled all audio will be played back at 16 bit
298. t Dvcpro Plaster Fibre Slave Mot Mot Figure 3 Profile Configuration Manager window 3 March 2000 Profile Family 33 da Chapter2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager To select an item from the configuration tree e The configuration tree appears on the left side of the window Clicking on an entry such as Video Input expands the list of choices Clicking on an expanded list of choices such as if you click on Video Input a second time collapses the list of choices e A single click opens the specific dialog box closing a previously opened box if necessary A double click opens the specific dialog box but does not close any other open dialog boxes To close all open dialog boxes at once choose Window Close All All changes in a dialog box take place immediately The Undo button will undo changes from the time a dialog box was opened in the current tab of the dialog box The Undo button is dimmed if there is nothing to undo The Help button opens context sensitive help related to the current dialog box By default the toolbar and status bar are shown in the Configuration Manager window To hide the toolbar or status bar e Choose View Toolbar or View Status Bar To view information about installed boards e Choose Help Installed Boards Information 34 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Saving a Configuration File Saving a Configuration File It is possible to preserve a configuration for later use You can
299. t Number Events are numbered as they are added to the current list The event number can t be changed because it provides a unique identifier for this event in the current list The event number does not determine the playback order Parent This setting uses the number of the event that precedes it the parent event and is valid only for Follow events Any event can be a parent event as long as it has a Follow event after it Type The event types are e The Absolute event type plays the material at the time specified in the Start Time An Absolute event is always displayed in bold face in the list e The Follow event type plays the event immediately after the preceding event in the list A Follow event is always displayed in regular face in the list 3 March 2000 Profile Family 239 Chapter9 Using the List Manager e The Approx event type is queued but will not play unless you select the event from the list and then issue a Take command An Approx event is always displayed in bold face in the list Date Enter the date on which you wish the event to take place Dates must be in the format used in your current Windows NT session usually MM DD Y YYY The current date is entered by default Settings Unique to Transfer Events Transfer events add these settings refer to Scheduling a Transfer Event on page 246 Source Media The path name of the source media Source Profile The name of the Profile unit where th
300. t Viewer application 191 Expanding the media tree 92 Explore in Media Manager 92 Profile Family 311 312 Index Exporting a cartridge 116 F Factory default 301 Fast Forward 148 218 fcconfig 199 fencs 205 fcping 203 Fibre Channel 32 87 197 Fibre Channel IP Address 199 Fibre Channel switch 201 Field 301 Field dominance 165 Field Selection 148 File Open 249 Save 249 File systems 168 Finding Clips and Masters 104 Finding media in Media Manager 104 Firmware 192 301 Fixed Q 137 Follow 248 Formatting cartridges 120 Forward One Field 149 fps 301 Frame 301 Free Run timecode 142 Freeze timecode 142 Frequency response 301 G Gain levels 226 Gaussian Chroma Filter 61 Generator timecode 142 Genlock 24 301 genlock 43 Go to Clip Beginning 149 Go to Clip End 149 GOP 302 Graphical user interface 301 Group 302 Group Fader 69 82 Group Name Box 149 GUI 301 Profile Family H Hard disk 302 Hardware Communication Monitor 88 209 234 Help 302 Help files 16 29 Hertz Hz 302 House Time 240 Hue 302 Icon definitions 92 I frame 302 Importing a cartridge 114 In marks 149 164 Input Clocking 79 Input device 302 Input mapping 77 Insert edit BYW 139 Insert Media 213 Insert record mode 302 Inserting events 248 Installed boards information 34 Intel 1960 real time processor 22 Internal Reference Timing 44 Internal storage 21 Internal timecode generator 272 Inventorying a ca
301. t actually set the duration of clips or video and audio quality you simply approximate based on how you anticipate using the cartridges You cannot set the number of partitions directly If you choose Multiple Partitions To set the anticipated length time duration of clips under the partitions select the number of seconds or minutes in the Partition Duration box Selecting Custom opens the Custom Duration box In the Custom box enter the duration of seconds in the range 1 to 9999 To set the anticipated quality of the video that you will use with these cartridges select a video quality from the Anticipated Video Quality box If you anticipate using higher video quality you will use more tape to store media This causes the format operation to create larger and fewer partitions To set the anticipated audio resolution that you plan to use with these cartridges select either 16 bits or 20 bits from the Anticipated Audio Quality box Different audio qualities affect the amount of tape used and therefore the number of partitions that will be created To allow more than one file clips under a partition click Multiple files per partition If unselected only a single clip may be archived per partition 4 Click OK 3 March 2000 Profile Family 121 Y Chapter 3 Using Media Manager Viewing Library Cartridge and Archived Clip Properties To view the properties for the library 1 Select the library icon in the tree pane 2
302. t eter eters fare re a aaa aai ee 251 Overriding Events m a List sicctesi ioc cece chee ce a e a a le ea ee 252 Fako FeV Clits arseen ta senda oben hermaiudva seen iecegaaces a took hima na Mee pettew ss apeanse hen anne ae 252 SOPP No aANT EVE M an a a e a aeaeesls 252 customizing Your LIStDIS OIV a AS 253 Sing the Event LOG sesei a r cee busasenece be 256 Chapter 10 Using the Resource Manager COMMUTING A CSOUNCES ssscsena pitt reevaser cc a area eats S 259 Assigning Profile Channels cccccsscsccccecessseseeeeeseesaeeeeeeeseeaueeseseeseeseseeeeeeseaaseseeeeeees 259 Configuring Video RESOUICES 2 2222 zecstsos2cs r aa a A edadededs 259 Fieid and Frame Sep oreren a e a aa AT oaa A Tae ETSER 267 Configuring Audio RESOUICES nnnnnnnnneessnnnnnnenesrnrensenrrrnrressnnrrnrrnernnressnnnrnrersnnnnen 268 Audio Window Setup ccccceeeeccecesseeeeeceeeesaeeeeeeeecesaseaeeseeseeaaeaeeeeeseeaaseeeeeesaeaneseees 270 Configuring Timecode RESOUICES ccececceceesseeeeececeeuueeceseeseeaeeeeeeesseaeeseeeessaeaneesees 271 GHOOSING hiMecOde C OS CS nsr a a E eaaettateenes 273 Timecode Generator Settings cricca cadiecncaddseivel ec leceedewneidccestvencniwscebavenced cee 274 Resolving RESOURCE COMMCIS 5 sce cis ceecarss a a 275 Chapter 11 Using TimeDelay Getting Started with Time Delay ss s2ccccstos 2ioreecetdertadsicecsdesencantdedonsialinieas saan oadesessabened eee see eis 278 Working With the TimeDelay Project
303. t you haven t scheduled conflicting events using the same Profile resources To validate a list e Choose Validate List from the Options menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click If a conflict arises the word Error appears in the Status left most column next to an invalid event Three errors are at the root e The media does not exist As a solution bring in the correct media or verify that the name is correct e There is a conflict for a channel resource For example a channel resource would generate an error if it is scheduled for use at the same time by two or more events To solve this problem change the events so that they don t attempt to use the resource at the same time e The media is not long enough that is the media is shorter than the duration of the event To fix this shorten the duration of the event to match the media 3 March 2000 Profile Family 241 242 Y Chapter 9 Using the List Manager Scheduling a New Play Event Another way to add events to a list is to open the New Play Event dialog box and enter the properties of the new event in the edit boxes 1 Open the list to which you are adding the play event 2 Choose File New Event Play to open the New Play Event dialog box as shown in Figure 135 3 Fill in the edit boxes with the various event properties If you select one of the repeat options you ll need to enter time and date settings 4 Click OK to close the dialog
304. tJ5 AES EBU Oute J5 AES EBU OutsJ5 AES EBU Out4 J5 AES EBU Out5 J5 AES EBU Out6 J5 AES EBU Out J5 AES EBU OuteJ5 AES EBU Outa J5 AES EBU QuttO J5 AES EBU Outt1 J5 AES EBU Outt2J5 AES EBU Outl 3 5 AES EBU Outl 4 5 AES EBU OutlS J5 ACIP ML a whe Ie Timecode Output LTC OutlJ16 LTC Oute J16 LTC Outs J16 LTC Qut4J16 SOI VITC Outa t14 SOI VITC OutbJ14 SOI VITC Outa t15 SOI VITC OutbJ15 lel Es Add Video Add Audio Add Timecode The Add Video Add Audio and Add Timecode buttons add the resources you select to the configuration file under construction Each time you click the Add button for a set of resources the resources are tagged as Used except for shared resources such as a Video Input which you can use several times The Clear button removes the Used tags from resources that have been added but not yet saved the Clear All button clears all Used tags in the dialog box including those for resources that have been saved The Create File button allows you to save the temporarily stored information in the permanent configuration file Resources being used by other applications such as VdrPanel are tagged as In Use If you wish to add In Use resources to the configuration file exit Profile Protocol Resources free the resources in the other Profile applications then restart Profile Protocol Resources 3 March 2000 Profile Family 179 Y Chapter6 Usin
305. tart the service By default the service is automatically restarted whenever the system is rebooted It is unlikely that you will ever need to start the service manually 7 Click on Stop to stop the service if desired 8 Click Close to close the Services dialog box gt gt gt CAUTION If the start up option is changed from Automatic the Profile applications are not able to run unless the service is started manually each time the system is rebooted 3 March 2000 Profile Family 191 1z Chapter6 Using Profile Utilities Updating Firmware From time to time it may be necessary to reprogram components on boards in your Profile disk recorder or video file server For example when you install DVCPRO boards in a PDR 200 you must upgrade components on the Master Enhanced Disk Recorder EDR board Updating the firmware in the selected components of these boards ensures that software and hardware will function together as expected To successfully update the EDR board it must be Revision 2 or higher You can determine the revision level of the boards by consulting the Profile log For information on reading logs see Viewing Profile Logs on page 173 NOTE You should perform this procedure whenver you install a new version of Profile System Software on your Profile system If you re installing an upgrade board such as the DVCPRO codec board be sure to update the EDR firmware before installing the board The reprogramm
306. tcher Mode A check mark appears next to Louth Switcher Mode in the Options menu to show that it is activated 3 To return the panel to normal mode choose Options Louth Switcher Mode again To set a panel to Louth end mode 1 Click the panel to activate it The panel controller must be Louth Automation For information on how to set the controller to Louth Automation see Selecting a Controller on page 131 2 Choose Options Louth End Mode A check mark appears next to Louth End Mode in the Options menu to show that it is activated 3 To return the panel to normal mode choose Options Louth End Mode again 140 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Selecting Video Crosspoints Selecting Video Crosspoints A video crosspoint shows the connection from a video input to output with a JPEG codec or DVCPRO codec between e Video inputs top left corner represent video input connectors on the back panel For example video inputs can be connected to JPEG or DVCPRO codecs for recording onto disk or connected to video output for display e Video outputs top right corner represent video output connectors on the back panel For example video outputs can be connected to JPEG or DVCPRO codecs for playback of recorded material from disk or to video inputs To specify video crosspoints 1 In VdrPanel choose Window Video Crosspoint to open the dialog box The green boxes indicate current connections For example a green box at
307. te Monitor Output To open the Analog Composite Monitor Output dialog box 1 Select Video Output from the configuration tree and then click or double click a monitor output from the list such as Monitor Out J12 The Analog Composite Monitor Output dialog box appears see Figure 23 Analog Composite Monitor Output J12 4 Montor Out J12 Main Burn in Time Code Name Monitor Outa J12 l Show Text Text Layout co O79 oO te to ho Large Font Small Font Dim Bright 10 TransparentBkg Opaque Bkg 12 Clear Display Close Help Figure 23 Analog Composite Monitor Output dialog box Main tab 2 Enter a new name in the Name box to change the signal name For example you could rename it to Monitor_1 Names can be up to 30 characters and can include spaces To return a renamed signal to the default delete all the characters in the text field and press Enter 3 Click Show Text to display text on an attached monitor Displaying text on a monitor is good way to help identify where the output is coming from 4 Under Text Layout you can select either a small or large font a dim or bright white character display and a transparent or opaque background for the lettering With the small font you get twelve lines and twenty four columns with the large you get six lines and thirteen columns 5 To enter text click in the text entry box and start typing where you want the text displayed on the monit
308. te a sequence of clips called a master The optional List Manager allows you to set up simple station automation The Resource Manager allocates video audio and timecode resources for the Tool Box Editor the List Manager and Time Delay TimeDelay also optional allows you to delay a video feed by a specific amount of time Other Profile utilities include Profile Log via WinTail ProLink and PortServer among others NOTE This manual assumes that you are familiar with basic Microsoft Windows operation Profile Family 15 Y Preface Related Documentation Several manuals related to the Profile Family User Manual include e On line manuals You can access on line help for an application at any time by choosing Help Help Topics e Profile System Version 3 X Release Notes Profile Family Installation Manual e PLS20 Library System Manual e PLS200 Library System Manual e PRS250 RAID Storage Instruction Manual e PDX208 Disk Expansion Chassis Instruction Manual e PRC100 Profile Control Panel User Manual e Microsoft Windows NT user documentation 16 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Terminology and Conventions Terminology and Conventions Button graphical Buttons shown in bold OK for example that you click with the mouse Button mouse Choosing Commands Clicking Ctrl key Double clicking Dragging Moving Pointer Pointing Right click Shift key 3 March 2000 pointer
309. ted directly in E to E mode at a predetermined time and remain in that mode until the next playback event A transfer event schedules the copying of media from one Profile video disk recorder to another Profile unit on the network requires Ethernet and Fibre Channel connections An archive event copies media to or from a Profile library system such as the PLS 200 or PLS 20 All of these capabilities are available on all Profile channels For example if you have four video channels you might choose to dedicate two channels to recording incoming material one for on air playback and the other for preview Each event can be scheduled to occur at an exact time on demand or it can follow other events You can override or stop a list at any time List Manager provides you with two ways of scheduling lists e Monitor You can drag and drop events into the list in Monitor view to schedule them immediately Monitor displays the On air List which is the name of the list that is controlling activities on your Profile List Manager always reads the On air List and will perform the events you see in the Monitor view at their appointed times unless you delete events The On air List can t be saved for future use There is one On air List and it has a limit of 5000 events 3 March 2000 Profile Family 231 F Chapter 9 Using the List Manager Edit Window You can build several lists in the Edit window to use at a later date or to store for rep
310. tesuneiscucteddenelecsencctend socesssdaceedleedseadendhest2 231 otaning List Manage ae ct ceeretncteacacincetnsneetceeetaiea E E aE a a eaa 233 VEe TACO E EE E EA E E 234 Closing List ManagSi eee eee eee eee ee eee eee eee eee aaa aa een ee ee 234 Configuring tet SO COS oo oc sapere secant aasteeeeedcneetaeitecapnacearedassieddolseepiiatedadeectceteeesncecte weuaeeeeneses 234 Connecting to a Remote Profile Machine cccccccceessesseeceeeeseeeeeeceeeessesseeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeees 235 Building a Playback LSE osc sctce ects peteatessenette secre senncdsed see vncenec ssesecesousdagnsecee cies acbcccatenedseeessesds 236 Adding Media tor Play OACK cc2ccsiie scistsmcdis vagtenese dnastieu shad acm chcade Scand cedetsnscboctepedteneeceneseeaceats 236 Changing Event Settings cccccccsccececceceeseeseeeeeseseeeeceeeeseeeseeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeesaaaeeeseeeeaaaees 238 Opional Colums ace see sete cence tee emeestse see e E ea Ea 239 Settings Unique to Transfer Events cccccsscccecceceesseseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeaeseeeeeesaeaneseees 240 Settings Unique to Archive Events ccccccccsesseeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeesseaeseseeeeaaaaes 240 Monitoring a List as it RUNS orastieccnencseties cnpiictae hauiiscde dieu dense dinssnecee utara wnat ca sersetcnmsesntaneaninaeien 240 3 March 2000 MANIC AUG LNG Verne teat tot ia aa a haaeencnee lugs beds neces 241 Scheduling a New Play Event sicssscasicd terse nec adie AAAS 242 Scheduling Reco
311. the clip A clip is a reference to video audio and timecode material recorded in media files on Profile disks A clip has a beginning and an end and when first recorded the beginning and end correspond to the first and last frames stored in the media file A clip may refer to the entire media file or just part of it When you delete a clip the media file that the clip referred to remains on disk only the reference to the media file is deleted not the media itself The Tool Box Editor is a graphical user interface that lets you create digital media by capturing video and audio clips while also providing an inexpensive cuts only editing system It lets you log video and audio material from a variety of sources such as a satellite feed live camera VTR CD player or microphone You can assemble material on disk and then send it back out to tape broadcast or archive After launching the Tool Box Editor see Figure 114 the first step you must take is to acquire resources such as codecs and audio channels with the Resource Manager Then you can capture a new clip or play an existing one Other common tasks include creating new masters playing masters creating subclips trimming clips and deleting media 3 March 2000 Profile Family 207 da Chapter Using the Tool Box Editor Starting and Exiting the Tool Box Editor To start the Tool Box Editor e Double click the Tool Box Editor shortcut icon on the desktop e Choose
312. the intersection of a SDI InA J14 serial digital video board in slot J14 and a Panel A MPEG Rec 1 encoder connects the video signal from the back panel input labeled Video I O Serial Digital Component IN A to an MPEG encoder Video Crozspoint O SDFnA JT4 SDAA O SDRnBJT4 SDrOutB 4 O SDFInA JT5 O SDFOut J15 O SDenBJ15 SDrOutB I5 unused Panel A JPEG 1 tH Panel A JPEG 2 T Pand A JPEG T Pianel A PEG T Panel A MPEG Ae H T i meen T i amaa T _ PEG Plavae T a a 2 iain T ne FFF FFH Oo ooo ga oo Gaa Doon urer ener ener er Meer ei aie Dano aharetar ener ear er eee Figure 81 Video Crosspoint dialog box 2 To assign a crosspoint click in the intersection boxes between a video signal and a JPEG codec or DVCPRO codec The selection boxes turn green You can also select a video signal and while holding down the left mouse button stretch a line to the desired resource NOTE Verify that you have the appropriate BNC connections on the rear panel 3 Click the Close button 3 March 2000 Profile Family 141 Chapter4 Using VdrPanel Setting Timecode You can set timecode crosspoints select drop frame timecode or select timecode panel display and generators Selecting How to Display Timecode on a Panel The Timecode Setup dialog box enables you to set the timecode display and the timecode source on a channel to the values r
313. times when the contents of the library system do not match the record of those contents in the library database This usually occurs when the cartridges have been added or removed by hand without appropriate inventories which is not recommended The inventory operation rescans the barcodes of the cartridges in the library and updates the database to the actual library contents To inventory the contents of the library 1 Select a library icon in the tree pane 2 Choose Inventory from the File menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click Since this operation may take several minutes Media Manager asks you to confirm that you want to inventory the entire library Confirm Inventory EJ Are you sure you want to do a full inventory of the library The library may be unavailable for some operations while it is being inventoried Figure 63 Confirm Inventory dialog box 3 Click Yes to inventory the entire library The inventory operation like all library operations is processed in the background This allows you to continue working with the Media Manager while the operation is being performed The Transfer Monitor tool is used to view background transactions To view the Transfer Monitor click the Profile logo or choose Tools Transfer Monitor 3 March 2000 Profile Family 119 Y Chapter 3 Using Media Manager Formatting Cartridges When you format one or more cartridges all storage space is reallocated and the cartr
314. to select the window where you want to send the input The window manager such as Windows NT determines the shape of the pointer See Pointing Device Pointing device Typically a mouse tablet or some other device with effective dimensional motion See Pointer 304 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Port A physical connection such as a multi pin connector or coaxial connector and its associated firmware that permits one computing device to communicate data and control information with another computing or peripheral device P Picture A P picture is a predictive picture used in MPEG video compression MPEG uses motion prediction to increase efficiency that is 1t reduces data by not duplicating pixels that do not change from frame to frame A P picture relies on data from forward moving motion vectors to determine how a future frame will be composed See B Picture GOP I frame Protocol A set of rules that allows computers to transfer information across a network to other computers Read only memory ROM Memory that is not erased when power is turned off It is also called firmware The firmware in a computing device allows it to boot without being connected to a host computer Real time Generally considered to be 30 fps in NTSC 25 fps in PAL 24 fps for film In computer terms processing information as it becomes available rather than storing for processing at a later time Record Buffer Determines the length of
315. to the default value 100 percent Click Undo to return the values in the dialog box to their original settings Click Close to accept all inputs Profile Family 49 Y Chapter2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager Analog Composite Video Input Advanced Control The Advanced Control tab allows you to select a decode mode clamp speed and other settings depending on which analog composite card you have To change advanced controls settings 1 Click or double click on the Advanced Control tab to view it Figure 14 shows the dialog box for the most recent analog composite video cards while Figure 15 shows the dialog box for earlier cards Analog Composite Video Input J5 4 Composite In4 J5 ee irs reel SY lie E SE EE E OF sya SERIO EASE Figure 15 Analog Composite Video Input dialog box Advanced Control tab B 2 Click a setting for decode mode Decode mode determines how the chrominance and 50 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Analog Composite Video Input Advanced Control luminance information is separated for conversion for storage There are three options for the current analog composite cards and four options for the earlier cards Notch Filter Decode mode separates the chrominance by using a notch filter around the chrominance subcarrier This leaves the high frequency luminance intertwined with the chrominance A notch decoder readily determines horizontal lines are line to line luminance Fine ve
316. ton in a column This displays a list containing analog AES EBU or SDI audio groups Unavailable audio groups appear dimmed 4 Click on the group of channels you want Any single group of AES EBU channels may be mapped to any group of disk channels 5 Click OK to accept your changes or click another tab Output Mapping The Output Mapping tab is used for mapping Profile disk channels to output destinations If analog or AES EBU audio types are present they are always mapped to their associated channels These audio types cannot be unmapped Channels may be mapped to multiple audio types but of these only one can be a serial digital embedded or SDI audio type To map output channels ee 1 Choose Option Audio Configuration Board 1 or 2 or click an ASPB Configuration button The Audio Configuration dialog box appears Figure 37 2 Click the Output Mapping tab 3 Click on a button in a column This displays a list containing analog AES EBU or SDI audio groups Unavailable audio groups appear dimmed 4 Click on the group of channels you want The audio channel may be mapped to any of the outputs in groups of four 5 Click OK to accept your changes or click another tab Input Clocking The Input Clocking tab is used for assigning video input clocking sources to input audio channels The first column on the left side of the dialog box displays the disk recorder channel numbers The last column shows the audio clock refer
317. ton is context specific If an archive transaction was selected the button is labeled Cancel Archive If a network copy was selected the button is labeled Cancel Transfer 7a Occasionally an error will occur while a transfer is in progress The destination machine may have unexpectedly run out of storage the network connection may have gone down there may have been trouble reading an archive library cartridge An error is indicated by a change in the Profile logo In the Transfer Monitor entries that could not complete due to error are displayed in red and their percent complete shows Error When the entry is selected a short description of the error is shown at the bottom of the window To remove the entry select it and then click the Remove button 128 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Chapter 4 Using VdrPanel Storing media on a Profile disk recorder rather than on tape opens the door to almost instant access to digital video and audio material Media is available to all of Profile s channels at once so you can play a video and audio clip on more than one channel at the same time Since each of the channels is independent playback can start at a different time and place in a clip One of the best features of the Profile system is that you can start playing material while it s still being recorded The basic element of digitally stored video and audio is the clip A clip is a reference to video audio and timecode material recor
318. tput mapping 79 3 March 2000 PDR 100 21 84 PDR200 21 Profile 67 Audio Resources configuring 268 setting the audio window size 270 Audio signal processing board ASPB 23 audio window size setting 270 Auto Start 287 297 Auto Timing 42 B picture 298 Back One Field 149 Bad blocks 171 Betacam 139 Bin 87 archiving 112 cleaning up 220 creating a new 98 deleting 99 renaming 99 restoring from archive 113 Bit rate 298 Black Level 61 Blocks 171 BNC 216 Digital Interface chassis 23 67 BNC connections 141 298 Boards information on 34 Bounce 148 Building a list 236 Burn in timecode 24 64 BVW 131 BVW insert edit 139 BVW clip length 133 BVW Insert Edit 43 Bytes per Field 137 C Camera 207 Capture 298 Capture timeline 216 Capturing clips 207 Profile Family 309 310 Index Cartridge properties 122 Cartridge Tape 298 CCIR 601 22 CD player 207 CD ROM 298 Changing configuration files 181 Channel 298 Channels audio 226 Checksums 200 Chroma 298 Chroma Gain 61 Chroma Phase 61 Chroma Reduction 52 Cleaning Cartridge 298 Cleanup Media 220 Clip 299 archiving 112 capture 217 capturing 207 clip list 161 define 154 delete 99 159 drag and drop 219 edit a list 163 eject 155 159 group 161 load 156 lock 158 long names 159 new 154 play 156 219 protect 158 record 217 renaming 99 157 restoring from archive 113 short names 159 striping 159 subclip 220 trimming 220 unlock 158 Clip length
319. u can conveniently view and change VITC settings for genlock and all available inputs and outputs To set the master timecode VITC settings ian 1 Choose Option Master Timecode or click the Master Timecode button on the toolbar The Master VITC Setting dialog box appears Figure 6 Master ITC Setting Genlock Genlock Timecode Fl Input Timecode CompositednAJ5 O CompositednAd e SDl InA J13 VITC SDHnB J13 Present CAVIAR ae Output Timecode Composite Outa J11 Composite OutB J11 Composite OutC 11 Composite OutD J11 queer SDl Qut J13 SDl OutB J13 VITC Reader setting M Automatic ITC detect Figure 6 Master Timecode dialog box genlock settings 2 The VITC Present status indicator should be on green if VITC 1s present If VITC Present is not on use one of the following options e Manual VITC detection four channel LTC version of the reference genlock board Verify Automatic VITC detect is not selected If it is click to toggle it Set VITC Reader Linel to the expected location of the first Reader Line and VITC Reader Line2 to the second expected Reader Line If you only have one VITC line enter the same value on both Reader lines Check VITC Present If it is still not on use a waveform monitor to check the genlock signal to make sure that VITC exists on these lines e Automatic VITC detection only Verify Automatic VITC detect is selected If it i
320. ues for Fixed Q and Chroma Q are 5 00 Verify that there is sufficient available data rate headroom before using Fixed Q mode The Bytes per Field target attempts to meet the Lum and Chroma goals With Fixed Q mode Bytes per Field can increase beyond the system bandwidth causing interference with other channels Bytes per Field is the target compression rate Not every field requires the target rate it is simply the average rate the disk recorder tries The higher the rate the better the picture detail The actual Bytes per Field depends on the picture complexity Min Lum Q and Max Chroma Q The algorithm dynamically changes Min Lum Q and Max Chroma Q to make the field size meet the target unless Fixed Q is selected 4 Click OK 3 March 2000 Profile Family 137 138 Chapter 4 Profile Family Using VdrPanel Table 8 Factory set values for JPEG compression presets 525 60 Standard 625 50 Standard Preset Name Bytes Field Bytes Field mie Q rete Q ae Q Saas Q Most recording time Edit compression presets Preset Name JPEG 0 75 Min lum Q Best compromise Wost recording time Custom setting 100 00 Max chroma Q Fixed fi 00000 Bytes per field MPEG 5 PperGOP amp 4 o 3 2 B per I P C 47270 OK 0 GOP i Cancel open 24 00000 Bit rate Mb sec Figure 80 Edit Compression Presets dialog box 120000 90000 60000 3 March 2000 Setting up BVW ins
321. up to 32 channels possible analog optional possible analog optional Digital audio XLR216 BNC216 XLR216 BNC216 interfaces Analog audio PAC 208 8 channel PAC 208 8 channel interfaces PAC216 16 channel PAC216 16 channel Internal storage 12 hours JPEG 24 Mb s 12 hours JPEG 24 Mb s 24 hours MPEG 12 Mb s 12 hours DVCPRO 25 6 hours DVCPRO 50 Mainframe 30 Mb s 30 Mb s bandwidth 10 100 BaseT 10 100 BaseT Fibre Channel ready Fibre Channel ready RS 422 Profile Louth Odetics BVW Profile Louth Odetics BVW protocols Reference NTSC and PAL NTSC and PAL signals 525 60 and 625 50 525 60 and 625 50 Video Continuously variable motion JPEG Continuously variable motion JPEG compression MPEG 4 2 0 or 4 2 2 DVCPRO 3 March 2000 Profile Family 21 Chapter 1 Introducing the Profile Family A Profile System Overview The PDRseries of video servers are multichannel digital disk recorders All models in the PDR series are capable of supporting up to four play record channels codecs of continuously variable motion JPEG video compression The PDR 200 supports Fibre Channel networking The PDR300 supports MPEG 4 2 0 4 2 2 video compression with up to two record channels encoders and up to eight playback channels decoders Each channel can play back one video and up to 16 audio signals each capable of using different video formats In other words one Profile unit can replace the functionality o
322. uses Windows NT 4 0 and connects to a remote Profile unit over an Ethernet local area network LAN When TimeDelay starts on the PC or when you choose File Remote Connection the Remote Connection dialog box shown in Figure 167 appears NOTE TimeDelay remote connection is allowed only when TimeDelay is running on a PC Consequently the TimeDelay Remote Connection dialog box does not appear when TimeDelay is launched on a Profile unit and the File Remote Connection menu item is not available when TimeDelay is running on a Profile unit To connect to a remote Profile unit 1 Select one of the names in the Network Host List 2 Click on Connect or double click on the name in the Network Host List The Connection Status dialog box appears while TimeDelay establishes a connection with the selected Profile unit If the connection cannot be established an error message is displayed e Press Cancel to return to the Remote Connection dialog box TimeDelay Remote Connection Network Hos St Add profile 3 profiles pr020909 Remove 128 181 199 237 Cancel Help Figure 167 The Remote Connection dialog box 280 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Connecting to a Remote Profile Unit Changing the Remote Connection To connect to a different machine 1 Choose File Remote Connection to open the Remote Connection dialog box 2 Select one of the names in the Network Host List 3 Click on Conn
323. ut mark you can also press u This action affects all copies of this clip on all panels The trimmed material is not retrievable A warning message and verification prompt are displayed before the material is trimmed The Set Out Mark button sets an out mark for the current clip at the current timecode you can also press o not zero When the clip is played it ends at the out mark however the portion after the out mark is not lost Use Remove Out Mark to remove out mark An out mark only affects this instance of the clip If the clip repeats in the clip list or is used by another panel the out mark is not automatically present The Remove Out Mark button removes the out mark and restores the clip to its last available field The Group Name box lists the name of the current clip list The Go to Clip End button jumps to the end of the current clip You can also press e The Forward One Field button moves the current clip position forward one field You can also press the key In addition Shift advances the clip position 10 fields or 5 frames and Ctrl advances the clip position 100 fields or 50 frames The Back One Field button moves the current clip position backward one field You can also press the key In addition Shift lt reverses the clip position 10 fields or 5 frames and Ctrl lt reverses the clip position 100 fields or 50 frames The Go to Clip Beginning button jumps to the beginning of the current clip
324. ut menu with a right click You can also select the bin a second time 3 The name of the bin is highlighted Type a new name for the bin and press Enter NOTE Deleting a bin involves deleting every clip or master currently in the bin If a clip or master cannot be deleted because it is locked or in use the bin is not deleted either it will only contain those clips or masters that could not be deleted The rest go to the Recycle bin or are deleted directly To delete a bin 1 Select the bin or bins in either the tree or contents pane 2 Press Delete Backspace choose Edit Delete or with a right click choose Delete from the shortcut menu Press Shift Delete to skip the Recycle bin and delete the bin or bins immediately 3 The bin icon disappears from the tree and the contents of the bin are moved to the Recycle bin Renaming Clips and Masters A clip or master can have a name up to 32 characters long Spaces are legal characters but count for two characters Colons and slashes are illegal in clip and master names Tildes are only illegal as first characters To rename a clip or master 1 Select the clip or master in the contents pane 2 Choose Rename on the File menu or with a right click You can also select the item a second time 3 The name of the clip or master is highlighted Type a new name for the clip or master and press Enter Deleting Clips and Masters When a clip or master is deleted it is ju
325. ver validity Parity Error Parity error CRC Error CRC subframe errors Emphasis Detected emphasis 3 March 2000 Profile Family 71 Y Chapter2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager If you want to bypass the sample rate converter 1 In the Digital Audio Input dialog box click the Sample Rate Converter tab Figure 31 By default the sample rate converter is enabled The sample rate converter affects all four channel inputs Digital Audio Inputs J12 Inputs 9 12 Figure 31 Digital Audio Input dialog box Sample Rate Converter tab 2 Click Bypass Sample Rate Converter NOTE Do not bypass sample rate conversion unless you are certain that all inputs and outputs are synchronous 3 After you have disabled the sample rate converter click Close or another tab 72 Profile Family 3 March 2000 Analog Audio Output Analog Audio Output In analog audio output you can change audio channel names change line modes for XLR connectors or adjust individual or group line levels in decibels Click Undo if you want to cancel any changes or click Help for context sensitive Help To configure analog audio output 1 Expand Audio Output and then click one of the Analog Channels to bring up the Analog Audio Output dialog box The channel numbers on the left refer to the physical output connectors on the audio output box Ch 01 refers to the first connector and Ch 02 refers to the second connector and so forth Analo
326. video inputs depends on the number of available video channels Selecting one of the video inputs sets the group of four channels to use the selected input as their audio clocking source 3 Click OK to accept your changes or click another tab 3 March 2000 Profile Family 81 F Chapter2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager Audio Configuration Monitor Channels Tab Under the Monitor Channels tab you can select recording and playback quality and adjust monitor channels ee 1 Choose Option Audio Configuration Board 1 or 2 or click an ASPB Configuration e button The Audio Configuration dialog box appears Figure 39 Audio Signal Processing Board 1 J6 Input Mapping Input Clocking Output Mapping Monitor Channels Channel Selection Levels Level dB C 09 10 Channel 07 jo C 0 04 11 12 05 06 13 14 Channel 02 eT C o7sog 15 16 Group Fader Figure 39 Audio Configuration dialog box Monitor Channels tab 2 Click the Monitor Channels tab 3 Under Monitor Channels the Channel Selection box allows you to select which channels you want to monitor Click next to a channel pair to select them You can now adjust line levels for the pair 4 The line level range is 12 to 0 dB If you trim the line level for an individual channel with the slider handle the line level is incremented by 1 dB clicking on either side of the slider handle increments the line level by 0 5 dB The Level boxes show the curren
327. w Listaialog DOX cries Oreo See ce a ciate oleh Cae eee Niles exc ne lie haus ue ele aia ELL 249 FONE ClalOO OX veins oa sites sca cccdees eee eens ea tected Silos ha as lscgcanes ected 253 Color dialog box with custom color controls SHOWN c ccceccceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeees 254 Columns dialog DOK Soe erect a ene le Nar ee sc ee 255 An example of a log file auch tcc itxaietalracotat ccamtctatencdse toss Maneasu ieee adtaeheiac sens talc ota eds 256 Resource Manager dialog DOX ccccccsseseeecessseecesueeeeeesuaueeeseseseeeeesassseeseaseeesseaes 257 CHOOSING a channel type cccc cee eseeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeseeeeeeesseeeeeeeseeaseaeeeeeeeesaeseeeeeeees 260 PG Wack GialOG OO xsfOr VIC CO ices ats cess cee she ec reece ol an em 260 Custom Video Quality Settings dialog box JPEG ee ceccceeseeeeeeseeeeeeseeaeeeeens 261 MPEG Video track SCHINGS cossin i iE 262 JPEG video Wack SUING S xc cisesctss oan etree a nected Bienes Samet 263 DYVCPRO video track SetliNgS ecenin a a dieccaeeeed hee 264 JFEG COdeCEChNecKk DOK CS eean a a E 265 DVGPRO Codec check DOXES sapiri a e aa 266 Field Frame setup Conio S aa fn cette a lnc tibeeee adres eee ied 267 Audio inputs and outputs x02 sac letteesecesneceubal andtestic eed ci oeee te cade senha Races 268 Add Nirack dialog DOx1Or Au O ican cence ceed voce eevee ee eae 269 Audio Window Size list DOX cece ceecceeseceeceeeeee ees eeceeeeeesueeeceeeeeeseaeesseeeeeaeeeeeseseeeaes
328. w and the New List dialog box appears Please choose a name for the new list Cancel Figure 140 New List dialog box 2 Enter a name for the list Click OK to save the new list Saving a List You must save a list to your system s hard disk if you want to use it at a later date To save the list 1 Choose File Save As 2 Enter a different name for the list Click OK to save the list Reusing a List There are two ways to reuse a list that you created earlier 1 In the Edit window choose File Open and select the desired list When the list opens choose Edit Schedule List to integrate the list into the On air List 2 In the Monitor view drag the list from a Media Manager window to the On air List The dragged events are added to the bottom of the On air List Make sure you select the appropriate channel before dragging in the list then change the Channel settings to match In either case List Manager checks for conflicts with events already in the On air List If it finds any conflicts such as events using the same channel or output at the same time 1t will report these errors so that you can take corrective action The word Error will appear in the status cell of the event causing the conflict Right click on the event choose Event Property Alt Enter and read the error information in the Event Properties dialog box You can also double click the event to get properties 3 March 2000 Profile Family 24
329. w you to view Profile system logs with the graphical log viewer WinTail This log viewer allows you to see the end of a log file To learn more about how to view Profile logs see Chapter 6 Using Profile Utilities e ProLink monitors Profile Protocol calls over RS 422 communication lines allowing you to use a controller such as the PRC 100 Control Panel to communicate with a Profile system For more information on Profile Protocol see the documentation that accompanies the Profile Software Development Kit e PortSever allows you to control a Profile unit remotely using Ethernet communications For example you can run PortServer on a remote Profile system so that you can control it over a LAN from another Profile or PC PortServer is generally used in conjunction with Fibre Channel operations e PDR Access Control is a Windows NT service that prevents one application from crashing another application by mistake Though largely transparent to users the service prevents applications from accidentally reloading the video processor while in use essentially providing a controlled gateway to the processor e Update Firmware reprograms components on boards in your PDR200 Video File Server such as the Master Enhanced Disk Recorder EDR board Updating the firmware in the selected components of these boards ensures that software and hardware will function together as expected e Update Fibre Channel Microcode updates the microcode on Fibre Ch
330. y P1 through P8 132 PAL 23 102 215 304 Panel Back One Field 149 basics 147 Bounce 148 Clip Name Box 150 Clip Position Bar 149 Fast Forward 148 Field Selection 148 Forward One Field 149 Go to Clip Beginning 149 Go to Clip End 149 Group Name Box 149 Loop 148 making active 151 Normal 148 PB EE 149 Play 148 Playback 149 Record 148 Remove In Mark 149 Remove Out Mark 149 Rewind 148 Set In Mark 149 Set Out Mark 149 Shuttle Bar 149 Shuttle Rate 149 150 Stop 148 tiling 151 Timecode 147 Trim from Out Mark 149 Trim to In Mark 149 Panel control 131 Parameter 304 Parent Event column 239 Partitions 304 Pass On Y 54 Paste Special 96 PB EE 149 PDR 200 22 PDR 300 22 PDR 400 22 PDR Access Control 191 PDR Network Configuration Service 205 3 March 2000 PDR100 Audio 84 PDR 200 300 400 Audio 67 PDX 208 23 PDX 208 Disk Expansion Chassis 168 PDX 208 Disk Expansion Chassis Instruction Manual 16 Peak hold 152 Physical volumes 168 Pixel 304 Play 148 218 Playback 149 304 Playback delay 304 Playing clips 156 PLS 20 and PLS 200 Profile Library Systems 87 PLS 20 Library System Manual 16 PLS 20 Profile Library System 112 PLS 200 Library System Manual 16 PLS 200 Profile Library System 112 Pointer 304 Pointing device 304 Port 132 305 PortSever 190 Powering on 27 PRC 100 configuration 178 PRC 100 Profile Control Panel 129 PRC 100 Profile Control Panel User Manual 16 Presets 137 Profile Audio 67
331. y those clips is also copied This is made possible by using a combination of Ethernet and Fibre Channel networks Ethernet is used for lower speed database transfers and queries The high speed Fibre Channel network is used for transferring the actual media between machines Copying media is done in the background to allow you to continue with your work Adding to and restoring from an archive also is done in the background Since this may result in more than one transfer occurring at the same time the Transfer Monitor is used to keep track of these background tasks Each time a media transfer is started a new entry appears in the Transfer Monitor The Transfer Monitor can be opened at any time It consists of two tabs the Network tab which shows all copies over Fibre Channel and Duplicates in progress and the Library tab which shows any ongoing library transactions To track background operations with the Transfer Monitor e Choose Tools Transfer Monitor or click the Profile logo on the toolbar The Transfer Monitor dialog box appears Transfer Monitor Network Library Operation Souce Destination Complete Archiving PDR200_17NT default Clip FDR200_17Librarn 000 52 pa Pending Cancel Archive Figure 71 Transfer Monitor dialog box The Profile logo on the Media Manager toolbar is animated whenever there is an archive item in the Transfer Monitor whether the Transfer Monitor is open or not If there are on
332. y window appears Enter the desired value in the form 00 00 00 00 and press Enter The value is changed to the desired timecode If an entry in the timecode entry window is out of bounds it is ignored 00 00 00 00 Figure 120 Timecode entry window The E to E Electronics to Electronics button is to the right of the duration timecode indicator By default E to E is off If you click on this button E to E is activated When E to E is off the monitor shows the active timeline s current position When it is on and no clips are playing or recording the Profile channel s live video input bypasses the codec and is directly connected to the outputs Figure 121 E to E button Capturing a New Clip Now you are ready to capture or record a new clip Video Enable Button Record Button Audio Enable Button Figure 122 Record buttons 1 First you need to enable video and or audio for recording To enable inputs for recording you can click on video or audio buttons The buttons are lit when activated 2 All acquired audio channels may be used when recording new clips However you need to select a set of audio channels To select a set of audio channels for recording e Click the Audio Enable button e Enable audio channels by clicking on the channel selection button above the appropriate audio meter See Figure 129 3 March 2000 Profile Family 217 da Chapter Using the Tool Box Editor 3 Enter the new cli
333. zecseee eeccees sec seeven acest neces at cede a bk 25 WV AT TOIR SAFIN asesinan ten aes cman acts ated cetage dem tiueratde mare aeiocust es iedcasusteeacasuseenesee 26 Starting YOUN Prole SY SIOIN sto eis ens cece O cece 27 Starting and Closing Profile Applications cccccccssscseececeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeeeeeesaaaaees 28 Stang aM ADPIC enone eae setae A en eee se oie een rear 29 AACA 1A hg 21 eeg onr renee enrt a e nee tL Mhennnereer Serer tatiana a eels rari terre eer nee 29 CIGSINGvam ADP liGAtlONecesecessesteces ois a ethene wre dace meant 29 TOME ADDI CALOMS a sicc sniadtacte canis a cineca taassaualecetse duane ence azseanasaunooaemtuetce 29 Profile Connguration Wanagen fecasds cssesecadsciascecesterewesa las ncebuesiacbakoasteew sy eeerenieee 29 Media Managers orna aaron ues a eal eet cece auiaceaien aa ameesesaoee 30 TASCO dE UUN gaueenete eee eee meee a ee ie eee eee 30 MGI ANON eenn 5 wraccntes ds E S 30 Prone DiISk UU sheeted cateecstes a aati dacace oeencadaaeretecscnaee 30 Ho 6 It 6 al 0 6 fetan E i aes a eee ee eee ee eer eee 31 Hel IV UTIL a ga te acta Sere adelals oan eacaatenndeses oes a mn seau teeter oeealasoie naa teen acon 31 WENMNGD CLAY devceetct aacupnde deuce E E OEE 31 Prone UE e mene nance ee ner ane nee Oren eRe ie erent te ace men ken nett ec men een nee 32 Fibre Channel SU ODOR asia etter iss ead SO te erica Cea dN Rt hs Mee cl cal neice 32 Using the Profile Configuratio

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

第75回定時株主総会招集ご通知(2015年6月3日)  PDFダウンロード  Epson Artisan 835  Dynamode 4-Port USB2.0 PCI Card  Ethan Frome  Rexel Auto+300X    Deafgard user guide 2.2_Deafgard  i5 AW & i5T AW USER MANUAL  ADVERTENCIA  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file